Sie sind auf Seite 1von 460

Instruction book

Combine Harvester

5650 H, 5660 HTS, 5660 HTS Balance

5690 HTS, 5690 HTS Balance


5680 H, 5680 H Balance

Head offices
Deutz-Fahr Strasse, 1
D-89415 Lauingen
Tel. (09072) 997-0
www.deutz-fahr.de
Contents

Contents

Combine Harvester
5650 H 5690 HTS Balance

307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 i.1


Contents
1. Foreword/Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31
Symbol conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 Function set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33
Function set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35
2. Safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1 Basic settings of the on-board
com puter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36
3. Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1

4. Construction and functions . . . . . . . .4.1 7. Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . .7.1


General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 System start and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8
Construction of the combine harvester . . . . .4.3 Selecting the language/
Construction of the cutting table . . . . . . . . . .4.6 Setting the viewing angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.9
Construction of the threshing section . . . . . . .4.8 Setting the speed warning limits . . . . . . . . .7.10
Construction of the winnowing section . . . . . .4.9 Setting the automatic reel speed control . . .7.11
Setting the concave clearances . . . . . . . . . .7.12
5. Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Rapid opening of threshing concave/
separator concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13
6. Operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1 Sieve adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.15
Overview of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16
Central instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4 Calibration sieve adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .7.17
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6 Calibrating the straw guide plate . . . . . . . . .7.19
TERIS/TCS terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7 Calibrating the spreader plates . . . . . . . . . .7.20
Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8 Calibrating the concave clearances . . . . . . .7.21
EMR-D control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9 Error messages and warnings . . . . . . . . . . .7.22
Control console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11 List of warning and error messages . . . . . . .7.23
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12
Commander Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12 8. Electronic cutting table control
Air conditioner control panel . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13 (EMR-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1
Lighting control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13 Operating principle and functions
Sieve adjustment controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13 of the Electronic Cutting Table Control . . . . . .8.3
Compressor-type cooling system controls . .6.14 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
Lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9
Air recirculating filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9
Fresh air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16 Mounting and dismounting
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16 front attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
Defroster nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.17
Fresh air nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.18
Inspection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.19
Beverage holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.20
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17
Steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18 9. Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18 Adjusting the Balance system
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19 on the combine harvester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
Passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19 Operating the Balance system . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21 Operating the automatic cutting
Foot-operated controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21 angle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4
Service brake, steering brake . . . . . . . . . . .6.21 Response time of the automatic
Parking brake, handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21 cutting angle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6
Hinged window/emergency exit . . . . . . . . . .6.22
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22 10. Tests before commissioning . . . . . .10.1
Exterior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23
Grain loss monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28

i.2 307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Contents
11. Driving and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1 Replacing components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.34
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2 Replacing knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.34
Engine operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4 Replacing knife blades and fingers . . . . . .12.34
Engine monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.6 Replacing reel tines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.35
Ground drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.9 Changing the linings
Operating principle and instructions of the slipping clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.35
for the brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.10 Setting the slipping clutches . . . . . . . . . . .12.35
Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.11 Troubleshooting on the cutting table . . . .12.36
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.12
Variable steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.13 13. Threshing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.1
Ballasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.14 Safety instructions
Towing the combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.16 for the threshing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2
Transport driving over distances . . . . . . . . .11.16 Crop elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2
Threshing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4
12. Cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2 Engaging the threshing section . . . . . . . . .13.4
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2 Setting the drum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5
Construction of the cutting table . . . . . . . . . .12.4 Rapid opening of the threshing
Reel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 concave/separator concave . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6
Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 Threshing drum reduction gear . . . . . . . . . .13.6
Intake auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 Basic adjustment of the concave . . . . . . . .13.8
Support cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 Basic setting of the separator concave . . .13.11
Mounting the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.6 Reversing drum equipment . . . . . . . . . . .13.12
Connecting the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8 De-awning plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.13
Connecting the control lines . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.9 Cleaning the drum and concave . . . . . . . .13.14
Dismounting the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . .12.11 Emptying the stone trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.15
Transport and transport trolley . . . . . . . . . . .12.14 Adjusting the dust plates . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.16
Cutting angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.18 Straw walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.19 Integrated straw chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.18
Raising and lowering the cutting table . . .12.19 Chopper KPAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.20
Engaging the cutting table drive . . . . . . . .12.19 Chaff spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.22
Disengaging the cutting table drive . . . . . .12.19 Spreader plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.23
Pick-up reel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.20 Screening and winnowing . . . . . . . . . . . .13.25
Reversing the cutting table drive . . . . . . . . .12.21 Diffuser setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.25
Manual reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.21 Setting the fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.26
Mounting optional attachments . . . . . . . .12.22 Activating/deactivating automatic
Ear lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.22 reel speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.26
Crop divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.23 Changing and adjusting sieves . . . . . . . .13.27
Spreader bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.24 Calibrating the sieve adjustment . . . . . . . .13.33
Important notes for operation . . . . . . . . . . .12.25 Setting the sieve extensions . . . . . . . . . . .13.34
Maintenance and adjustment . . . . . . . . . .12.26 Emergency adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.34
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.26 Grain tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.35
Adjusting the reel tines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.27 Retracting/extending the grain tank
Venting the reel lifting cylinders . . . . . . . .12.27 extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.38
Adjusting the tension of the V-belt Cover plate adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.40
for the cutting knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.28 Grain tank discharge pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.40
Intake auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.29 Emptying the grain pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.41
Replacement of the feed fingers . . . . . . .12.30 Fully emptying the grain pipe . . . . . . . . . . .13.42
Setting the slipping clutches Grain elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.43
after a long period out of operation . . . . . .12.31 Returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44
Transport trolley, version with brakes . . . .12.32 Adjusting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44

307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 i.3


Contents
Adjusting the drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.14
Friction insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.16
Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.45 Central lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.17
Cleaning the returns elevator . . . . . . . . . .13.45 Installation diagrams , central lubrication
Cleaning the conveyor augers . . . . . . . . .13.45 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.19
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.46 Maintenance and care of engine . . . . . . .17.20
Draining/filling the cleaning system . . . . . . .17.30
14. Basic adjustments Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.35
on the threshing section . . . . . . . . . .14.1 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.37
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.41
15. Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.1 Safety instructions for brakes . . . . . . . . . .17.41
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.2 Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.42
Components of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.43
Control-valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.4 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.44
Emergency operation of the solenoid Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.44
valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.4 Side gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.44
Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.6 Final drive Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.45
Changing the return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.7 Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.47
Replacing the filter of the ground drive Threshing drum reduction gear . . . . . . . . .17.48
hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.8 Maintenance of drive systems . . . . . . . . .17.49
Changing the line filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.9 Drive shafts and reduction gears . . . . . . .17.49
Oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.11 Drive belts and chains, overview . . . . . . .17.50
Driving hydraulics, faults and remedies .15.12 Speed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.51
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12 General maintenance instructions . . . . . . .17.52
Zero point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12 Adjusting the lengths
Pump displacement sluggish or blocked . .15.12 of the tension springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.53
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.14 Checking the tension springs . . . . . . . . . .17.54
Checking the hydraulic functions . . . . . . . . .15.14 Belt clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.58
Basic adjustment of belt clutches . . . . . . .17.58
16. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.1 Checking the lengths of the
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.3 servomotor springs for the belt clutch . . . .17.59
Overview of the electrical system . . . . . . . . .16.4 Threshing section clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.62
Battery master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.6 Straw chopper clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.63
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.6 Grain tank clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.63
Checking the acid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.6 Cutting table clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.64
Connecting/disconnecting the battery . . . . .16.7 Function test of the clutches . . . . . . . . . . .17.64
Fuses, microrelays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.8 Tension struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.65
Fuse layout in the control cabinet . . . . . . .16.10 Straw walker drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.66
Relay layout in the control cabinet . . . . . .16.13 Intake fan belt drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.66
Integrated switch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.15 Winnowing fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.67
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.16 Returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.68
Adjusting the crank rod of the
17. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.1 sieve box drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.70
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.2 Grain elevator drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.70
Operating fluids and filling capacities . . . . . . .17.4 Grain tank discharge drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.71
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.5 Threshing drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.72
Maintenace and inspection schedule . . . . . . .17.6 Crop elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.73
Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality . . . . . . . .17.8 Slipping clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.73
Instructions for diesel fuel handling . . . . . . . .17.9 Adjusting the slipping clutch . . . . . . . . . . .17.74
Cooling system preservative . . . . . . . . . . .17.12 Cleaning the air filter in the driver's cab . . . .17.75

i.4 307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Contents
Chaff spreader (KPAB version) . . . . . . . . . .17.76
Compressor-type cooling system . . . . . .17.78
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.78
Safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.79
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.80
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.80
Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.87
Overview function elements in cabin roof . .17.83
Further instructions on the operation
of compressor-type cooling systems . . . . .17.84

18. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.1

307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 i.5


Contents

i.6 307.3726.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Foreword, Introduction

Chapter 1

Foreword, Introduction

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 1.1


Foreword, Introduction

Before using this machine for the first time read this
manual and make yourself familiar with all safety
instructions.

Authorised Operating Conditions

This combine harvester is designed solely for use in conventional


agricultural applications ("authorised use"). Use for any other purpose is
considered to be contrary to this authorisation. The manufacturer
accepts no liability for any injury resulting from such misuse, and these
risks must be borne exclusively by the user.
Strict compliance with the conditions of operation, service and repair
specified by the manufacturer is also an essential element of the
authorised use.
The combine harvester may only be operated, serviced and repaired by
persons familiar with the machine and instructed in the dangers
involved. All applicable accident prevention and road traffic regulations
and all other generally recognised regulations on safety and
occupational health must be observed at all times.
Any unauthorised modifications to the machine shall automatically
cancel all liability of the manufacturer for any resulting damage.

1.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Foreword, Introduction
Dear Customer,

The advice given in this manual helps to prevent We are constantly endeavouring to improve our
hazards and must therefore be read and observed by products and we therefore reserve the right to make
all persons who use, maintain, service and inspect this any changes and improvements that we consider
combine harvester. Please study in particular the appropriate. However, we are under no obligation to
chapters on "Safety Measures" and "Before Using for extend any such improvements to previously delivered
the First Time". machines and attachments.
All illustrations, dimensions and weight specifications
This combine harvester may only be operated, in this manual are not binding.
serviced and repaired by persons familiar with the
machine and instructed in the dangers involved. The This manual also contains descriptions of attachments
user is obliged to observe the general safety and not generally included as standard with the machine.
accident prevention regulations, and when using on In general, this manual does not specifically stipulate
public roads, the road traffic regulations. whether these attachments are standard or only
available as options.
To identify the standard and optional equipment,
We ask you to read this manual carefully in order to please refer to the applicable price list. Separate
familiarise yourself with instruction manuals are provided for any extra
attachments, improvements and extensions that could
the legal requirements for operation not be included in this manual at short notice. Check
the safety instructions and descriptions that you have all the appropriate manuals for any
the possible hazards, as indicated in the special attachments and special equipment used with your
part of this manual machine. If not, please ask your dealer or the
the technical instructions Customer Service or Spare Parts department of
the start-up procedures SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH.
the care and maintenance recommendations.
This provision also applies to products and
A thorough knowledge of this manual is essential for attachments not made or released by SAME DEUTZ-
trouble-free start-up and satisfactory operating results FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH but attached to your
and for maintaining the value of your machine and combine harvester. Here too, the appropriate
supporting any claims or complaints you may have operating instructions and technical manuals are
during the warranty period. essential parts of the relevant equipment.

The economic operation of this machine depends


partly on your knowledge of the prevailing harvesting
conditions and the resulting operating limits, and of
the increased versatility and performance achieved in
specific cases by the use of special equipment and
the possibilities of extending the application of
operating technologies by means of additional
attachments.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 1.3


Foreword, Introduction
The text below provides general and specific The retrofitting of any special attachments must be
comments and explanations on the use and definition done in a specialist workshop in order to ensure
of the unrestricted operational reliability and trouble-free
function.
Operating Instructions
Administrative Documentation In addition, a warning triangle and, for machines with
Safety Regulations a gross weight exceeding 4 metric tons, at least one
Legal Requirements and Provisions. wheel-chock is required.

Legal requirements lay down that the Operating For combine harvesters that exceed the permissible
Instructions and the official Type Approval certificate width for use on public roads, a type approval for
are integral parts of the combine harvester. Store the individual vehicles (individual approval) and an
General or Individual Type Approval and the exception certificate are required. You must observe
Operating Instructions carefully after each use. These and adhere to the conditions laid down in the
documents must be handed over if the combine individual type approval and exception certificate.
harvester should change owner.
The regulations and procedures governing the issue
You must always have the Type Approval certificate of exception certificates varies from country to
with you when using the combine harvester. country.
Please pay particular attention to the legal
requirements in force in your country for driving the The excess width must be notified in accordance with
combine harvester on public roads. the Directives for the Notification of Vehicles of
Excess Width.
If the combine harvester is fitted with any special
attachments such as straw chopper, maize picker etc., As a self-propelled agricultural machine with a
you will be given additional assembly and/or operating maximum speed of 20 km/h, the combine harvester is
instructions. To ensure unrestricted operational not subject to the legislation on registration and
reliability and trouble-free function you should observe registration numbers. The left-hand side of the vehicle
all recommendations and instructions given in these must be clearly and indelibly marked with the first
documents. name, surname and address of the owner.
This regulation too may vary between different
Retrofitted equipment or modifications to the combine countries and states.
harvester may under certain circumstances require
new type approval and therefore another technical We recommend that you keep a fire extinguisher and
inspection and resubmission of the complete machine first aid box on board.
to the authorities of the relevant country. Before
undertaking any retrofit or modification, you must If you lose the original Type Approval or Operating
therefore check the associated action required. Instructions, you must immediately apply for a second
original or second copy. This second original/copy will
be sent to your dealer or to the customer service or
spares department of the manufacturer.

1.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Foreword, Introduction
This machine and/or additional equipment conforms to Despite constant monitoring of the market, SAME
the legislation of the country for which it was built. If DEUTZ-FAHR cannot judge whether each
you envisage registering, driving and using the individual third party product can be used in
machine in another country, you must obtain the combination with SAME DEUTZ-FAHR products
necessary certificates confirming that this change of without safety risk, i.e. without danger to life and
country is permitted under the legislation of the limb.
relevant countries concerning import, registration and In some cases, you may not even be able to obtain
other conditions. this guarantee from an official approval
(homologation by the official technical inspectorate
of the relevant country), because the relevant tests
Important: Modifications of the machine (changes to are not always adequate.
the engine injection system, changes to the travel
hydraulic system, manipulations of the safety systems Therefore, before using other products, you should
and accident protection systems etc.) lead to the first contact your dealer or directly contact the
cancellation of the type approval and/or registration or SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Spare Parts and Customer
can lead to claims for damages and similar claims. Service department and ask whether these
Moreover, the guarantee and insurance cover are products have been or can be approved for your
cancelled for the combine harvester concerned. use. In this case, your dealer will also contact us.

Important safety information: On delivery/handover of the machine, you will


For your own safety, only use parts and accessories receive a duplicate of the handover declaration.
approved by DEUTZ-FAHR. This declaration must also be signed by you as
When using original SAME DEUTZ-FAHR parts and customer. Go through the individual points of the
accessories tested and approved by DEUTZ-FAHR, handover declaration with the sales representative
you can be certain that SAME DEUTZ-FAHR has responsible for handover until you are satisfied that
carried out its own tests to make sure that these each item has been fully covered.
products work correctly in combination with your
machine. SAME DEUTZ-FAHR accepts full product All dimensions given in these Operating
liability for these products. Instructions are in metric units.
The use of spare parts, accessories and attachments
that were not originally supplied by SAME DEUTZ- The terms "right" and "left" are viewed facing
FAHR and have not been tested and approved by forwards in the direction of travel.
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR may have an adverse effect on
certain specified features of the design or on the
function, quality, safety and service life of the
machine, thereby impairing the active and/or passive
driving and working safety (accident protection etc.).
We cannot accept responsibility or liability for damage
caused by the use of non-OEM parts, accessories and
attachments not supplied by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR and
not expressly approved by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 1.5


Foreword, Introduction
Symbol Conventions

DANGER!

Indicates dangers that can cause fatal or READ THIS!


serious injuries if they are not avoided. This pointer guides you rapidly to important
In these Operating Instructions, this functions, settings and notices and is
symbol is used for all safety instructions designed to make these Operating
that concern high Instructions easier to use.
danger to life and limb. Follow these
instructions and proceed with particular
care in these cases.
You must also pass on all safety
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
instructions to other users. In addition to
the safety instructions
Observe all necessary precautions for
included in these Operating
environmental protection.
Instructions, all general accident
In these Operating Instructions, you will find
prevention and safety regulations must be
information on environmental protection at
observed.
the points marked by this symbol.

WARNING!

Indicates dangers that can cause minor


injuries or material damage if they are not
avoided.
This symbol is used in these Operating
Instructions at all points that require
particular attention in order to ensure that
the directives, specifications, instructions
and correct working procedures are
observed and to prevent damage and
destruction to the machine and/or other
systems.

1.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Foreword, Introduction
Drive sensibly save running costs

Fuel consumption depends greatly on driving style Please contact your dealer or our customer service
and operating conditions, as well as other conditions. department if you require any clarification. On receipt
of the machine please check that no damage has
You will save fuel if you occurred in transit and that all the items ordered have
been delivered.
make sure your tyres are always at the correct
pressure
avoid leaving the engine running when at standstill
drive with about 2/3 or 3/4 maximum revs when in Finally from all of us here at SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
transport mode we wish you many happy hours of prosperous work
carry out manoeuvres only at the lowest engine with your new machine.
speeds

Drive safely
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Fill in the serial number of your combine harvester and
extra equipment in the relevant space of this
instruction manual. Your dealer/service department
needs this information to provide you quickly with the
service or spare parts required. We also advise you to
note these numbers elsewhere.

Before delivering this machine, your dealer has


carried out a first service inspection. Further
inspections will be required in accordance with the
maintenance and inspection table.

Environmental tips:

The fuel consumption of your combine harvester and


therefore the pollutant level also depends on the
way it is driven.
Noise and wear are also influenced by your personal
handling of the machine. If you wish to operate your
combine harvester in as environmentally sound a
manner as possible and thereby save money
please observe the relevant instructions in this
manual.
In addition, please also observe all texts in this
manual marked with the environmental symbol.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 1.7


Foreword, Introduction

1.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures

Chapter 2

Safety Measures

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.1


Safety Measures
Recognising warning symbols, understanding
warning terminology

In these Operating Instructions, all sections


relevant to safety are marked with the appropriate
symbol.

Please observe all safety instructions and the


general accident prevention regulations.

Observing the safety instructions

Please read and observe all safety instructions


contained in these Operating Instructions and
displayed on the machine.
In particular, make sure that the safety stickers are
in legible condition. Any missing and damaged
warning shields must be replaced immediately.
Make sure you are familiar with all operating
controls and their function before starting work. It is
too late to do so when you are already on the
move. Also observe the additional instructions
provided for specific versions.
Danger, warning and other instructions are
provided in the appropriate sections of these
Operating Instructions.

30413
Protective guards and devices

The protective systems fitted to the machine and to


its additional equipment and attachments must not
be removed during operation.

After maintenance operations or repairs or similar


work, all guards and protective devices must be
securely replaced or must be correctly refixed and
sealed.

Keep your hands, feet and clothing clear of all


moving parts.

In addition to the specific instructions in this


manual, you must observe the general safety and
accident prevention regulations.

30414 30415

2.2 307.3716.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Basic rule

Before each use of the combine harvester, check


that it is safe for both travel on public roads and
working operation.

Specific regulations

In addition to the safety and accident prevention


provisions mentioned in these Operating
Instructions, specific national and local safety
provisions may be defined. Please therefore also
observe the conditions laid down in the applicable
type approval of the machine.

Observing road traffic regulations

All applicable regulations must be observed when


using the combine harvester on public roads and
thoroughfares.

Make sure you always have the documents


30416 required by law in your country.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine, make sure that no gear


is engaged and that all protective devices are fitted
and in the protection position.

Only start the engine from the driver's cab. The


engine must not be started by short-circuiting the
electrical connections of the starter motor, because
otherwise the machine may start moving
immediately.

As a safety signal, sound the horn before starting.

Do not leave the engine running in enclosed


spaces. Danger of poisoning.

30417

307.3716.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.3


Safety Measures
Using starting aids

Starting fluids may only be used with the express


approval of the engine manufacturer.

When using external electric starting aids (jumper


cables), no additional starting fluid may be used.

Starting fluid is a fire and explosion hazard. They


shall be kept always in ventilated rooms and shall
30418 be stored according to the requirements. Before
throwing away used and apparently empty
pressurised cans, they must be fully emptied in a
ventilated place away from sparks and flames.

Almost all the drive units of the combine harvester


are driven by the running engine and in some
cases continue running for a long time after they
have been disengaged. Therefore wait until all
drive units have stopped.

Caution! Children and old people

Before driving off, check the area immediately


around the combine harvester (children!). Make
sure you have sufficient visibility. Sound the horn
as a warning signal.

Wearing protective clothing

The driver's clothing must fit tightly. Avoid loose-


fitting clothes.

Long and continuous exposure to noise can cause


hearing damage.

Operating the combine harvester generates noise.


You can isolate yourself from this noise by shutting
the cab door or, if working with a cabless driver's
stand, by wearing ear protectors.
30419
30420 These ear protectors should only protect against
excessive noise while ensuring that all audible
operations, alarms etc. can be clearly heard.

Safe operation of the machine requires the full


attention of the driver. Do not use headsets for
telephoning or listening to the radio or music.

2.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Preparing for emergencies
Fire risk, safe handling of fuels

Be prepared for fire risk.

In the event of a fire, switch off the engine.


Switch off the battery master switch, and
disconnect the battery if necessary.
Call the fire brigade
Start to extinguish the fire with the fire
extinguisher.

Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box in


suitable, easily accessible positions.

In the case of fire, turn off the battery master switch.

30421 Take care when handling fuel. The fire risk is


increased. Never fill the fuel tank close to a naked
flame or sources of ignitable sparks. Do not smoke
when refuelling.
30422
Before filling with fuel, always switch off the engine
and remove the ignition key. Fuel should not be
filled in enclosed spaces. If any fuel is spilt, wipe it
up immediately.

Always keep the engine clean to prevent the risk of


fire and engine overheating.

To do so, the engine compartment and other areas


30423 representing a particular fire risk (dust deposits
etc.) must be blown clean, and any crop deposits
must be removed.

Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within


easy reach. Keep the call numbers of the police,
doctor, ambulance and fire brigade by the
telephone, mobile phone and/or CB radio.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.5


Safety Measures
Preparing for road transport

To prevent contact with overhead electric power


lines, bridges etc., no part of the machine may be
higher than 4 metres. If aerials are fitted, they must
be retracted, folded down or removed before
driving on public roads.

The following precautions must be taken for road


transport:

Empty the grain tank.


Fully retract, close and lock the grain tank
extension.
Swing the grain tank discharge tube fully
inboard and secure in place.
Swivel ladder to the front and latch.
Set the straw chopper spreader box to the
30424
working position.
Remove the front attachments.
Set the feed passage, grain tank discharge
tube, hydraulically retractable grain tank
extension etc. to the transport position.
Fit the protective cover.

The main switch of the threshing section (1) must


be turned off before driving on public roads and
thoroughfares in order to make sure that the
relevant electric and hydraulic functions are
disabled for road transport.

For road transport with a coupled maize picker or


other harvesting attachment:
Set the harvesting attachment to the transport
position. In doing so, the lighting systems must
not be covered, or they must be set to the
transport position.An attachment must never,
1 under any circumstances impede the view of
33877
the driver.
Fold in or remove the maize picker tines.
Fit the protective covers and warning panels.
Swing all side parts inboard and secure in
place.
Push the hinged cutting table to the right as far
as it will go and then swing it inboard and fit a
protective guard.
Fold in the stalk separator.
Fit lights and warning plates.

2.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
No passengers

Do not take passengers, even in the driver's cab.


Only the driver may be on the platform.

X
30426 Personel qualifications; basic responsibilities

Only reliable persons may work on or with the


machine. Observe the legally specified minimum
ages!
Use only trained all instructed personnel. Clearly
defined the responsibilities of the personnel for
operation, equipping, maintenance and repair!
Ensure that only authorised personnel work on
the machine!
Define the responsibilities of the machine driver
with respect to traffic regulations and permit him
to refuse to comply with instructions from third
persons which would compromise safety!
Allow persons being trained or instructed to work
on the machine only under constant supervision
of an experienced person!
Work on the electrical equipment of the machine
may be carried out only by a trained electrician
or by instructed persons under the supervision of
such an electrician and in accordance with the
safety rules for electrical equipment.
Only in suitably trained personnel may work on
the chassis, braking and steering systems!
Only persons with special knowledge and
experience of hydraulic systems may work on
the hydraulic equipment.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.7


Safety Measures
Driving: road transport, driving and working The ride characteristics of a combine harvester are
operation determined by among other factors the surface
of the road or ground and the fitted attachments.
Never leave the driver's stand when driving the Therefore adapt your driving style and speed to the
combine. terrain and ground conditions. Take care when
turning on slopes. Do not steer the wheels
When changing from working operation to public suddenly or too powerfully. Particular care is
road transport, always observe and adhere to the required when working or turning on a slope with a
conditions laid down in the documents
full grain tank. Never declutch and change gears
accompanying the vehicle General Type
on slopes.
Approval, Individual Type Approval, Registration
and Homologation documents , i.e. empty the Take great care when fixing harvesting
grain tank, remove the front attachment, fit lights attachments and accessories to the combine
and protective guards etc. harvester.

When working with the combine and when driving Before setting out, check the brakes and braking
on public roads, make sure that the permitted axle performance. When driving on public roads and
loads and gross vehicle weight are not exceeded. with a trailer, the brake pedals must be
Check the tyre pressures. interconnected. If you detect problems in the
steering or brakes, stop immediately and remedy
The combine harvester must not be driven on the fault or problem yourself or have it repaired.
public roads with fitted rape cutter attachment. Adjustments and repairs to the brake system may
only be performed in a specialist workshop.
Front and rear attachments may shift and
permanently alter the machine's centre of gravity, Before setting out on the road or starting work,
thus considerably changing its operating, steering adjust the rear view mirrors so that you have a full
and braking properties. view of the road and worked area behind you.
The driver's seat and steering wheel must be
Appropriate equipment compensating these correctly adjusted before starting to drive. They
changes is available for mounting and operating must not be adjusted while on the move.
certain attachments, such as load weights, water-
filled steered wheels, etc. These load weights must Due to the rear-wheel steering, the rear end of your
be adapted to the attachment or supplementary combine harvester swings outwards. Please take
equipment concerned. account of this fact when driving. Otherwise you
can easily cause accidents when steering round
When cornering or driving in narrow spaces etc., obstructions. On dips or trenches, inattention by
the width and road-holding properties of the overall the driver may even cause the combine to
train must be taken into account (coupled transport overturn.
trolley). Take account of the slewing radius of the
combine harvester in combination with the Before setting out, make sure that nobody is in the
transport trolley. immediate vicinity of the machine. Sound the horn.

During reversing manoeuvres, a person giving


directions must never stand immediately behind
the combine harvester but must be visible to the
driver at all times through the rear-view mirror
(indirect visual contact).

2.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures

30427

30428

30429

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.9


Safety Measures
Never leave the driver's seat, even when When driving on longitudinal slopes (hill driving),
manoeuvring. select a moderate driving speed, especially if
undertaking extensive steering manoeuvres with a
Manoeuvres must be performed at the lowest full grain tank and maximum machine equipment.
possible engine speed (lower idling speed) and in
low gears in order to increase reaction times and Before engaging the thresher or any other drive
reduce noise. unit, make sure that no loose parts, objects, tools
or other aids have been left in or on the moving
Activate the drive control lever in progressive steps drive assemblies.
and avoid sudden, hectic driving manoeuvres, Before engaging drive units, make sure that no
especially when reversing, in order to prevent the people or obstructions are within close range of the
combine rearing up dangerously. machine. Sound the horn.

With the grain tank cover open and


antennas mounted, the overall height of
the combine harvester may be
considerably more than 4 m.
Take care when working in the vicinity
of overhead cables and buildings.

30430

30431

2.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Mobile phones, radios, electrical equipment,
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
When driving on public roads or during working operation,
the driver must not wear headphones or similar
equipment connected to a music reproduction device,
mobile phone or radio.
In the case of retrofitted electrical and electronic
equipment connected to the on-board electrical system
(e.g. fans, horns and coolers) or mobile communication
systems (e.g. CB radio, telephone), the following
additional requirements must be satisfied:
The retrofitted electric and electronic components
must conform to the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC in the
latest valid version and must bear the CE symbol.
Only devices approved under the applicable state
legislation may be installed.

32543 Users themselves are responsible for checking


whether or not the installation causes interference to
the on-board electronic systems or other components.
The devices must be installed in fixed installations.
The operation of mobile telephones or CB radio
systems using antennas located inside the vehicle
interior (cab) can impair the operation of the electronic
systems of the combine harvester, thus creating a
safety hazard. Therefore, to prevent any such in.
For these reasons, and in order to increase the range
of mobile phones and CB radio units, a special
exterior antenna should be used. If using several
different antennas, the appropriate spacing between
the antennas must be observed. Antennas must be
mounted at the highest point of the combine
harvester, in order to ensure optimal reception. When
driving on public roads, these antennas must be
removed or retracted.
The transmitter must be installed physically away from
the vehicle electronics.

For the wiring and installation and the maximum


permitted current con-sumption, please refer also to
the vehicle manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

Electromagnetic interference may cause indicator lamps


to glimmer or flicker slightly. This phenomenon does not
have any effect on the system functions.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.11


Safety Measures
Safety installations, Lighting

Due to their low driving speeds and unconventional


manoeuvrability, self-propelled agricultural
machines and similar machines represent a certain
obstruction on public roads.
Especially at night, they are difficult to see, and
their manoeuvres are difficult for other road users
to anticipate and calculate. Consequently, roads
with heavy traffic must if possible be avoided and
bypassed.

Handle your self-propelled agricultural or other


machine with extreme care and foresight in public
traffic. Any collision with other road users or other
obstacles may result in severe and/or fatal injuries.

When driving on public roads, the warning, lighting


and safety devices laid down in the relevant
national laws must be installed and used.

In specific versions of the agricultural or other


working machine or in the event of special
provision e.g. due to excess widths (special
transport rules) etc., the required conditions must
30432 be observed. These conditions may consist in the
compulsory installation and use of revolving lights,
flashing warning lights, contour limit lights, position
lights, removable protective and warning shields
with integral flashing contour lights for working use,
warning plates at exposed points, etc..

Maintain the safety and warning devices in full


working order. Any defective or missing parts must
be immediately replaced.

2.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Leaving and parking the combine harvester

Lower the harvesting attachment to the ground or


protect it against inadvertently lowering.

Before leaving the combine harvester, disengage


the threshing mechanism and cutting table and
switch off the engine. Engage a gear and apply the
handbrake. When leaving the combine, remove the
ignition key, lock the cab and place the wheel
chock(s) under the front wheels.

Never leave the combine harvester unattended


with the engine running.

Use the existing steps and ladders to climb into


and out of the combine harvester. Use the
restraining devices, handrails and grab handles.

30433

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.13


Safety Measures
Front attachments, additional equipment

Before carrying out any work underneath a lifted


front attachment (cutting table or other) it must be
secured in position.

For practical operational reasons, the cutting table,


intake auger, reel etc. cannot be fully protected by
the structure against access/contact. It is therefore
essential to keep a safe distance from all these
moving parts during operation.

Similarly, for operational reasons, the chains and


rollers of the maize picking attachment cannot be
fully protected against access/contact in the
working zone. It is therefore also essential to keep
a safe distance from all these moving parts during
operation. This safety warning also applies to all
other optional equipment.
30434
Dangerous cutting tools are located under the
guards of the straw chopper attachment. These
cutters may continue to rotate after the drive has
been switched off. It is therefore essential to keep
a safe distance from the straw chopper until all
elements have come to a complete stop.

The same warning applies to the rear-mounted


straw chopper. Keep a safe distance from the
chopper during operation. There is a high risk of
accident due to flying particles (straw and scattered
chaff). There is an additional danger that stones
and similar hard objects will be drawn into the
machine and ejected, especially during maize
threshing.

2.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Operation, mounting and dismantling of front
attachments and accessories

Switch off the engine. The threshing clutch must be


disengaged. Remove the ignition key and
disconnect the ground cable (negative) from the
battery.

Particular care is required when mounting and


dismantling front attachments (cutting tables and
other) and when hitching trailers due to the risk of
injury. Never enter the space between the combine
harvester and the front attachment without
securing the vehicle against rolling by means of the
handbrake and/or wheel chocks.

Front attachments must be coupled securely as


instructed. They may only be fixed and secured to
the specially provided coupling devices and locking
30435 30436 mechanisms.

Observe the colour coding or numbering when


coupling the hydraulic connections. Wrong
hydraulic connections can cause malfunctions and
a consequent high risk of accident. Make sure that
all hydraulic connections are clean and tightly
connected, and screw the protective caps to all
open connections.

Disconnectable hydraulic connections must not be


simultaneously coupled and exposed to pressure
by the control unit.

To couple a hydraulic connection, the relevant


hydraulic circuit must be "depressurised" by
retracting the hydraulic cylinder.

The reel must lowered and pushed back before


dismounting.

To dismount the front attachments, they must be


stably secured or placed on their transport devices.

Support devices must be moved into position to


ensure stability.

30437 30438

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.15


Safety Measures
Always make sure that all shaft guard systems are
fitted as specified and that the universal shaft
protection tube can turn freely. Never allow
universal shafts to be driven without the
appropriate guard systems. Do not wear loose
clothing. Fit the safety chains. Switch off the engine
and wait for all moving parts of the machine to
come to a complete stop before mounting,
dismounting, adjusting and cleaning any devices
driven from the power take-off.

Incorrectly supported accessories, e.g. spare


tyres/wheels, may tip over or fall, causing severe
and in some cases fatal injuries.
All accessories stored on the combine must
therefore be securely protected against overturning
or falling. Keep children and unauthorised parties
30437 30438 well clear of these areas.

Transporting front attachments

Front attachments and trailers must only be fixed to


and transported on the specially provided devices.
The transport position laid down for transport on
public roads must be observed. The permitted
transport dimensions must not be exceeded.

The maximum permitted trailer load on the trailer


coupling must not be exceeded.

The manoeuvring clearance of the towbar must be


observed.
All necessary transport equipment, such as lighting
systems and warning and protective devices must
be fitted and checked for correct working order.

30439 30440

2.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Grain tank

The grain tank contains augers that for operational


reasons cannot be fully protected against access
and contact. Therefore never climb into the grain
tank to clear blockages but use suitable aids, e.g.
push-rods. A sampling device is provided in the
grain tank for taking samples. Use this sampling
device or a scoop with an appropriately long
handle.

Lifting the combine harvester, supporting the


machine safely from underneath

30441 Never remain under the machine if it is only


supported by mechanically or hydraulically
operated vehicle jacks.
Remove the front attachment or other auxiliary
equipment. Ensure that the machine is stably
supported.
Do not use brick or concrete breeze-blocks or
similar building materials to prop up the machine
because these materials may yield under
continuous load. Use robust, wide, stable and
above all appropriately dimensioned timber
supports, steel frameworks or similar equipment.
For extra safety, also leave the vehicle jacks at the
jacking points.

To lift the machine, use only a lifting device with


guaranteed sufficient load capacity. The
suspension points for crane systems and the
jacking points for vehicle jacks are marked on the
30442 combine harvester.

Towing and dragging

When towing machines with drive wheels on the


steering axle, the all-wheel drive system must be
switched off and no gear may be engaged. When
salvaging the combine from bogs and similar
situations, the machine must be safely attached
and must also assist with its own drive power.

Where applicable, deactivate the 4-wheel drive.


For front-wheel drive machines, make sure that no
gear is engaged. Please also note that the
hydraulic power steering system only functions
when the engine is running.

30443

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.17


Safety Measures
Safe maintenance and repair

Disengage the threshing mechanism and cutting


table. Switch off the engine and wait until all
moving parts have come to a stop. Engage a gear
and apply the handbrake. Remove the starter key,
disconnect the negative cable of the battery and
place the chocks under the front wheels.
Before starting any maintenance and repair work,
make sure you are familiar with all necessary
safety and working procedures.
Keep your hands, feet and clothing well clear of the
danger zone around driven components.
Always disengage the drive line, switch off the
engine and remove the ignition key before
undertaking any repair, maintenance and cleaning
work and before attempting to remedy any
malfunctions.
When working on the machine or any moving parts,
30444 30445 never wear any loose items of clothing or jewellery,
such as neck chains, scarves or ties and never
wear loose-fitting clothes. Remove rings and any
other jewellery.
Allow the machine to cool down before working on
the engine and similar components.
Make sure that all parts are in good condition and
correctly fitted. Repair any damage immediately.
Replace any damaged or worn parts.
Remove any accumulation of lubricating grease, oil
and grime.
After completing repairs, check all screw fixings
and refit all guards and protective devices. Check
that no tool or loose accessories have been left
inside the engine compartment or other machinery.

When replacing and installing new components


and parts such as bearings, gears etc., the
servicing and inspection intervals must be the
same as for a new machine.
Make sure the workshop is well ventilated. Exhaust
and other gases can cause severe health damage
and can even be fatal. Released gases must be
safely evacuated, or the room must have adequate
ventilation.

2.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Spare parts

Make sure that all parts are always in good


condition and are correctly fitted. Remedy any
damage immediately and replace any worn or
damaged parts.

New and spare parts must at least conform to the


technical requirements laid down by the
manufacturer. This requirement can be met e.g. by
using only authentic OEM spare parts.

We therefore recommend that you always use


SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ORIGINAL PARTS.

Caution when handling leaks

If fluids such as fuel, hydraulic oil etc. are forced


out of pipes, hoses etc. at high pressure they can
break the skin and cause severe injury. In the
event of injury, immediately call a doctor, because
there is a grave risk of infection.

Therefore, make sure that pipes and hoses are


unpressurised before disconnecting. Before
starting up the machine, check that all fluid lines
are tightly sealed.

Use suitable aids (such as a piece of cardboard)


when hunting for leaks, and protect your hands and
body from direct contact with these fluids.

30447

Fuel and lubricants

Only use oil and fuel of the specified or equivalent


quality. The specified qualities are minimum
requirements.

Take care when draining hot oil. Risk of burns.

Never fill up fuel close to open flames or


ignitable sparks. Do not smoke while
refuelling. Stop the engine prior to
refuelling.

30448

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.19


Safety Measures
Electrical equipment

When working on the electrical system, always


remove the cable from the negative pole of the
battery.

Only use fuses of the specified ratings. If any of the


fuses used are too highly rated, the electrical
system may be destroyed.

The battery cables and alternator cable must be


disconnected before starting any electric welding
work. The earthing cable of the electric welding
apparatus must be connected as close as possible
to the joint to be welded.

30449

Battery

Make sure that the battery is correctly connected.


First connect the positive pole and then the
negative. Proceed in reverse order to disconnect.

Never check the battery charge by connecting the


two poles with a metal object or similar means.
Always use an acidimeter or voltmeter.

Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery because


there is a risk of explosion. First warm up the
battery slowly to at least 15 C.

Take care with battery gases, since they are highly


explosive. Therefore avoid generating sparks or
naked flames close to batteries.

Remove the cover when recharging the battery, in


order to avoid any build-up of highly explosive gas.
30450

2.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Caution: toxic and corrosive.
Avoid injuries due to battery acid

Take care when handling brake fluid and battery


acid. Both are toxic.

The battery electrolyte contains sulphuric acid and


other toxic substances. It is present in a
concentration that can burn the skin and
disintegrate clothes and other materials. If acid is
sprayed into the eyes it may cause blinding.

Safety precautions during maintenance and


topping up:

1. Only top up the battery in well ventilated rooms.


2. Wear eye protection, breathing protection and
rubber gloves or appropriate protective clothing.
3. Avoid inhaling acid vapours.
4. Do not spill any acid.
5. Take care when jump-starting with external
batteries and external starting aids.

What to do in the event of injury by acid or similar


chemical substances:

1. Thoroughly rinse the affected parts of the skin


with water.
2. Sprinkle bicarbonate of soda or lime powder on
the affected areas to neutralise the acid.
3. Rinse the eyes for 10 to 15 minutes with water
and immediately call a doctor.

What to do if acid is accidentally swallowed:

1. Drink large quantities of water or milk.


2. Then drink vegetable oil, beaten eggs or milk of
magnesia.
3. Immediately call a doctor.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.21


Safety Measures
Replacement parts and accessories containing
asbestos

Normally, no products containing asbestos should


remain on the market. However, if you do come
across such parts (seals, friction linings, brake
linings) they must no longer be used and must be
handed in to the appropriate sites for safe disposal.

For full information, we have again summarised the


typical rules for handling asbestos below.

Warning: certain parts may contain asbestos.


Please note the designation of spare parts and
accessories. We recommend that you leave all
maintenance and repair work on these parts to a
DEUTZ-FAHR dealer. If you have to carry out work
on these parts, the following safety precautions
must be observed:

Only work in the open air or in a well ventilated


room.
Only remove asbestos dust by vacuum
cleaning, never by blower.
Before cutting, grinding or drilling holes in a
component containing asbestos, the component
must first be moistened. The tools used may
only be operated by hand or with slow rotary
motors.
Moisten all dust and/or parts containing
asbestos and place in a sealed and marked
container for safe disposal.

2.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Tyres, wheels and tyre fitting

Fitting wheels and tyres requires specialised


knowledge and the proper tools. This work should
therefore be left to your dealer or a specialised
workshop if you do not have sufficient experience
or the necessary workshop equipment.

Regularly (daily) check the tyre pressures, inspect


the tyres for damage (slits, bulges), check the rims
for damaged areas (cracks, deformation) and
check that none of the wheel nuts or wheel screws
are loose or missing.

Regularly retighten the wheel nuts with the


tightening torque specified in the maintenance
table. Adhere to the specified time intervals. After
removing or changing a wheel the servicing and
inspection intervals are the same as for a new
30451 machine.

Severe or fatal injury can be caused by explosion-


like bursting of the tyres and by flying rim rings or
other parts.

Make sure that the tyres are always at the correct


pressure. Never exceed the maximum pressure
(certain exceptions are permitted for short periods
during installation).

Do not heat the tyres or carry out welding work on


the rims. Heat causes the volume of the air in the
tyres to expand, with the possible result that the
tyre bursts. Unauthorised welding can also deform
or damage a wheel.

Tyre inflating: use filler valves with a safety tab.


30452
Use a sufficiently long extension hose so that you
can stand by the side of the tyre. Never stand on or
in front of the tyre while inflating.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.23


Safety Measures
Safe maintenance of the cooling system

Coolant escaping under pressure can cause


severe burns. The anti-freeze or conservation
agent added to the coolant contains toxic
substances.

Always switch the engine off before removing the


cap of the filler and inspection neck.

Never open a heated cooling system. The relevant


parts, such as the sealing cap and cooling pipes
etc. must only be hand-hot. The cap is fitted with a
safety lock. First turn the cap as far as it will go and
release the pressure, and then lift it off fully.

Compressor cooling system

30453 The annual service and all repairs to air


conditioning and cooling systems must only be
performed by specialist workshops. The refrigerant
and cooling machine oil must be removed from the
parts to be repaired. This pumped mixture of
refrigerant and cooler oil must be delivered to
suitable disposal sites.

Avoid all contact with the refrigerant fluid. If any


refrigerant spray enters the eyes or mucous
membranes a doctor must be called immediately.

Never weld any parts of the refrigerant circuit or


their immediate surrounding area. Danger of toxic
fumes.

The maximum ambient temperature of 80 C for


refrigerant must not be exceeded.

Only use refrigerants that are approved for the


system. The maximum permitted filling quantity
must not be exceeded.

2.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Waste disposal, environmental protection

Oils, fuels, brake fluid, filters, batteries etc. contain


environmentally harmful substances and must be
disposed of in accordance with regulations or
routed to the recycling circuit.

Use only spill-proof and sealed containers for the


intermediate storage and drainage of fuels. Never
pour waste fluids on to the ground, into effluent or
waterways. Do not use food or drink containers or
other containers easily confused with food or drink
containers.

All substances to be recycled or discarded must be


routed to their appropriate material circuits.

In this combine harvester, the following parts and


materials in particular require environmentally
30454 sound removal and disposal:

Oil filters, fuel filters, batteries, electrical parts,


used tyres, seals, friction linings, brake linings,
ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

Oil, fuel, refrigerant, cleaning agent, cleaning


cloths, brake fluid, coolant with added anti-freeze
and sealant.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.25


Safety Measures
Locking the safety lining panel
A
In Figure A, the latch spring is released.

Before setting out, check that the


closure (elastic rubber hook) is
1 correctly closed and that the concealed
latch spring (2) in the closure is
correctly engaged.

Lock the lining as described. Otherwise, the force


of gravity and centrifugal force may open the lining
2 during operation and/or transport, causing very
serious accidents.

The closure with the latch spring (2) locks


automatically when pressed, and it must be
unlocked by hand with a tool.
3
5
Opening the lining flap

Open the rubber clamp.


4
The latch spring (2) must be disengaged with a
tool.
Using the appropriate tool, press against the
side of the latch spring (5) through the hole (2)
30594
and push the spring past the edge (3).
Now pull out the lining flap (4). Remove the tool
and turn the lining fully upwards.

30588

4 Beyond a certain opening angle of the


lining flap (4) the manual force is assisted
by the built-in gas struts (6), which make
6 the side linings easier to open and hold.

33878

2.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Closing the lining flap
B
In Figure B, the latch spring is released.

Pull the lining flap (4). down, overcoming the


resistance of the gas struts.
1 The latch spring (2) on the closure must be
correctly engaged, i.e. the latch spring must
snap into place over the lining edge.

Pull to check that the lining flap (4) is


2 correctly locked into position.
3
Hook the rubber clamp back in place.

The latching function can be set and adjusted


using screw (1) (if the play is too great, the closure
may e.g. rattle).

Make sure that the latch spring and the


4 entire closure is undamaged and
operates correctly at all times.
30594

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.27


Safety Measures
Opening and closing the cover flap of the
chopper drive

Open or close the cover flap as follows:

Opening the cover flap

Press and hold the locking spring (1) with a tool


(e.g. screwdriver) inserted through the hole (3)
in the cover flap.
Pull the flap out slightly at the bottom and lift it
upwards.
4 33879 Fully open the flap and remove it.

Closing the cover flap

Swing the cover flap (4) in until the gap is about


5 1 cm.
Lift the cover flap and hook the locking clip (2)
over the edge (5).
2 Press the bottom of the flap until the locking
spring (1) audibly engages in the lock (6).
6 3
Check that the cover flap is correctly
1 33880
engaged by pulling on it.
Make sure that the locking spring or
the lock assembly are not damaged
and still perform their function
4 correctly.

33881

2.28 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Locking the side flap of the
A cutting table

In Figure A the latch spring is engaged.

Lock the side flap correctly. Otherwise,


due to centrifugal force and the force
of gravity, the lining may open during
6 operation and/or transport on public
roads, causing serious accidents.
3
The closure with latch spring (1) closes auto-
matically when pressed and must be released by
1 hand with a tool.

Opening the side flap

The latch spring (1) must be released with a


tool.
2 4
Insert the appropriate tool through the
hole (2), and press the latch spring (1) sideways
over the screw head (3).
Now pull out the side flap (4). Then remove the
tool and turn the lining fully upwards.
30595 When open, secure the side flap with the
hook (5).

The latching function can be set and adjusted


2 using the screws (6) (if the play is too great, the
closure may e.g. rattle).

30592

30601

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.29


Safety Measures
Closing the side flap
B
In Figure B, the latch spring is released.

Release the hook (5), and pull the side flap


down.
4 The latch spring (1) on the closure must be
correctly engaged, i.e. the latch spring must
1 snap into place over the screw head.

Pull to check that the side flap (4) is


correctly engaged.
30595
The latching function can be set and adjusted
using the screws (6) (if the play is too great, the
closure may e.g. rattle).

Make sure that the latch spring and the


entire closure are undamaged and
operate correctly at all times.
6

30591

30593

30601

2.30 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Grain tank
1 Accessible surfaces

To avoid accidents and damage caused


by treading on components, use only
the engine compartment steps and tread
areas fitted with black non-skid pads (1).

35393

Grain tank extension (only 5680-5690)

2 The type 5680-90 is equipped with the grain tank


extension (2).

90038

Transport and on-road driving

2 In case of transport and on-road


driving the grain tank extension (2)
must be lowered and the grain tank
cover must be properly locked.

90050

307.3716.3.6 englisch (en) 05.2005 2.31


Safety Measures
Locking the grain tank cover

The grain tank cover is specially hinged so that it


can be opened from both front and back.
2 Gas struts (2) are fitted to assist in opening the
grain tank cover.
Observe and follow all general and special safety
instructions.

During transit and on public roads,


the grain tank cover must without fail
be closed and correctly locked.
33744 For all work on the grain tank, the
engine must be switched off and the
ignition key removed.
B Never reach into running augers or
A elevators.
Use a push-rod to clear any blockage
in the grain tank.

Locking bolts, front (A) and (B)

Stand on the right side platform to


release and lock the right-hand bolt (A).
Stand on the left platform to release or
lock the left-hand bolt (B).
90050 The lock is released by turning the bolt (4)
manually 180. The bolt is retracted by the curved
path (5) and engages on the flat surface (3).

4 The bolt is spring-loaded.

The grain tank cover can be swung up at the front,


3 using the rear locks as hinges and swivels.

To close, press the grain tank cover down against


the pressure of the gas strut and close both locks
correctly.

5 30599 Never release all four locks at once,


and never lift the grain tank cover on
or off.

90028

2.32 307.3716.3.6 englisch (en) 05.2005


Safety Measures
Rear lock

1 Access to the grain tank from the engine


compartment is only required during servicing or
repairs.

Therefore the rear locks can only be released with


a tool. To do so, loosen the hexagon head
screws (1) until the cover can be lifted.
The gas struts provide only slight support
assistance for rear opening. The front locking bolts
now act as hinges and swivels. Secure the open
30600 cover with the prop (2).

Make sure that the props (6) are safely


and correctly fixed and engaged.
2

After closing the cover, the hexagon head


screws (1) must be retightened correctly.

90028

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.33


Safety Measures
Locking the radiator cover
3
The hinged radiator cover (3) is locked with the
tension lock (4).

33986

Walkable areas in the engine compartment

5 6 The cover in the engine zone (5) must be securely


engaged in the locking mechanism (6).

In the engine compartment, only walk on the


7 treadplates (5, 8) and the step (7).

35393

2.34 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Service platform, rear left
1 For filling the fuel tank and for maintenance
work on the engine, a ladder (2) is provided on
the platform. This ladder can if necessary be
2 removed from the holder and leaned against the
combine harvester. Before driving the combine, the
ladder (2) must be raised and secured with the
hinged bolt (1).

Never drive the combine with the


ladder down, whether on the road
33962 or in operation in the field.

Platform to the right of the driver's stand.


3
The platform provides standing access for
releasing the right-hand grain tank lock and for
4 electrical maintenance work on the electrical
control cabinet (4). The platform is accessed via
the emergency exit (3).

34937

Service platform, rear right

A service platform (7) is located at the rear right for


5 maintenance work on the coolers.

Locking the rotary cooling-air filter cowling


panel/railings

In order to carry out maintenance work on the


6 coolers, open the lock (5) and push the cowling
panel (6) of the rotary cooling-air filter outwards,
7
together with the platform (7).
33926

Do not start the engine while the


cowling panel (6) of the rotary
cooling-air filter is open. Otherwise
the drive belt may be damaged.

After completing the maintenance


work, make sure that the lock (5) is
always closed.

5
33927

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.35


Safety Measures
Locking the cover of the rotary cooling-air filter

1 The rotary cooling-air filter cover (1) is secured by


a lock system. To open, unhook the shackle (2).
2 Before closing the filter cowling panel, the
shackle (2) must be hooked backed into position.

After completing maintenance work,


make sure that the filter cover is
securely locked in position.

35379 Steps on the grain tank

Three fold-out steps (3) are provided on the front


wall of the grain tank to enable you to inspect the
top of the combine harvester or to check the grain
tank from above.
To release and fold out the steps, lift them about 1
3 cm out of their seating and pull them out towards
the front.
After use, fold the steps back against the wall and
4 lock in place.

Access flap for solenoid valves


33919
After completing maintenance work on
the solenoid valves, immediately
reclose the access flap (4). This
precaution prevents damaging the door
of the driver's cab when opening it.
Also, the bottom step (3) can only be
used after the access flap (4) has been
closed.
Fire extinguisher

A fire extinguisher (5) with 6 kg of extinguishing


agent is fitted at the rear left the combine
5 harvester. Fix the holster in the predrilled holes as
shown in the figure.
33989

The fire extinguisher must be in good


working condition at all times and must
always be in installed its designated
position.
Strictly comply with the specified
servicing and inspection intervals.

Operation of the fire extinguisher:

1. Remove the fire extinguisher from the holster,


and pull out the safety catch.
2. Grip the hose.
3. Aim at the source of the fire and press the lever.

2.36 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Lockable compartment

The lockable compartment (1) is located on the


left-hand side of the combine harvester, in front of
the ladder to the engine platform.
It contains the warning triangle, first aid box and
toolbox. The push-on lever is also kept in this
1 lockable compartment.

33886

Safety precautions when parking the combine


harvester

Do not leave the combine harvester until it is has


2 come to a stop.

Engage a gear.
Apply the handbrake.
Remove the ignition key and switch off the main
battery switch (2).
On sloping terrain, block the front wheel of the
33705 combine harvester with the wheel chock (3).
Under German law, all combine harvesters
must be supplied with one or two wheel chocks.
They are located on the left and/or right-hand
A side in a special holder. Secure the chocks with
3 the locking pins (4).

Battery master switch (2)

The battery master switch (2) is located below the


right side cover, to the right of the battery.
4 The key of the battery master switch can be
removed when the switch is in the Off position.
33920

Wheel chocks (3)


B
The wheel chocks are stored in special holders at
the rear left (figure A) and right (figure B) in front of
3 the rear wheels and are secured by a bolt (4) to
prevent them falling out.

4
33921

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.37


Safety Measures
Rear view mirrors

The rear view mirrors (2,3,4) must be adjusted to


2 suit the position and height of the driver.
1
Do not overtighten the screws (1).
If the mirror hits an obstacle, it must
be able to swivel in without damage.
3

1 33887

The right rear-view mirror (4) is electrically


adjustable.
4

33887-a

Hinged window / Emergency exit


A
5 A hinged window is located on the right of the
driver's cab. This window can be opened outwards
with the handle (5). To push out (open) the
window (figure A), pull the handle (5) inwards,
overcoming the pressure point (clamping force) of
the handle.

33912

This window is also used as an emergency exit.


For this purpose, open the window as described
B above and then lift the handle (5) upwards out of its
latch (6) (figure B). Push the window fully open and
5
exit the cab via the platform on the right-hand side
of the machine.

33913

2.38 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety Measures
Crop elevator (feed passage)

When driving on public roads, the crop


elevator (feed passage/conveyer channel)
must be raised and covered by the
protective plate (1).

1
33706

Excess width indication

Excess width is indicated on the left and right by


fixed red-and-white reflective warning plates (2)
and also at the front left-hand side by a red-and-
white reflective strip (3) that is fixed to the
swivelling ladder that is swivelled to the front when
driving on public roads. Additional signalling of
excess width is provided by two red/white position
lights mounted above the front wheels and by two
2 revolving lights. Adjust the position lamps
according to the excess width.
33890
When travelling on public roads, the relevant
national version must be fitted with the warning
devices conforming to national requirements.

3 Guard plates
If the combine harvester is fitted with smaller tyres,
the appropriate guard plates must be fitted to cover
the resulting gaps (hazard zones).
2

33891

Swivelling ladder
The ladder (5) must be swivelled forwards when
driving on public roads, so that it simultaneously
4 indicates the excess width. Its locking mechanism
can be secured both from above with lever (4) and
from below with lever (6).
The ladder can be adapted to the varying tyre
widths (see chapter 11, driving axle tyres).
5

6
32886

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 2.39


Safety Measures
Locking the front attachment
The spring guide bolt (2) must go beyond its dead
centre (self-locking with spring-loaded support).
Lock the cutting table or front attachment by
shifting the lever (1) as far as it will go.

2
Before travelling with coupled cutting
table or front attachments, make sure
that the locking lever (1) is properly
1 locked.
33922

Crop elevator support strut

Raise the crop elevator until the crop elevator


support (3) can be fully placed on the rod of the
4 holding cylinder (5).

Do not operate the crop elevator while


the support strut is engaged.

3
5
33924

Safety bar on the chaff distributor

If a chaff distributor (7) is installed, before letting


6 down the ladder (6), pull the safety bar (8) back out
of its latch and swivel it down.
7
After pushing the ladder up and locking it in place,
swivel the safety bar (8) back up until it engages in
the locked position.
8
35417

35418

2.40 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Chapter 3

Safety symbols

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.1


Safety symbols
Notes concerning the "Safety Symbols"
Chapter
The pages that follow contain all the
pictograms that you will also find on your
combine harvester, front attachments and
equipment.
This chapter contains the safety symbols for
the Topliner, Powerliner and Starliner product
ranges and their equipment variants. There
may therefore be minor deviations in the
positioning of the stickers.

These pictograms are intended to draw your


attention and warn you of possible dangers.

Warning symbol

Warning symbols are placed on or near all


particularly dangerous parts of this machine.
The symbol consists of a warning triangle
containing a symbol drawing attention to a
danger. A second symbol or explanatory text
informs the user of the correct operating
procedure.
The column on the left shows the various
symbols and their locations, and this column
contains the related explanations.

Inside the driver's cab

Read and follow the Operating Instructions.

The Operating Instructions contain essential


information needed to operate this machine
safely.
All safety instructions must be strictly followed
in order to prevent accidents.

30413 30455

Inside the driver's cab

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition


key before carrying out any maintenance
and/or repairs.

30457 30455

3.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Platform

This machine may only be used with a suitable


fire extinguisher.

30496 30455

Grain tank

To clear grain blockage or clogging in the grain


tank, always use the stick, not your hands.

30460 30455

Grain tank

Never reach into or climb inside the grain tank


while the engine is running.

30441 30455

Threshing drum flap

Danger from rotating machine parts.

(only for TopLiner)

30466 30455

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.3


Safety symbols

Left-hand side of feed passage

Secure the lifting cylinder with mechanical lock


before entering the danger zone.

30463 30464

Left-hand side of feed passage

Secure safety lock before entering the danger


zone.

30460 30464

Left-hand side of feed passage

Do not open or remove protective guard while


the engine is running.

30465 30464

Front access ladder and platform

Do not ride on the ladder or platform.

X
30426 30464

3.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Front wheel fixing

Retighten the wheel nuts at the specified


intervals with the tightening torque specified in
the Operating Instructions.

30451 30464

Left-hand side of the threshing drum flap

Danger due to rotating machine parts.

30466 30464

Left-hand side of side flap

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30465 30464

Left-hand side of returns elevator

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30464

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.5


Safety symbols

Rear wheel fixings

Retighten the wheel nuts at the specified


intervals with the tightening torque specified in
the Operating Instructions.

30451 30464

Left-hand side of side flap

Secure the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30464

Cleaning flaps on the grain tank discharge

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30464

Left-hand side of the straw hood

Spreader

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30464

3.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Left-hand side of the straw hood

Straw chopper

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30464

Left-hand side of the straw hood

Straw chopper

Stand well clear while engine is running.

30468 30464

Rear of straw hood

Straw chopper

Stand well clear while engine is running.

30468 32514

Rear access ladder and platform

Do not ride on the ladder or platform.

X
30426 30469

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.7


Safety symbols

On the steering axle

Fixing of the adjusting elements

Retighten the nuts and screws at the specified


intervals with the tightening torque specified in
the Operating Instructions.

30451 30469

3 On the oil container

Keep well clear of hot surfaces.

30448 30469

Straw hood

Do not reach into the straw walkers while the


engine is running.

30471 30470

Straw hood

Danger of slipping

Only tread on the specially provided surfaces.

30445 30470

3.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Lining panel of straw chopper drive

Make sure that the lining panel is locked in


position.

30460 30472

Right-hand side of the straw hood

Spreader box

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30472

Right-hand side of the straw hood

Straw chopper

Keep well clear while the engine is running.

30468 30472

Right-hand side of the straw hood

Straw chopper

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30472

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.9


Safety symbols

Rear wheel fixings

Retighten the wheel nuts at the specified


intervals with the tightening torques specified in
the Operating Instructions.

30451 30472

Right-hand side of the returns elevator

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.


Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

30467 30472

Right-hand side of the side flap

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30465 30472

Right-hand side of the elevator

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30473 30472

3.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Right-hand side of the fan

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30465 30472

Front wheel fixing

Retighten the wheel nuts at the specified


intervals with the tightening torques specified in
the Operating Instructions.

30451 30472

Right-hand side of the feed passage

Apply the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30472

Right-hand side of the feed passage

Secure the lifting cylinder with the mechanical


lock before entering the danger zone.

30463 30472

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.11


Safety symbols

Right-hand side of the feed passage

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30465 30472

Elevator head cover

Danger of slipping

Only stand and walk on the specially provided


non-slip surfaces.

Maintenance and assembly work on


the elevator head may only be
performed from a mounting
platform or ladder.
30445 30472

Right-hand side of the side flap

Apply the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30472

Right-hand side of the threshing drum flap

Danger due to rotating machine parts.

30466 30472

3.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Drawbar of cutting table trolley

Do not stand within the swinging range of the


drawbar while the engine is running.

30439 30475

Drawbar of cutting table trolley

Block the wheels with wheel chocks before un-


hitching or parking the machine.

30476 30475

Cutting table

Never enter the danger zone between the


attachment and the machine.

30436 30477

Cutting table

Danger due to rotating drive shaft.

30438 30477

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.13


Safety symbols

Cutting table

Never enter the danger zone between the


attachment and the machine.

30436 30477

Cutting table

Danger!
Always disengage the drive, switch off
the engine and remove the ignition key
before approaching the intake
components of the harvesting
attachment and before attempting to
clear any blockages.

30434 30478

Cutting table

Danger!
Always disengage the drive, switch off
the engine and remove the ignition key
before approaching the intake
components of the harvesting
attachment and before attempting to
clear any blockages.

30434 30479

Cutting table

Read and follow the Operating Instructions.

The Operating Instructions contain essential


information needed to operate this machine
safely.
All safety instructions must be strictly followed
in order to prevent accidents.

30413 30479

3.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Right-hand side of side flap

Before entering the danger zone, engage the


safety lock.

30460 30479

Cutter drive

Do not open or remove the protective guard


while the engine is running.

30465 30479

Cutting table

Danger!
Always disengage the drive, switch off the
engine and remove the ignition key before
approaching the intake systems of the
harvesting attachment and before attempting to
clear any blockages.

30434 30479

Left-hand side of the side flap

Apply the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30479

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.15


Safety symbols

Maize picker

Danger due to rotating machine parts.

30466 30477

Maize picker

Never enter the danger zone between the


attachment and the machine.

30436 30477

Maize picker

Pre-loaded lever. Stand well clear when


operating.

30480 30477

Maize picker

Danger due to rotating drive shaft.

30438 30477

3.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Maize picker

Danger due to rotating machine parts.

30466 30477

Maize picker

Never enter the danger zone between the front


attachment and the machine.

30436 30477

Maize picker

Lever pre-loaded. Stand well clear when


operating.

30480 30477

Maize picker

Danger due to rotating auger.

30482 30481

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.17


Safety symbols

Maize picker

Underbody chopper

Keep well clear while the engine is running.

30468 30481

Maize picker

Left-hand side of the side flap

Apply the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30481

Maize picker

Read and follow the Operating Instructions.

The Operating Instructions contain essential


information needed to operate this machine
safely.
All safety instructions must be strictly followed
in order to prevent accidents.

30413 30481

Maize picker

Danger due to rotating auger.

30482 30483

3.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety symbols

Maize picker

Underbody chopper

Keep well clear while the engine is running.

30468 30483

Maize picker

Right-hand side of the side flap

Apply the safety lock before entering the


danger zone.

30460 30483

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3.19


Safety symbols

3.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Construction and functions

Chapter 4

Construction and functions

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 4.1


Construction and functions
Notizen

4.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Construction and functions

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

33916

Construction of the combine harvester

1 Crop divider, long/short 16 Steering axle


2 Ear lifter 17 Returns pan
3 Cutting knife 18 Straw deflector
4 Intake auger 19 Straw chopper
5 Skids 20 Straw walkers
6 Crop elevator chain 21 Straw hood with cleaning cover
7 Threshing drum cover 22 Engine
8 Stone trap 23 Grain tank discharge pipe
9 Drive axle 24 Turbo separator (optional)
10 Threshing drum and concave 25 Elevator head with delivery auger
11 Stepped grain pan 26 Reversing drum (straw stripping drum)
12 Winnowing fan 27 Discharge auger
13 Grain elevator with cross-feed grain 28 Driver's stand and cab
auger 29 Pick-up reel
14 Returns (tailings) elevator
15 Sieve box

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 4.3


Construction and functions

14
15

13

6 7 8
9
3

10
2
4
12 11
5
1

33876

Grain

This illustration shows the path of the grain through the machine

Cutting table 1

Crop elevator 2

Straw stripper drum 6 Threshing drum 3

Turbo separator 7 Concave 4

Straw walkers 8 Stepped grain pan 5

Returns pan 9 Sieve box 10 Returns elevator 11

Grain auger 12

Grain elevator 13

Grain tank 14

Grain discharge tube 15

4.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Construction and functions

4 5
6
3
B
A
2

33917

Straw

This illustration shows the path of the straw through the machine

Cutting table 1

Crop elevator 2

Threshing drum 3

Straw stripper drum 4

Turbo separator 5

Straw walkers 6

A Straw outlet, windrows B Chopper

Spreader

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 4.5


Construction and functions

6 4 5

7
3

14 13 12

8 9 10 1 11 2
20

32861/2

Construction of the cutting table Cutting table drive

1 Cutting table frame The cutting table drive is directly coupled to the
2 Skids feed passage drive, so that when the cutting table
3 Main drive with PTO shaft clutch is engaged both the feed passage and the
and adjusting pulley for reel variator cutting table are set in motion.
4 Reel variator (speed control)
5 Servomotor for reel variator
6 Reel support arm with hydraulic
horizontal and vertical reel position
adjustment
7 Pick-up reel
8 Crop divider
9 Ear lifter
10 Knife and knife drive
11 Intake auger
12 Table trolley
13 Lockrug devices
14 Circlip

4.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Construction and functions
Reel

The 6-part pick-up reel is equipped with individually


replaceable poly-tines.
The reel is hydraulically adjustable both horizontally and
vertically.
The reel speed can be automatically adapted to the
ground speed if the driver requires*.

33008

Crop dividers

The crop dividers separate the standing crop from the


material being cut. For road transport, the crop dividers
are swivelled inwards in front of the reel.

33009

Intake auger

The intake auger has infinitely variable height adjustment


for adaptation to the various different types of crop.

33010

Crop elevator

The crop elevator is equipped with intake bars, which are


mounted on the 3 feed chains. The height of the front
shaft is adjustable. The crop elevator drive unit is
equipped with a slipping clutch for protection. The drive
has an electric reversing system.

90029 * optional

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 4.7


Construction and functions
Construction of the threshing mechanism
1 2 3 (1) Threshing drum
(2) Straw stripping drum
(3) Turbo separator
(4) Concave
(5) Separator concave
The threshing section consists of components (1) to (5).
The infinitely variable drum speed, in combination with
the large adjusting range for the concave clearance,
ensures optimal threshing for every crop.
5
4 33012-2

Threshing drum (1)


1
The threshing drum is equipped with 8 beater bars (rasp
bars), which are bolted into position. The crop is threshed
between the threshing drum (1) and concave (4).
The mixture of grain, chaff and tailings discharged at the
concave (4) falls on to the stepped grain pan, which
conveys the mixture to the sieve box. The air blast from
the winnowing fan removes the chaff and tailings from the
grain.
Different threshing drums and concaves are available for
different types of crop. The illustration shows a normal
32895 threshing drum for wheat.

The concave encloses the threshing drum with a wrap


angle of 119 (6). The stone trap (7) is located in front of
the concave and can be opened by means of a lever.

Threshing drum variator (9)


7
The threshing drum speed is adjusted by means of the
threshing drum variator. The speed can be adjusted
continuously over the full range by changing the distance
6 between the variator pulley discs (8).
32897
Reversing drum (2)

The reversing drum transports the straw onwards and


loosens it at the same time.

9 Turbo separator (3)

The turbo separator (3) and separator concave (5) is an


additional separator drum behind the conventional
threshing components. It loosens the straw discharged by
the front threshing units before transferring it to the straw
8 walkers.
32896-1

4.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Construction and functions

1 2 3 4 5

10 8 9 7 6
21530

Construction of the screening and Straw walkers


winnowing system
The straw walkers (2) convey the straw to the rear of the
1 Stepped grain pan hood, where it either falls to the ground or is fed to other
2 Straw walkers attachments (straw chopper) for further treatment.
3 Step The grain separated by the straw walkers (5) passes via
4 Top sieve the returns floor back to the grain pan (1) .
5 Returns pan
6 Tailings elevator returns pan
7 Bottom sieve Screening and winnowing
8 Grain auger
9 Tailings elevator auger The mixture of grain, chaff and tailings falls into the sieve
10 Winnowing fan box from the stepped grain pan (1) and the returns pan
(5). The air blast generated by the winnowing fan (10)
blows away the lighter components. The split frogmouth
sieves are adjustable for any kind of crop.

Tailings elevator (returns elevator)

The tailings elevator, in combination with the tailings


elevator augers (9) further breaks up and crushes any
remaining unthreshed heads and chaff and returns them
to the grain pan (1).

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 4.9


Construction and functions
Straw guide rakes (1)

The straw guide rakes form the straw into a narrow


swath to simplify subsequent picking up of the straw.

Chaff distributor (3) (optional)


2
1 The chaff distributor (3) is an additional blower
mounted below the straw cover. It distributes the chaff
over the whole mowing width.

33936
Straw chopper (2), optional

If the straw chopper (2) is switched on, all of the straw


3 is guided via the straw guide plate to the straw
chopper, where it is crushed and then distributed
behind the machine by the chaff spreader plates (5).

Spreader plates (5)

The width of chaff discharge can be adjusted by


means of the adjustable chaff spreader plates.

33991 Grain tank

The level of grain in the tank is indicated by the


inspection window. Samples can be taken via the flap
4 in the driver's stand.

Grain tank discharge pipe (4)

The grain tank discharge pipe (4) is positioned to


achieve a high transfer height, so that the tank can be
emptied with the pipe in any outboard position.

5 33937
Machine settings

Appropriate settings on the modern combine harvester


can reduce grain loss to a minimum. However,
depending on the operating conditions and the
dampness of the crop, losses will inevitably occur, but
these losses can and must be kept as low as possible.
The reduction of grain loss depends on the optimal
setting of the machine and the driving style. The
condition of the crop and the nature and evenness of
4 the ground must also be taken into account.

33990

4.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Technical Data

Chapter 5

Technical Data

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 5.1


Technical Data
5650 5660 5680 5690
H HTS H HTS
Cutting table
Cutting width 4,20 - 6,30 m 5,40 - 7,20m
Cutting height adjustment, hydraulic 300 to +1370 mm
Ear lifters, depending on cutting width 13 - 23 units
Knife drive, planetary gear set
Knife speed 1220 cuts/rpm
Reversing device for crop elevator and cutting table
Crop dividers, folding, left and right, long
Self-levelling with automatic ground pressure control, vibration
damping, cutting height preselection and electric height display
Auto control
Cutting angle adjustment
Pick-up reel
6-part pick-up reel with hydraulic height adjustment
Horizontal adjustment, hydraulic
Speed adjustment, electric, infinitely variable from 16 - 45 1/rpm
Automatic adjustment of the reel speed to the travel speed
Threshing drum
Diameter mm 600 600 600 600
Width mm 1270 1270 1521 1521
Rasp bars No. 8 8 8 8
Electrically adjustable variator from 420 - 1250 1/rpm
Threshing drum reduction gearbox from 210 - 625 1/rpm
Concave
Concave bars No. 15 15 15 15
Angle of wrap degrees 121 121 121 121
Separating surface m2 0,95 0,95 1,13 1,13
Stone trap, hinged
De-awning plates, adjustable from side
Electric adjustment of concave inlet and outlet from driver's stand
Reversing drum (straw stripper drum)
Diameter 400 mm
Speed 930 rpm1
Turbo separator (TS)
Diameter mm 590 590
Speed 775/410 1/rpm
Separating surface m2 0,81 0,97
Straw walkers
Racks No. 5 5 6 6
Steps No. 5 4 5 4
Maintenance-free ball bearing
Straw walker surface m2 6,35 5,60 7,60 6,70
Total separating surface area/with TS m2 7,30 7,36 8,73 8,80
Straw walker return via independent returns pans
Straw chopper
Integral straw chopper with spreading width adjustment
Screen and winnowing
High performance cross flow fan
Fan speed electrically adjustable from driver's cab
Top sieve: louvre-type sieves with folding sieve extension
Sieve box light
Total screening area m2 5,28 5,28 6,32 6,32
Bottom sieve, US louvres, opposed-motion sieves
Fully automatic "Balance" slope compensation (by pivoting the side gears)

= standard
= on request

5.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Technical Data
5650 5660 5680 5690
H HTS H HTS
Returns
Tailings elevators with friction inserts, left and right
Grain tank
Capacity l 7.500 7.500 8.500 1) 8.500 1)
Discharge in any position
Grain tank level indication, visual and audible
Interior light
Grain sampling from driver's stand
Grain tank cover
Grain tank extension, 1000 l
Deutz engine
BF6M 1013 FC, 6-cylinder, water-cooled
Power speed rpm 2300 2300 2300 2300
Fuel tank
Capacity 555 l
Drive
Hydrostatic drive with preselection range for
infinitely variable speed control
4-speed gearbox (with speed limiter):
1st gear km/h 0 4.08
2nd gear km/h 0 8.34
3rd gear km/h 0 10.08
4th gear km/h 0 20.00
Reverse km/h 0 16.0
4-speed gearbox (without speed limiter):
1st gear km/h 0 6.13
2nd gear km/h 0 12.52
3rd gear km/h 0 15.12
4th gear km/h 0 30.00
Reverse km/h 0 16.0
4-wheel drive
Brakes
Hydraulic foot brake, with individual wheel control
Mechanical handbrake
Steering, hydrostatic

= standard
= on request

1) with extended grain tank extension: 8.500 l

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 5.3


Technical Data
5650 5660 5680 5690
H HTS H HTS
Driver's cab
Commander Cab III with compressor-type air conditioner, CFC-free,
with integrated cooling compartment, high-comfort seat and armrest,
passenger seat, laminated glass panoramic windscreen, tinted
Electric control switches in cab for cutting table, threshing mechanism,
grain tank discharge and straw chopper
Commander Stick for control of several functions
Work lights
6 work lights on the driver's cab
2 rear work lights
1 work light on the grain tank discharge pipe
Safety systems
Spring-loaded slipping clutch for top straw channel shaft, intake auger,
pick-up reel and grain auger
DEUTZ-FAHR "agrotronic" with central instrument cluster,
visual and audible monitoring of important functions No. 24
Electronic speed monitoring for straw walker,
grain elevator and tailings elevator, chopper
Dimensions and weights
Length, without cutting table m 9.240 9.240 9.240 9.240
with cutting table, without crop dividers m 10.890 10.890 10.890 10.890
with transport trolley, up to 4.20 m long in transport position m 15.500 15.500 15.500 15.500
Width,
without cutting table (with standard tyres) m 3.285 3.285 3.285 3.285
Height
with standard tyres m 3.990 3.990 3.990 3.990
Track,
front m 2.670 2.670 2.670 2.670
rear m 2.343 2.343 2.343 2.343
Wheelbase m 3.892 3.892 3.892 3.892
Weight,
without cutting mechanism, without chopper approx. kg 11.600 11.800 12.200 12.500
Trailer load unbraked kg 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000
Trailer load braked kg 4.200 4.200 4.200 4.200
Tyres
front
650/75 R32
800/65 R32 172 A8
rear
405/70 R 20 155 A2
500/60-22.5 10 PR

= standard
= on request

5.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Technical Data
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 5.5


Technical Data

L
A
B

32899

D
C

32898-1

5.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Technical Data

5650 5660 5680-5690


H/HTS H/HTS
A Length without cutting table mm 9.240
B Length with cutting table (without crop dividers) mm 10.890
C Width with cutting table 4,20 m mm 4.515
4,80 m mm 5.124
5,40 m mm 5.734
6,30 m mm 6.648
7,20 m mm 7.563
D Width without cutting table1)
E Height of grain tank standard tyres mm 3.990
G Height up to bottom edge
of grain tank discharge pipe standard tyres
5,00 m discharge pipe mm 4.305
H Distance from side wall of cutting table to discharge pipe
for 4.20 m cutting table mm 2.330
for 4.80 m cutting table mm 2.025
for 5.40 m cutting table mm 1.720
for 6.30 m cutting table mm 1.260
for 7.20 m cutting table mm 800
I Distance from discharge pipe to left side wall of grain tank mm 4.180
L Wheelbase mm 3.892

1) Width according to Exception Approval

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 5.7


Technical Data
Please enter the serial numbers of your machine here:

Combine harvester

Engine

Straw chopper

Cutting table

Transport trolley

Compressor cooling system

Name plate (1)

The name plates contain the following details:

CE mark
Manufacturer
Type
Vehicle ident number
Fahrzeug-Identifizierungsnummer
permissible maximum weight
permissible axle load front
permissible axle load rear
1

35381

Chassis number

The chassis number (2) is located on the chassis in the


position shown here.

33838

5.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls

Chapter 6

Operating controls

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.1


Operating controls
Notes
1 2 3 4 5

6
33892
Standard version

6.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Overview of controls
Controls in the cab headlining, left

Lighting control panel (7) for operating the entire lighting


7 system and the windscreen wiper.

33894

Controls in the cab headlining, right

Air conditioning control panel (8), for operating the


heater, fresh air supply and cooling system.

8 33895

Controls on the rear left work platform

Sieve adjustment and sieve box lighting

10
33992
1 Instrument panel
2 Shift lever
3 Commander Control 2000
4 EMR-D control panel
5 Control console
6 Commander Stick
7 Lighting control panel
8 Air conditioner control panel
9 Sieve box lighting
10 Sieve adjustment (optional)

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.3


Operating controls

17
18
16

15
1

14
2

13 3

12 4

11
5
10
6
9 7
8 30506

Central instrument cluster


The central instrument cluster is an electronic monitoring system for the combine harvester. It operates on the
closed-circuit principle, which means that defective cables or fuses will also cause a fault to be indicated.

All essential functions of the combine harvester are protected by visual and audible warning devices. On starting
the engine all the indicator lights, except for (2), (12), (14) and (15), light up automatically for 3 seconds for a
function check. At the same time the audible warning signal is sounded (function check). If any of these functions
fails during operation the central warning light (8) starts to flash and an audible warning tone is sounded. The
source of the fault is indicated by the individual lights in the instrument cluster. A failure is also indicated if there
is a line failure in the wiring system.

If the red warning lights come on, stop immediately and correct the fault.

During operation especially at night a constant faint glimmering of the warning lights can be seen.
This does not indicate a failure.

6.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls

No. Function monitored Signal/Action required when activated

1 Straw chopper Red, buzzer sounds: chopper speed has fallen.


Check drive belt; check servomotor

2 Position of grain tank Swing grain tank discharge pipe inboard as far as it will go.
discharge pipe Press rocker switch until the indicator goes out
(cold hydraulic oil).

3 Straw chamber Red, buzzing tone.


(straw walkers) Stop immediately; clear chamber

4 Returns elevator Red, buzzing tone. Check cover seating; clear blockage; check
drive

5 Grain tank Orange, buzzing tone. Grain tank approx. 90 % full.


Empty tank; if necessary clean the sensor in the tank.

6 Engine air filter Orange, buzzing tone. Switch off engine; if the air filter is clogged
the warning signal is triggered. Clean as instructed.

7 Coolant temperature Buzzer sounds: allow engine to idle with no load for a few minutes;
then switch off engine; clean cooler; check cooling air intake or
check coolant circuit. Refill coolant if required. Check drive belt for
cooler fan.
8 Central warning light Red, buzzing tone. Check the individual warning lights/signals.

9 Auxiliary and parking brake Orange, with buzzing tone at speeds from 1.5 km/h upwards:
release parking brake.

10 Not used

11 Engine oil pressure Green, buzzing tone. Switch off the engine; check oil level and top
up if necessary; check engine for oil leaks.

12 Headlight main beam None

13 Battery charge Red, buzzing tone. Rev up engine to full load momentarily; check
tension of alternator drive belt.

14 Turn signal indicator Flashing lights. Check cables and connectors.


Trailer

15 Turn signal indicator Flashing lights. Check cables and connectors.


Combine

16 Fuel tank level Refill with diesel.

17 Engine oil temperature If needle in red sector: run engine at idling speed for a few minutes;
switch off engine.
Check oil level and filter; top up/refill if necessary.

18 Forward speed

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.5


Operating controls
Instrument panel
1
2
1 Hydraulic temperature display
2 Central instrument cluster
3 Coolant temperature gauge

3
33897

Hydraulic oil temperature indicator (1)

Normal working temperature: 70 90 C


brief peaks above 95 C also permitted

Oil temperature too high:


Check cooler and clean if necessary. Call workshop.

1
30507

Coolant temperature gauge (3)

The needle of the temperature gauge should always be in


the green zone and only exceptionally in the yellow/green
zone. If the needle enters the orange zone, the engine is
overheating.

In the event of coolant loss, immediately switch off


engine
Let the engine otherwise run for a few minutes without
load, stop the engine, check coolant circuit if
3 necessary.
33933

6.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.7


Operating controls
Commander Control 2000

General

The Commander Control is operated by a membrane keypad with 14 keys. The keys are backlit (night design).

1 2

6
9 8 7

33898

1 Screen
2 Swing grain tank discharge pipe inboard/outboard
3 Threshing section on/off
4 Cutting table on/off
5 Adjust clearances
6 Adjust speeds
7 Winnowing fan speed adjustment/Setup menu*
8 Threshing drum speed adjustment/Diagnosis menu*
9 Pick-up reel speed adjustment/Calibration menu*

* Press + and keys at the same time

For detailed information and instructions on the function and operation, see Section 7.

6.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls

1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1

5
2

4 3

33918

EMR-D control panel

1 Mode selector switch


1.1 Transport position adjustment
1.2 Cutting height setpoint
1.3 Ground pressure control (for AutoControl version with lateral tilt control)
1.4 Clearance control (for AutoControl version with lateral tilt control)
2 Overstroke button
3 Contact pressure preselection
4 Cutting height preselection
5 Diagnosis indicator (red LED)
6 Status indicator (green LED)

For detailed information and instructions on the function and operation, see Section 8.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.9


Operating controls

8 9 10 11 12 13

14
7
6
5 15
4
3 16

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
33899

12.1

19.1 13.1

19.2 13.2

12.2
35379

6.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Control console

1 Starter switch
2 Hazard warning lights on/off switch
3 Indicator light, straw chopper on/off
4 Indicator light, one-point lubrication system
5 Automatic cutting angle control
6 Swing grain tank discharge pipe inboard/outboard
7 Grain tank on/off switch
8 Indicator light, 4-wheel drive on/off
9 Rocker switch, reversing system on/off
10 Rocker switch, side cutting table on/off
11 Width segment switch (TCS only)
12 Switch, spreader plate adjustment left/right
12.1 Key: spreader plates to right
12.2 Key: spreader plates to left
13 Indicator lights, spreader plates right
13.1 Indicator light, spreader plates half-right
13.2 Indicator light, spreader plates full right
14 Operating hour counter
15 Socket, 12 Volt
16 Cigar lighter
17 Switch, straw guide plate, short/long straw
18 Work master switch
19 Indicator lights, spreader plates left
19.1 Indicator light, spreader plates half-left
19.2 Indicator light, spreader plates full left
20 Indicator light, differential lock, on/off
21 Switch, 4-wheel drive on/off
22 Indicator light, automatic fan inclination control on/off
23 Fault indicator light, engine management (EMR)
24 Engine speed switch with three positions:
lower idling
increased idling speed
nominal engine speed

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.11


Operating controls
Shift lever (1)
Gearshift positions

1 1 2

3 4
33901

All gears must only be shifted during standstill!


33900

Commander Stick (2)


Adjusting the speed and direction of travel with the
commander stick (2).

When the commander stick is in neutral the combine


2 harvester is stationary.
Only shift gear while the combine is stationary and the
commander stick is in neutral.
If the combine harvester fails to come to a stop when
the drive lever is in neutral, the neutral setting must be
corrected on the Bowden cable of the hydraulic pump.
33930
After releasing the commander stick from neutral (pull the
commander stick to the left), the commander stick can be
moved forward and back to control the infinitely variable
drive speed.

Forward: Release commander stick from neutral and


push it slowly forwards.

Reverse: Release commander stick from neutral and


push it slowly back.

Before starting the engine the Commander


33929 Stick shall be latched in neutral position!
Below the Commander Stick, two sensors for the
immobiliser system are mounted. It is not possible to start
the engine when the Commander stick is swivelled
forward or backwards.

Never shift gear on a slope!

Stalling:
If the engine output is insufficient for the selected drive
ratio, so that the drive tends to stall the engine, the drive
lever must immediately be shifted to the neutral position.
33931 Then continue driving in a lower gear.

6.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Commander Stick controls
3 4 1 EMR-D automatic mode button
2 Pick-up reel forward/back
3 Cutting angle adjustment forward/back
4 Pick up reel, raise/lower
2 5 Front attachment, tilt right down/left down
5 6 Front attachment, raise/lower
6

1
32504/1

Air conditioner control panel


8 9 10 15
7 Control panel
8 Rotary control knob for heater
7 9 Blower control knob
10 Cab cooling system control knob
11 Cab cooling system on/off switch
12 Fault indicator light, cab cooling
13 Unused
14 Digital clock
15 Loudspeaker

14 13 12 11
33895

Lighting control panel

16 17 16 Panoramic revolving lights


17 Windscreen wiper
18 Control panel
19 Work lights: Off
18 4 front work lights
All work lights
20 Headlights top/bottom
21 Headlights: Off
Parking lights
19 Driving lights
21 20 33894

Sieve box lighting

22 Push-button sieve pan lighting On/Off

22

33992

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.13


Operating controls
Compressor-type cooling system
1 2 3
The compressor-type air cooler can only be
operated in conjunction with the fresh air blower.

Switch on the compress-type cooler and set the desired


cooling air temperature with the rotary control (3).
The cooling agent used is refrigerant R134a.
R134a is CFC-free.

Safety instructions for the compressor-type


7 6 5 4 cooler
33895

Avoid all contact with the liquid


1 Heater control knob
refrigerant.
2 Blower switch If any refrigerant is sprayed into the eyes,
3 Cab cooling system control knob contact a doctor immediately.
4 Cab cooling system on/off switch All maintenance and repair work must
only be carried out by specially trained
5 Fault indicator lamp, cab cooling system
and qualified personnel.
6 Unused No welding is permitted on components of
7 Digital clock the refrigerant circuit or in their immediate
vicinity. Danger of toxic fumes.
Maximum ambient temperature for
refrigerant: 80 C.

Warning
For correct operation of the compressor-
8 operated cooler, both the cab door and the
hinged exit window must remain closed.

If the cooling power is reduced, check whether the


evaporator is clogged with dust. The evaporator is
located behind the front fold-down section (8) of the cab
roof.

For cleaning of the evaporator see maintenance


chapter, compressor cooling system.

33948

6.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Lighting system

1 2 The following functions can be controlled from the lighting


control panel

1 Revolving lights
2 Windscreen wiper
3 Work lights:
position 1: 6 work lights
position 2: additionally, grain tank work light and
2 rear work lights
4 Headlamps upper/lower
5 4 3 33894
5 Headlamps: Off
Parking lights
Driving lights

If the lower driving lights are concealed by the front


attachment, you should switch over to the upper
driving lights in accordance with national
regulations.

Interior light
5 6 7 Positions of switch (6):
To rear Light (5) permanently on
Mid-position Off
To front Light (5) comes on when cab door
is opened

Function of switch (8):


Spotlight (7) on/off
8
33902

Air recirculating filter

The circulating air filter (9) is located in the rear roof


console.

9
33903

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.15


Operating controls
Fresh air filters

The four fresh air filters (1) are located to the right and left
on the outside of the roof overhang. Before installing,
make sure that the perforated plate of the filter is facing
downwards. Comply with the maintenance instructions.

1 Functions of the fresh air and recirculating air filters

Air from outside is drawn in through the fresh air filters (1).
At the same time, air is drawn in by the fan above the
33925
recirculating air filter located in the rear wall of the cab.
The air inside the cab is therefore constantly cleaned.

6.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Defroster/demister nozzles

The defroster nozzles (1) are integrated in the right and


left-hand side of the windscreen frame. The air from these
1 nozzles prevents the windows misting over.

33904

Fresh air nozzles

2 The fresh air nozzles (2) and (3) supply the driver's cab
with fresh air, hot air or cooling air, depending on the
settings selected on the air conditioner control panel. The
3 nozzle direction can be adjusted.

33905

Inspection window
5 4 The inspection window (4) is located at eye level on the
left next to the driver's seat. It provides the driver with a
visual check of the grain tank level and the grain quality.

Beverage holder

A beverage holder (5) for drinks bottles is located on the


right next to the driver's seat.

33906

Steering wheel

The steering column can be swivelled forward and back


6 to adjust to the seat position.

To adjust the column, the knob (6) must be


loosened.
After adjusting, the knob (6) must be securely
retightened.

The steering wheel must never be adjusted


33708 while driving.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.17


Operating controls
Steering-column switch (1)
1
The steering-column switch (1) has the following
functions:

Position Function

1 Press Horn

2 Push forward Blinker, right

3 Raise Main beam


33708
4 Pull back Blinker, left

3 5 Down Dipped beam, sidelights (only when


ignition is on)
2
1 6 Fully down Headlight flasher

1 4
5 Ignition switch

0 Zero position
I Operating position (the warning lights for the
6 battery charge and oil pressure are lit if the
33748
engine is off).
II Start

The servomotors of the belt clutches may


0 move on switching on the ignition and
I starting the engine. The clutches will be
driven to the disengaged position.
II

After switching off the engine, always


remove the key from the ignition on leaving
the cab.

33946
The engine can and may only be started when
the Commander Stick is in the Neutral position.

6.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Driver's seat
6
5 These seats have a variety of adjustment facilities so that
they can be optimally adjusted to the driver's weight and
stature.
The individual adjusting elements and possible settings
are listed below.

1 Never attempt to adjust the seat while


4 driving.

2 3 High-comfort seat
33907
1 Adjust the seat height with the lever while the seat is
empty.
2 Using the weight indicator and lever, adjust the weight
setting while sitting in the seat.
3 Seat forward/back
4 Backrest inclination adjustment
5 Armrest angle adjustment
6 Foldable armrest

The seat height can be adjusted to three positions:


1. Raise to 1st lock position
2. Raise to 2nd lock position
3. Raise: the seat is lowered to the bottom position.

Passenger seat
7
One passenger may be carried on the combine
harvester. The passenger must sit in the specially
provided passenger seat (7).

When driving on public roads, the transport


of an extra person is only permitted on the
33908 specially provided driver's seat. Otherwise
the transport of persons is prohibited.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.19


Operating controls

9 1

8 2
2
2

7
10

3
6

1 2

5 4
5 32863-1

Aero Fit seat (air sprung) (optional) 5 Combined weight/height adjuster (infinitely
variable)
Never adjust the seat while driving. Weight setting:
Raise or push the handle slightly until the green
marking on the weight and height display is visible.
1 Headrest, height adjustable and removable
Height setting:
2 Lumbar support Fully raise or press the handle until the desired
position is obtained (the green marking must be
3 Backrest inclination = backrest adjustment visible).
The weight and height adjuster can only
4 Weight and height display be operated when the ignition is on.
The adjuster should not be operated
continuously for longer than 1 minute.

6 Longitudinal adjustment

7 Safety belt fixing

8 Armrest, folding

9 Height adjustment, armrest

10 Armrest inclination

6.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Stowage compartments
The drawer (1) is located under the control console.

The stowage compartment (2) is positioned next to the


1 passenger seat and is fitted with a cover.

Foot-operated controls
3 Foot-switch cover open
4 Cutting table emergency stop, red
5 Grain tank discharge, yellow
2
33909
The grain tank clutch cannot be engaged if the
grain tank discharge tube is swung fully inboard.

3
To empty the grain tank, the grain tank discharge pipe
must be swung outboard by pressing the foot-switch (5)
on the floor of the driver's cab.
After pressing foot-switch (5), the harvested crop is
transferred from the grain tank.
Press the foot-switch (5) again to stop grain tank
4 discharge.

Except when emptying the grain tank, always


fold down the cover (3) over the grain tank
5 33910
discharge foot-switch (5).

Service brake steering brake


6 Pedal for braking the right wheel
6 7 8
7 Interlock plate
8 Pedal for braking the left wheel

Always check that the brakes are working


correctly before driving.

Do not use the individual wheel brakes when


driving on public roads
towing a trailer.
When driving on public roads or towing a
32567
trailer, the two pedals must be locked
together with the interlock plate (3).

Parking brake (Handbrake)


10 next to the driver's seat on the right

9 Locking button
9 10 Handbrake lever

The parking brake must be released while


driving!

33911

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.21


Operating controls
Hinged window / Emergency exit
A
A hinged window is located on the right of the driver's
1 cab. This window can be opened outwards with the
handle (1). To push out (open) the window (figure A),
pull the handle (1) inwards, overcoming the pressure
point (clamping force) of the handle.

33912

This window is also used as an emergency exit. For


B this purpose, open the window as described above and
1 then lift the handle (1) upwards out of its latch (2)
(figure B). Push the window fully open and exit the cab
via the platform on the right-hand side of the machine.

33913

Interior door handle

The driver's door can be opened from inside by turning


the handle (3).

33914

Exterior door handle


4 The supplied ignition keys are also used for the door of
the driver's cab.

To unlock: turn the key to the left.

To lock: turn the key to the right.

To open the door, press the button (4).

If you lose your keys, you can obtain new keys via your
33915
dealer.

6.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Rear-view mirrors
2 1
To set the basic position of the rear-view mirrors, loosen
the hexagon head screws (1) on the back of the mirrors
and retighten after setting the desired mirror position.
1
Tighten the screws (2) only sufficiently to hold the mirrors
in position, but allowing them to fold in without damage if
they hit an obstacle

2
33887

35607

Electrical adjustment of the right rear-view mirror


3
The exterior mirrors are adjusted with the multifunction
switch (3).

Press the edges of the knob to adjust the mirrors to the


desired position.

up
down
right
35608 left

The mirrors must be adjusted to the seat position and


driver's height.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.23


Operating controls
Grain loss monitor
Construction
1 The grain loss monitor completes the described systems
enabling the combine driver to monitor the operation of
3 the machine.
It is an essential accessory instrument cluster that
enables you to utilise the full power potential of the
combine harvester while keeping grain losses to an
3 acceptable level.
2
Instrument gauge (1) = Grain losses at the straw walker
33734
Instrument gauge (2) = Grain losses at the sieve box

The two adjusting knobs (3) are used for adjusting the
basic settings of the system:
Upper knob for instrument (1)
Lower knob for instrument (2)

4 The grain loss monitor is activated automatically when


the threshing mechanism is engaged. Instruments (1)
and (2) light up to confirm that the monitor is active.

The instantaneous forward speed is detected by the


inductive sensor (4) and associated magnet (5) which are
5 fitted to the RH rear wheel.
31534 The distance between the inductive transducer and the
magnet must be 5 8 mm.

7 The grain losses from the sieve box are detected by the
tubular sensor (6).

The sensitivity of the tubular sensor can be adjusted to


6 suit the crop by means of the selector switch (7). The
three switch settings are identified by symbols (spots) of
different size:

Maize
Cereals
Rape
35609
The switch (7) is factory-set to (cereals).
The grain losses from the straw walkers are detected by
the plate sensors (8) located in the two outer straw
walkers (LH and RH).

8 Cleaning the tubular and plate sensors

In particular when harvesting cereals that are still slightly


green and damp, a sound-insulating coat of dirt may
smother the sensors.

31536
The sensors must therefore be cleaned with
water whenever dirty.

6.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
The light sensor (1) is used to increase the value
indicated by instrument display (2) (grain loss from the
straw walkers) in proportion as the light level falls at
dusk/nightfall.

The reason for this upward correction is that the


1 atmospheric humidity and dampness of the straw
normally increase at dusk/nightfall.

The light sensor (1) is located behind the cab roof on the
front edge of the grain tank.

33928 Basic setting/Resetting

Basic setting or resetting becomes necessary under the


2 following conditions:
4 changeover to another kind of crop
change in environmental conditions
change in condition of crop
changed size/weight of grains

4
Setting

3 Determine the correct adjustment by test runs, if


possible in standing crops and not at the edge of
33734
the field.

1. Adjust the combine harvester as usual for the optimal


acceptable grain loss at the appropriate forward
speed, at first without considering the instruments.

2. Continue the test run, using the instruments to


determine the optimal ratio between grain loss and
forward speed.
If the needles of both instruments respond
simultaneously and at the same levels, there is no
need to adjust the threshing section.
If one needle points to a higher value than the other,
the settings of the threshing or sieving section must be
adjusted.

Instrument (2) = straw walkers


Correct the concave
clearance/threshing drum speed
Turbo separator clearance/turbo
separator speed fast - slow
Instrument (3) = sieve box
Correct the bottom draught/top
sieve/lower sieve

3. The instruments can now be set during the continued


test run, using the adjusting knobs (4) on the grain
loss monitor.
Adjust the needles of instruments (2) and (3) so that at

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.25


Operating controls
In this way, by modifying the combine equipment settings
in relation to the forward speed, you can reduce grain
1 losses to an acceptable minimum while utilising the
maximum appropriate performance of the machine.

Caution: the adjusting knobs (1) can only


be turned a maximum of 270. Do not attempt
to force them full-circle past their end-stops.
1

Setting the plate sensors

33734 The plate sensors in the straw walkers can be set to the
values NORM, MAX and MIN. The factory-set default is
NORM.

NORM = Normal sensitivity


MAX = Maximum sensitivity (small grains)
MIN = Minimum sensitivity (large grains)

The MAX or MIN settings are only required in very


special operating conditions with particular crop types.

If the plate sensor setting is changed, the basic


system setting must also be adjusted.

6.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Practical operation

Instrument (1) = straw walkers


Instrument (2) = sieve box

G = green sector
R = red sector

If both needles rise to the red sector roughly


simultaneously:

Reduce speed.
31538

If both needles fall to the white sector roughly


simultaneously:

Increase speed.

31539

Instrument (2), needle in red sector


Instrument (1), needle in green sector

Losses at the sieve box (sieves clogged with dirt,


cleaning draught too strong)

Clean sieve box, reduce fan speed.

31540

Instrument (1), needle in red sector


Instrument (2), needle in green sector

Losses at the straw walkers (straw walkers clogged with


dirt or overloaded)

Reduce speed. Clean straw walkers.

31541

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.27


Operating controls
Instrument (1) = straw walkers
Instrument (2) = sieve box

G = green sector
R = red sector

Instrument (1), needle swinging at intervals between high


and low values
Instrument (2), needle in green sector

You are driving up and down on undulating terrain with the


cleaning fan set too low.
31542
Increase bottom draught fan speed

Note:
When handling particularly high volumes of straw, it is
possible that grains will remain embedded in the straw
carpet. In this case, instrument (1) will indicate little or no
loss, and so grain loss will have to be determined from
the sieve box instrument.

Troubleshooting

The values indicated by the monitor are too low

Monitor setting too low. Repeat the setting procedure.


Power supply failure (monitor instrument cluster not
lit). Check fuses, cables and connections.
Increase the working speed.
The wrong sensitivity class has been set for the plate
sensors (possible settings: MAX, NORM or MIN).
Defective cable or connector.
Tubular sensor not positioned correctly in the grain
flow.

Check the tubular sensor and plate sensors


at regular intervals for dirt. Clean regularly
with water and a clean cloth.

The values indicated by the monitor are too low

Monitor setting too high. Repeat the setting procedure.


Reduce speed.
Vibrations (e.g. from the straw chopper) are being
transmitted to the sensors.
Call specialist workshop.
Short circuit in the cables or connectors.
Only for plate sensors: straw is possibly being thrown
against the sensors from the straw chopper.
Call specialist workshop.

6.28 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Calculating grain loss

The following table shows the number of grains lost during one linear metre of different cereals with different
cutting widths. The table is based on the assumption of a harvest yield of 4000 kg/ha with 1 % loss.

Cutting width Barley Oats Wheat Rye


25 grains 28 grains 21 grains 25 grains
cm =1g =1g =1g =1g

100 100 112 84 100


180 180 201 161 180
240 240 268 201 240
265 265 296 222 265
300 300 336 252 300
360 360 403 302 360
420 420 470 352 420
450 450 504 378 450
510 510 571 428 510
570 570 638 478 570

If the actual yield deviates significantly from the assumed yield specified above, the table values must be
corrected accordingly. For example, if the yield per hectare is 4800 kg, the number of grains specified in the
table represent a loss rate of 0.8 %.

The losses should be collected on a piece of canvas attached precisely below the sieve box. The
distance driven must also be precisely measured.

Example:

I. BARLEY: 360 cm cutting width, 220 grains, yield 4000 kg/ha

220
Loss: = 0,6 %
360

Il. BARLEY: 360 cm cutting width, 220 grains, yield 4800 kg/ha

220 4000
Loss: x = 0,6 %
360 4800

Ill. WHEAT: 265 cm cutting width, 200 grains, yield 5000 kg/ha

200 4500
Loss: x = 0,6 %
265 5000

Grains which already lay on the field before threshing was started must of course not be included in the total.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.29


Operating controls
Rule of thumb for calculating grain loss:

As can be seen from the grain loss calculation table, 1 grain of cereal lost per 1 cm cutting width over a distance
of 1 linear meter is acceptable.

Since the grains lost are normally distributed over a 1 m wide swathe behind the combine harvester, the number
of grains lost can be converted into the grain loss per m2 by a simple rule of thumb, as follows.

A normal hand measures roughly 1/100 m2. As an acceptable rule of thumb, the number of lost grains counted in
the area covered by the hand should therefore also be one hundredth of the value given in the loss calculation
table.

Example:
assuming: Cutting width 5.10 m
Barley
Yield as per table (1 % grain loss, 4000 kg/ha)

The table shows that with 1 % loss the combine can be expected to lose roughly 510 grains of the cereal as it
advances one linear metre.

When harvesting, if you collect the lost grains with your palm open flat underneath the straw walkers and sieve
box, the nominal number of grains for comparison can be calculated as follows:

510
= (5,1) 5 grains
100

6.30 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls

7 6 5

30672

10 9 8
30768

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.31


Operating controls
On-board computer (optional)

System description

The hectaremeter comprises the following units:

1. Control instrument: For display and operation

2. Wheel sensor: Transmits one impulse per wheel revolution to the control instrument to enable the
various functions to be controlled and calculated.

3. Solenoid switch: Starts and stops the hectaremeter. If the hectaremeter is stopped, the letter "r"
("raised") is displayed on the left-hand side of the display next to the speed
indicator.

The solenoid switch is located on the right-hand side of the feed channel bearing. The hectaremeter is started or
stopped by raising or lowering the cutting table. The switching threshold is set to a cutting table height of about
40 50 cm above the ground. The operation of this solenoid switch can be monitored by switching over from
hectaremeter to speed indicator.

Description of the function keys

1 Working time (hours and minutes)

2 Hectaremeter (partial count)

3 Hectaremeter (total count)

4 Speed (km/h)

5 Working width input

6 Wheel circumference input

7 Zero reset for all functions: working time, partial area and total area
This key is also used to enter the figure 0.

Description of system connections

8 Connection to 12 V power supply

9 Connection for wheel sensor

10 Connection for solenoid switch

6.32 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
The operation of the system is divided into two sets of three functions:

Function set 1: Time


Hectares (area worked)
Forward speed per hour (km/h)

Function set 2: Time


Metres (distance covered)
Wheel revolutions (rpm)

In summary, a total of 6 functions are divided into two separate sets that cannot be used at the same time. In
other words, the computer must be set to measure either the area worked in hectares or the distance covered in
metres (function set 1 or 2). You can change from set 1 to 2 and vice versa e.g. by resetting the system to zero.

All functions of the selected set are constantly calculated, irrespective of the function actually displayed. For
example, even if the driver chooses to monitor only the forward speed, the system will simultaneously calculate
the area worked and the operating time.

If the power supply is switched off - intentionally or not - the input values and all collected data will be saved until
reset or deleted. The input values and recorded data are automatically retrieved from memory when the power
supply is restored.

Function Set 1

1. Time function

Working time in hours and minutes

Note: first make sure that the wheel circumference and working width are entered correctly.

Press this key to display the elapsed time in hours and minutes (max. 99 hours and 59 minutes). The
timer can be stopped or started by pushing this key again (toggle function).

If the colon ":" is flashing, the timer is running.


If the colon ":" is constant (not flashing) the timer is stopped.

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the timer to zero.
C

Basic setting

When you press this key, the last recorded working time is displayed.

If the colon is flashing, the key must be pressed again before starting a new time record. Pressing the key stops
the timer (indicated by the fact that the colon stops flashing).

Resetting the timer to zero

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the timer to zero.
C

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.33


Operating controls
Starting the timer

Press this key to start the timer (the colon starts flashing)

The on-board computer will now start counting the elapsed time (hours and minutes). If you select another
function, the timer will continue running in the background. This key can be pressed at any time to stop and
restart the timer.

2. Hectaremeter

Hectares per field "partial area"

ha Press this key to display the area worked in hectares. The area is indicated with two decimal places
in the range from 0 99.99 ha and with 1 decimal place in the range from 100 999.9 ha.

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the partial area counter to zero.
C

Hectares per field "total area"

+ Press this key to display the total area worked in hectares. The area is indicated with two decimal
ha places in the range from 0 99.99 ha, with 1 decimal place in the range from 100 999.9 ha and
without decimals in the range from 1000 9999 ha.
This function is used to totalize the complete area worked.

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the total area counter to zero.
C

Resetting the partial area counter

ha Press this key. The last recorded area value (in hectares) will be displayed.

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the partial area counter to zero.
C

Resetting the total area counter

+ Press this key. The last total area count in hectares will be displayed.
ha

0/ Press this key for at least 3 seconds to reset the total area counter to zero.
C

Both hectaremeters are now ready for operation. If another function is selected in the meantime, the
hectaremeters will continue to operate. If you switch over to the speed indicator function, you will be informed if
the hectaremeter has stopped by the letter "r" displayed in front of the speed.

On completing a field or part of a field, the area worked can be read off the display. Then reset the partial
counter to zero, ready for the next partial count. In this way, you can add together several partial areas to give
the total worked area by pressing the ha + key.

6.34 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
3. Speed indicator

Press this key to display the forward speed in km/h.

kmh If the hectaremeter is stopped while the speed indicator is displayed, the letter "r" is displayed in front
of the speed.

When the computer is switched on, the speed is always shown first on the display.

If the machine is stationary for longer than 8 seconds, the speed indicator is reset to zero.

Function Set 2

1. Odometer

Basic setting
+ Press this key
ha

Then press this key followed by

9 9 9 9
ha When you press this key again the distance covered will be displayed in metres.

Resetting

0/ Hold this key down for at least 3 seconds. The odometer is reset to zero.
C

(The odometer is incremented in steps based on the entered wheel circumference. For example, if the wheel
circumference is 350 cm, the odometer counts in steps of 3.5 m, and the total distance is determined as the sum
of these steps. In other words, the distance covered is only counted in complete units of 3.5 m. Smaller,
intermediate distances cannot be counted).

2. Wheel revolutions

This function is mainly used to count the number of wheel revolutions when determining and entering the wheel
diameter.

Basic setting

kmh Press this key

Then press this key followed by:

9 9 9 9
kmh When you press this key again the distance covered will be displayed in metres.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.35


Operating controls
Resetting

0/ Hold this key down for at least 3 seconds to reset the wheel revolution counter to zero.
C

Basic settings of the on-board computer

The following values must be entered:


Circumference of the wheel on which the sensor is mounted
Working width of the cutting table.
To determine these values proceed as follows:

Wheel circumference

First press this key

An "O" is then displayed in the left-hand side of the display.


Mark both the ground and the tyre.
Drive a distance that causes the wheel to complete at least 10 revolutions.
Mark the ground next to the marking on the tyre.
Measure the distance between the two ground markings. Divide this distance by the number of wheel
revolutions. The result is the effective wheel circumference.
Using the keypad of the control instrument, enter the wheel circumference in cm.

Working width

First press this key

You can now enter the working width in cm.

Entering/changing the wheel circumference

When you press this key, the last wheel circumference entered is displayed (together with the
character "O" on the left).

You can now directly enter the wheel circumference in complete cm. There is no need to delete the previous
entry before entering a new circumference. The old value is automatically overwritten.

Example:
The measurement showed that 10 wheel revolutions represented a distance of 25.03 m, or 2503 cm. The wheel
circumference is calculated as follows: 2503 divided by 10 = 250.3 cm. This value is then rounded to the nearest
cm, in this case 250 cm.

Press the following keys in the order shown:

2 5 0/
C
A wheel circumference of 250 cm has now been entered, and you can switch over to a different function.
Note: a wheel circumference larger than 600 cm cannot be entered if only one magnet is used with the wheel
sensor, because the interval between impulses is too long. Therefore, if the wheel circumference is more than
350 cm a second magnet must be used with the wheel sensor.

6.36 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Operating controls
Entering/changing the working width

When you press this key, the last working width entered is displayed.

Now enter the working width in complete cm. There is no need to delete the old value before entering a new
width, because the old value is automatically overwritten.

Example:
To enter a working width of 3.6 m:
Press the following keys in the order shown below.

3 6 0/
C
A working width of 360 cm has now been entered, and you can switch over to another function.

Checking the system

First enter a working width of 8888 by pressing the following keys in the order shown below:

8 8 8 8
Then select the timer function:

Press this key to select the timer function.

The display will now read


"h" if the wheel sensor is activated
"r" if the solenoid switch is activated.

Note: the letter "r" is also displayed when the hectaremeter is stopped.

Error message

The message "FEJL" appears in the display when the supply voltage is less than 12 Volt.
In this case, have the system inspected by a competent dealer.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 6.37


Operating controls

6.38 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

Chapter 7

Commander Control 2000

Operating Instructions

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 Version 0.27 7.1


Commander Control 2000

1 2

11 3

12
4
13

6
Cal Diag Setup

10 9 8

The key functions are only active when the main


work switch is on.

35402

7.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
No Controls Function/Operation

1 Screen: Select the main screen here.

2 Status indicators for

Grain tank clutch engaged


Blank field = Disengaged
Threshing section clutch engaged Flashing symbol =
Clutch currently engaging
Cutting table clutch engaged Symbol = Engaged
35402

3 Swivel grain tank discharge pipe in/out:


Press key I: The grain tank pipe swings out. Press one of the keys again to stop
the pipe movement.
35402
Press key 0: The grain tank pipe swings in. Press one of the keys again to stop
the pipe movement.

Observe the indication "grain tank tube unlocked at combined instrument


gauge.

The grain tank clutch for emptying the grain tank is engaged with the pedal
switch. If the grain tank pipe is fully retracted while the grain tank clutch is
engaged, the grain tank clutch will be automatically disengaged.

4 Engaging/disengaging the threshing section:


Key I: Engage threshing mechanism.
Key 0: Disengage threshing mechanism (if the cutting table is activated, it too will
35402
be disengaged).

To engage the threshing section, the main work switch must be switched
on, and the engine must be running at slow idling speed. The charge
control light must be extinguished.
If the straw chopper is activated (straw guide plate in the chopping
position), when the threshing key is pressed, the straw chopper will
automatically be engaged first, followed by the threshing section. On
disengaging, the threshing section is disengaged first, followed by the
straw chopper.
ATTENTION: Change straw guide plate position only with disengaged
threshing mechanism.
Engaging/disengaging the cutting table.

Key I: Engage the cutting table.


Key 0: Disengage the cutting table.


35402
To engage the clutch, the threshing section must be activated.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.3


Commander Control 2000

1 2

11 3

12
4
13

6
Cal Diag Setup

10 9 8

The key functions are only active when the main


work switch is on.

35402

7.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
No Controls Function/Operation

6 Press 1 x Concave clearances: Open the "Set Clearances" menu to set the
concave clearances for the threshing drum and turbo separator (the
main work switch must be switched on).
35402

Press 2 x Sieve adjustment: Open the "Set Clearances" menu to adjust the
sieves (the main work switch must be switched on).

Concave rapid opening: Hold down the key for 3 seconds. See section on
"Concave rapid opening".

Return to main screen/Load settings.

7 Open the "Speed Monitor" menu to set the speed warning limits for the tailings
elevator, straw walker shaft and grain tank auger.

35402

8 Setting the winnowing fan speed:


(To set the fan speed, the threshing section must be in operation).

Setup + key: Increase fan speed (indicator at (13))


Setup
Setup key: Decrease fan speed (indicator at (13))

35402
Setup Menu:
Hold down the Setup + and keys simultaneously for 3 seconds. The "Setup
Menu" for setting the language appears. See the section on "Language Selection".

Only use the Setup menu to set the language version. All other
functions are intended for customer service only.

35065 + 35066 35402

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.5


Commander Control 2000

1 2

11 3

12
4
13

6
Cal Diag Setup

10 9 8

The key functions are only active when the main


work switch is on.

35402

7.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
No Controls Function/Operation

9 Threshing drum speed adjustment:


(to adjust the drum, the threshing section must be activated).

Diag + key: Increase threshing drum speed (indicated by 11))


Diag
Diag key: Decrease threshing drum speed (indicated by (11))

35402
The diagnosis menu is only intended for customer service.

If the diagnosis menu is selected inadvertently, it can be closed by


pressing keys Cal + and simultaneously.

10 Reel speed adjustment:


(to adjust the pick-up reel speed, the cutting table must be in operation)

Manual speed adjustment:


Cal + key: Increase reel speed
Cal
Cal key: Decrease reel speed

35402 Activate/deactivate automatic reel speed adjustment:


Press Cal + and keys simultaneously.
(see section on "Setting automatic reel speed adjustment".)

When automatic reel speed adjustment is activated, the ratio of the reel
speed to the travel speed can be adjusted by pressing the Cal + and
keys simultaneously.

Calibration menu:
Hold down keys Cal + and simultaneously for 3 seconds. The "Calibration
menu" will appear.

11 Threshing drum speed display (rpm)

35402

12 Travel speed display (km/h)

35402

13 Winnowing fan speed display (rpm)

35402

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.7


Commander Control 2000
System start and shutdown

CAUTION
When switching on the ignition, the clutch
servomotors may move, because the
clutches are automatically driven to the
disengaged position.

The Commander Control 2000 is switched on with the


ignition. Two audible signals are sounded, and the start
screen is displayed.
On starting the engine, the system is restarted.

The bottom two lines of the start screen show


the installed software version with the release
35402 35405
date.

The main screen is then displayed, and Command


Control 2000 is ready for operation.

The Commander Control 2000 is not ready for


operation if the charging warning lamp is lit or in
case of low voltage.
If necessary, briefly increase the engine speed.

The Commander Control 2000 is switched off by


switching off the ignition.

35429 35402

7.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
Selecting the language /
Setting the view angle
To set the desired language and view angle, open the
Setup menu.

Hold down the Setup + and keys (1)


simultaneously for 3 seconds.

The Setup menu must only be used to set the


language version and the view angle. All
other functions are intended for customer
service only.

Cal Diag Setup


Language selectionc

When the Setup menu is displayed, the highlighted cursor


bar is on "Language" (if not, select the "Language" line
with the Diag (2) keys).

1 Select the desired language with the Setup (1) keys.

Save the selection by pressing the Cal + and


keys (3) simultaneously.
35429 35402 The selected language is activated immediately.
The main screen is displayed again.

Setting the view angle

Language: English Select the view angle with the Diag (2) keys.
Front tyres:
Radial 800/65R32 Change the view angle with the Setup (1) keys.

Turbo separator:
Save the selection by pressing the Cal + and
yes
keys (3) simultaneously.
View angle: 5
The change is activated immediately.

Cal Diag Setup

3 2 1
In the Setup menu, if more than 10 seconds
elapse without any user input, the system
automatically returns to the main screen. In this
case, the settings entered while the Setup menu
was open will not be saved.

35402 35406

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.9


Commander Control 2000
Setting the speed warning limits
The speeds of the returns elevator, straw walker shaft
and grain tank delivery auger are continuously monitored.
A minimum warning limit can be set for each speed. If the
speed falls to the set warning limit, the audible and visual
alarm is activated.
The warning limit can be set to a speed reduction of
between 5 % and 50 % (relative to the nominal speed).

To set the speed warning limits, open the "Speed


monitor" menu in the main screen.

Press key (1).

Cal Diag Setup


35402
The Speed Monitor menu appears.

Setting the warning limits:


Grain tank delivery auger keys (3)
Straw walker shaft keys (4)
Speed Monitor Returns elevator keys (5)
Deactivating the alarm:
Set the warning limit to the bottom value, i.e. 50 %
reduction.
Hold down the key for 5 seconds.
The selected warning will be deactivated, and the symbol
appears next to the display bar (as shown in the
illustration opposite for the delivery auger).
Activating the alarm:
Press the + key.
Cal Diag Setup Select each warning limit as required.
Saving the values:
Press key (1). The main screen is displayed.

In the absence of any user input for a period of


more than 10 seconds, the system automatically
returns to the main screen. In this case, any
5 4 3 2 1 settings previously entered will not be saved.
To quit the menu without saving the values,
press key (2).

35402 35407

7.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
Setting the automatic reel speed
control
(optional)
The automatic reel speed control enables the reel speed
to be adapted automatically to the travel speed (ground
drive speed).
Activating/deactivating:
Press the Cal + and (1) keys simultaneously.
After switching on automatic reel speed control, the
symbol appears next to the reel speed symbol to
indicate automatic reel speed control mode (2).

Standby/active mode:
Cal Diag Setup
The automatic reel speed control is in standby mode if
the symbol (2) remains continuously lit. If the symbol is
flashing, automatic control is active.
At full throttle in the operating range from 2.0 to 9.0 km/h,
the automatic reel speed control automatically switches
from standby mode to active mode.
1
Adjusting the reel speed ratio:

Switch on the automatic reel speed control.


35402

Increase the speed ratio Cal + key

Decrease the speed ratio Cal key

When adjusting the ratio, the control is automatically


switched to standby mode. Ten seconds after completing
the adjustment process, the system automatically returns
to active mode with the new ratio of reel speed to travel
speed.

35409
When automatic reel speed control is
deactivated, the reel speed is directly adjusted
2 with the Cal + and keys.

Displaying the adjustment process:


Manual or automatic adjustment of the reel speed is
indicated by arrows above or below the symbol for
automatic reel speed control (2). If the arrow points
upwards (3), the reel speed is increasing, and if it points
downwards (4) the speed is being reduced.

35410 35411

3 4

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.11


Commander Control 2000

Setting the concave clearances

Caution
The servomotors and linkage mechanisms
move are moving parts.

The clearances of the concave and separator concave


can be set in this menu.

Precondition: the main work switch must be on.

To set the concave clearances in the main screen, open


the "Set clearances" menu.

Cal Diag Setup Press key (2).

35402

The "Set clearances" menu is displayed.


The clearance is set in discrete increments (steps).
Set clearances
Selecting clearances:
Turbo separator Keys (3) 5 steps
Threshing concave, rear Keys (4) 15 steps
Threshing concave, front Keys (5) 15 steps

Saving values:
Press key (2). The adjustment process is started, and on
completion the main menu is displayed.

If the selected settings are in the prohibited


range, they are automatically corrected to the
permitted minimum/maximum value when saved
Cal Diag Setup (otherwise the threshing drum would strike the
concave).

In the absence of any user input for a period of


more than 10 seconds, the main screen
automatically reappears. In this case, any
settings previously entered will not be saved.
5 4 3 2 1 To quit the menu without saving the values,
press key (1).

35402 35407

7.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

If you attempt to adjust the clearances while


adjustment is prohibited (main work switch off),
the following message appears on the screen:

Set clearances

Clearance
adjustment is
prohibited.

35402

Switch back to the main screen with key


(1) or (2).

Rapid opening of threshing


concave/separator concave
CAUTION
Servomotors and linkage mechanisms are
moving parts.

The rapid open function immediately opens the threshing


concave and separator concave (e.g. to prevent blockage
of the threshing mechanism).

Activating the rapid opening function:


Hold down key (2) for three seconds.

The "Rapid opening" information window is displayed.

Cal Diag Setup

Rapid opening
of thr. drum and
Turbosep. active

2 1 35412

When the opening process has been successfully


completed, the information window "Rapid opening is
35402
terminated" is displayed.

Rapid opening
is
terminated.

35413

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.13


Commander Control 2000

Resetting rapid opening:


Briefly press the Setup + or key (3).

The previous settings for the threshing and separator


concaves will be restored.

Error message:
Interruption of rapid opening is indicated by the "Error"
window:

Error
Cal Diag Setup Rapid opening not
complete.
Engine fault!

35414

Possible causes of failure:


3 Clogging/fouling by threshed crop.
Servo drives not running smoothly.
Switch off the ignition. Remedy the fault and repeat the
calibration procedure. If the error message is displayed
35402
again, call a specialist workshop.

7.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

Sieve adjustment
The top and bottom sieves are adjusted in a single
window.

Activating sieve adjustment:


Press key (2) briefly twice.

4 3 2 1

CAUTION
35402 35429
The servomotors are moving parts.

The "Set clearances" window is displayed.


The sieve clearances are set in millimetres, with a range
Set clearances
of 1 to 14 mm.

Setting the clearances:


Top sieve Cal keys (4)
Bottom sieve Setup keys (3)

Saving values:
Press key (2). The adjustment process is started, and
then the main menu appears (if the gap has been
reduced, the sieves are first closed further before being
driven outwards to the new setting).
Cal Diag Setup

In the absence of any input for a period of more


than 10 seconds, the system automatically
returns to the main screen. In this case, any
settings previously entered will not be saved.

4 3 2 1 To quit the menu without saving the values,


press key (1).

35402 35415

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.15


Commander Control 2000

Calibration

All calibrations are carried out in the factory


before delivery.

Recalibration is necessary e.g. after:


Fitting other sieves
Changing the mechanical basic setting
Replacing servomotors
Reinstalling software

After changing the sieves several times, check


the sieve setting and if necessary calibrate.
Recommendation: carry out a sieve calibration
at least once a year.
Cal Diag Setup
To open the calibration menu:

Hold down the Cal + and keys (1)


simultaneously for 3 seconds.

1
CAUTION
The servomotors move during the calibration
processes.
35402

The "Calibration menu" is displayed.


Selecting the function:
Calibration menu
Mark the line of the desired function with the Diag +
Sieves
Sieves and keys (2).
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances Open the selected function with the Setup + or
keys (3).
The calibration menu of the selected function is
displayed.

Cal Diag Setup


The Calibration menu or any specific calibration
menu can be closed at any time by pressing the
Cal + and keys (1) simultaneously. Any
calibration that has started will be aborted.

In the absence of any input for a period of more


than 10 seconds, the system automatically
returns to the main screen. In this case, any
1 settings previously entered will not be saved.
2 3

35402 35415

7.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000
Calibrating sieve adjustment
(Electric sieve adjustment optional)
1 2 3
CAUTION
Park the combine and secure it against
rolling.
The servomotors move during calibration.

Preconditions:
The basic sieve setting must be correct.
The engine must be switched off with the ignition on.
4 5 The sieve box light must be switched on with button
(3).
33992
The sieves must be cleaned.

Calibration menu
Always make sure that the louvres of the left and
right-hand sieve are opened the same distance.
If necessary, slightly modify the basic setting.
Sieves
Sieves 6 Calibration:
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates Hold down the Cal + and keys (1)
Concave clearances simultaneously for 3 seconds.
The "Calibration" (6) menu is displayed

In the "Calibration menu", select "Sieves"


(with the Diag + and keys).

Sieve adj. calib. Press the Setup + or keys.


Calib. Procedure
1.Open sieves
The "Sieve adj. calib." window (7) appears.
2.Close sieves to 14 mm
position and
both keys.
press 7 Top sieve calibration:
3.Close sieves to 0 mm*
position and press Fully open the top sieve with key (1).
both keys. Close the top sieve with key (2) until the sieve
35417
aperture is 14 mm.
Hold down keys (1) and (2) simultaneously for at least
1 second.
Sieve adj. calib. Fully close the top sieve with key (2),
Top sieve and then open approx. 0.5 1 mm.
Potentiometer 2.02V Hold down keys (1) and (2) simultaneously for at least
Cal. min.
Cal. max.
2.02V
6.96V
8 1 second.

The calibration values of the top sieve appear in


the window (8).

Bottom sieve calibration:


35418
Fully open the bottom sieve with key (4).
Close the top sieve with key (5) until the sieve
Sieve adj. calib. aperture is 14 mm.
Top sieve Hold down keys (4) and (5) simultaneously for at least
Potentiometer 2.02V 1 second.
Cal. min. 2.02V Fully close the bottom sieve with key (5),
Cal. max. 6.96V
and then open approx. 0.5 1 mm.
Bottom sieve
Potentiometer 2.45V Hold down keys (4) and (5) simultaneously for at least
Cal. min. 2.45V 1 second.
9

Cal. max. 6.21V
35419
The calibration values of the top sieve appear in
the window (9).

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.17


Commander Control 2000

Back to main screen:


Press keys Cal + and simultaneously.

Checking the settings:


Set the sieve aperture successively to 4, 8 and 12 mm
and check.

In the event of any deviations, repeat the basic


setup (see section on the "Threshing Section")
and calibration.

Cal Diag Setup

35429 35402

7.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

Calibrating the straw guide plate

CAUTION
The servomotors move during calibration.

Preconditions:
Calibration menu
1 The engine must be switched off, with the ignition on.

Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
2 Calibration:
Concave clearances Hold down the Cal + and keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
The "Calibration menu" (1) is displayed.

In the Calibration Menu, select "Straw guide" (2)


Str. guide calib. (with the Diag + and keys).
Calibrate
Press the Setup + or keys.

3
The "Str. guide calib." window (3) is displayed.
The adjusting motor is automatically driven to the
two end positions, and the result is evaluated.

35420

Str. guide calib.


Calib.: successful

Potentiometer 2.27V
Cal. min. 2.29V 4 After successful calibration, the message "Calib.:
successful" is displayed in the window with the
Cal. max. 5.70V
average values (4).

35421


Str. guide calib. If calibration is unsuccessful, the message
Cal.: Error 5 "Cal.: Error" is displayed in the window (5).

Possible causes of error:


Clogging/fouling with straw
Servomotor not running smoothly.
Switch off the ignition and remedy the fault, and
35422
then repeat the calibration procedure. If the error
message appears again, have the machine
inspected by a specialist workshop.

Back to the main screen:


Press keys Cal + and simultaneously.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.19


Commander Control 2000

Calibrating the spreader plates


1.1 1
Preconditions:
The engine must be switched off, with the ignition on.

Calibration:
3 Hold down the Cal + and keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
The "Calibration menu" (4) is displayed.

2 1.2 35379
In the Calibration Menu, select "Spreader plates" (5)
(with the Diag + and keys).

Press the Setup + or keys.


Calibration menu
4
Sieves
Straw guide plate The "Spreader calib." window (6) is displayed.
Spreader plates
Concave clearances
5 Drive the adjusting motor to the two end positions with
key (1):
Key (1.1): drive the straw spreader plates to the right
as far as they will go and then check that the straw
guide plates are in the end position.
Key (1.2): drive the spreader plates to the left as far
Spreader plate calib. as they will go and then check that the straw guide
Drive the motor to both plates are in the end position.
end positions and press
key.
6 Press the Setup + or key.

35423

Spreader plate calib.


Calib.: successful

Potentiometer 0.15V
Cal. min. 0.14V 7 After successful calibration, the message "Calib.:
successful" is displayed in the window with the
Cal. max. 6.43V
average values (7).

35424

Back to the main screen:


Press keys Cal + and simultaneously.

7.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

Calibrating the concave clearances

Preconditions:
The engine must be switched off, with the ignition on.
The basic mechanical basic must be correct.

Calibration menu
1 CAUTION
The servomotors move during calibration.
Sieves
Straw guide plate
Spreader plates
Concave clearances 2 Calibration:
Hold down the Cal + and keys simultaneously
for 3 seconds.
The "Calibration menu" (1) is displayed.

Set clearances In the Calibration Menu, select "Conc. clearances" (2)


(with the Diag + and keys).

Press the Setup + or keys.


3
Calibration starts automatically. The servomotors
are driven to the end positions, and the result is
evaluated. The calibration process can be
35403 monitored with the clearance indicators in the
"Set clearances" menu (3).

Set clearances

Calibration of
concv. clearance
4 After successful calibration, the information
window (4) is displayed.
successful!

35421

Set clearances If calibration is unsuccessful, the error message


is displayed (5).

Error Possible causes of error:


Calibration of 5 Clogging/fouling by threshed crop.
concv. clearance Servomotors not running smoothly.
has failed!
Switch off the ignition and remedy the fault, and
then repeat the calibration procedure. If the error
35422
message appears again, have the machine
inspected by a specialist workshop.

Back to the main screen:


Press keys Cal + and simultaneously.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.21


Commander Control 2000

Error messages and warnings


Error messages and warnings appear in the form of a
window on top of the existing display.
The Commander Control handles error messages as
follows:

When an error occurs, a message appears on the


display. At the same time, an audible signal is sounded
for 2.5 to 5 seconds.
The message disappears when:
the cause of the error is no longer present
the message is acknowledged by pressing a key
(except for the warnings "Engine speed/Engine oil
temperature too high").
If more than one incident requiring a message occurs,
the incident with the highest priority is displayed.
The individual messages are listed in descending order of
priority in the list that follows.
Messages are displayed as Warnings or Errors.

Example "Warning":
"Engine speed too fast"
This message:
Warning has the highest priority and appears when the engine
speed rises above 2900 rpm.
Engine speed cannot be cancelled by pressing a key.
automatically disappears when the engine speed
too high!
drops back below 2800 rpm.

When driving downhill, brake and shift down a


gear.

35427

Example "Error":
"Overload in Command. Control pot supply"
This message:
Error appears when the 5 V potentiometer supply falls below
4.5 V due to overload.
Overload in
Command.Control pot Switch the ignition off and on again. If the error
message appears again, call a specialist
supply! workshop (servomotors not functioning, possible
short circuit).

35428

7.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

List of warning and error messages


Message text Type* Description/Cause Remedy
Engine speed too high W has top priority if the engine speed rises above When driving downhill, brake and
2900 rpm. shift down a gear.
cannot be cancelled; automatically
disappears when the engine speed falls below
2800 rpm.

Engine oil temperature W appears when the engine oil temperature Reduce engine load.
is too high switch is closed. Allow the engine to idle.
cannot be cancelled; automatically disappears Check/remove any fouling
when the engine oil temperature drops. of the radiator.

Overload in E appears when the 5 V potentiometer supply Switch the ignition off and on
Command.Control falls below 4.5 V due to overload. again. If the message appears
pot supply again, call a specialist workshop
(servomotors not functioning,
possible short circuit).

Engine speed too low W appears when the engine speed falls below Reduce engine load.
the value set in the Setup menu during one Set a lower warning limit.
second.

Chopper speed too slow W appears when chopper speed falls below Reduce load.
1200 rpm for one second at nominal engine
speed.
drive belt is slipping. Check drive/belt tension.

Ret. elevator speed W appears when the speed of the returns Reduce load.
too slow elevator falls below the limit set in the Speed
Monitor menu for one second.
drive belt is slipping. Check drive/belt tension.

Straw walker speed W appears when the speed of the straw walker Reduce load.
too slow shaft falls below the limit set in the Speed Set lower warning limit.
Monitor menu for one second.
drive belt is slipping. Check drive/belt tension.

Delivery auger speed W appears when the speed of the grain tank Reduce load.
too slow delivery auger falls below the limit set in the Set lower warning limit.
Speed Monitor menu for one second.
drive belt is slipping. Check drive/belt tension.

The grain tank cover W appears when the grain tank extension is Retract grain tank extension
is extended extended, with the main work switch off and
the ground travel speed is more than 2.0 km/h.
if the grain tank cover is opened. Close grain tank cover

Coolant level too low W Occurs when the amount of coolant in the Refill coolant, check system for
expansion tank is too low. leaks.

* W = Warning E = Error

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.23


Commander Control 2000

Message text Type* Description/Cause Remedy


Adjusting motor, E appears in the event of adjusting motor Switch the ignition off and on,
concave, rear malfunction for the rear concave clearance. and try again.
Possible causes:
clogging of threshing section Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect Check the adjusting
mechanism.
Fuse F50 faulty Check the fuse and relay, and
Relay K60, K81 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical system faulty Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Adjusting motor, E appare in caso di malfunzionamento del Switch the ignition off and on,
concave, front motore di regolazione per la distanza and try again.
controbattitore dietro. Possibili cause:
clogging of threshing section Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect Check the adjusting
mechanism.
Fuse F49faulty Check the fuse and relay, and
Relay K18, K39 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical system faulty Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Adjusting motor, E appare in caso di malfunzionamento del Switch the ignition off and on,
turbo separator motore di regolazione per la distanza del and try again.
battitore di separazione. Possibili cause:
clogging of threshing section Clear the blockage.
mechanical defect Check the adjusting
mechanism.
Fuse F51 faulty Check the fuse and relay, and
Relay K19, K49 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical system faulty Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Grain tank pipe, W appears when the grain tank pipe is swivelled Swivel the grain tank pipe
swivelled in out, the main work switch is switched off, and inwards.
the travel speed is above 2.0 km/h.
Proximity switch faulty Check the proximity switch and
replace if necessary.

Handbrake applied W appears when the handbrake is applied and Release handbrake.
the travel speed is above 2.0 km/h.
switch faulty. Check the switch, and replace
if necessary.

* W = Warning E = Error

7.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Commander Control 2000

Message text Type* Description/Cause Remedy

Sieve adjusting is not E appears when electric sieve adjustment is set Switch the ignition off and on,
addressable in Setup, but the relevant electronic module and try again.
cannot be accessed via the CAN bus (only for
units with electric sieve adjustment).

Fuse F57 faulty. Check the fuse, and replace if


necessary.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Straw guide is not E appears when electric straw guide plate Switch the ignition off and on,
addressable adjustment is set in Setup, but the relevant and try again.
electronic module cannot be accessed via the
CAN bus (only for units with electric straw
guide plate adjustment).

Fuse F56 faulty. Check the fuse, and replace if


necessary.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Spreader plates are not E appears when electric spreader adjustment is Switch the ignition off and on,
addressable set in Setup, but the relevant electronic and try again.
module cannot be accessed via the CAN bus
(optional equipment).

Fuse F55 faulty. Check the fuse, and replace if


necessary.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

* W = Warning E = Error

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7.25


Commander Control 2000

Message text Type* Description/Cause Remedy


Straw guide adjusting E appears in the event of malfunction of the Switch the ignition off and on,
motor is faulty adjusting motor for the straw guide plate. and try again.
Clogging/fouling Clear the blockage/fouling.
Mechanical fault Check the adjusting mechanism.
Fuse F13 faulty Check the fuse and relays, and
Relays K16, K37 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical fault Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Top sieve adjusting E appears in the event of malfunction of the Switch the ignition off and on,
motor is faulty. adjusting motor for the top sieves (optional and try again.
equipment).
Mechanical fault Check the adjusting mechanism.
Fuse F52 faulty Check the fuse and relays, and
Relays K20, K41 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical fault Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

Bottom sieve adjusting E appears in the event of malfunction of the Switch the ignition off and on,
motor is faulty. adjusting motor for the bottom sieves and try again.
(optional equipment).
Mechanical fault Check the adjusting mechanism.
Fuse F53 faulty Check the fuse and relays, and
Relays K62, K83 faulty replace if necessary.
Electrical fault Check the electrical
connections.
If the fault cannot be remedied,
call a specialist workshop.

* W = Warning E = Error

7.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control

Chapter 8

Electronic Cutting Table Control (EMR-D)

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.1


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Notes

8.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Principle of operation and function
of the electronic cutting table control
The calibration of the machine with the desired front
Two versions of the electronic cutting table control
EMR-D are available: attachment is done before the initial commissioning of
the electronic cutting mechanism control (see section
1. Level control (series equipment) for controlling calibration). During this process
the ground contact pressure and cutting height the angle of inclination of the feed passage is
This version is recommended in particular for front determined when the front attachment rests on
attachments with a small to medium working width level ground
and for level surfaces. the sensors on the sensing plates are adjusted and
the weight of the front attachment is determined.
2. AutoControl (optional): closed-loop control These data are saved in the control unit.
system for contact pressure, cutting height and
ground clearance
This version is recommended for front attachments The required operating mode is then set on the
with a medium to large working width. operating unit when working with the machine. The
electronic cutting table control is activated by pressing
the button on the CommanderStick. A setting
The level control comprises the following corresponding to the prevailing harvest conditions can
components: be set on the operating unit. The resultant control can
be overridden by hand at any time (e.g. in the
Power supply presence of obstacles, at the edge of the field, etc.).
EMR-D control unit This deactivates the automatic control until the
Operating unit Automatic button is pressed again on the
Operating functions in the CommanderStick CommanderStick.
(Automatic, Raise/Lower front attachment)
For driving on public roads or other non-operational
Position sensor in the conveyor channel
transport, the front attachment must be raised, the
Pressure sensor, solenoid valve and accumulator master switch for the hydraulic functions must be
in the hydraulic system (on the drive axle) switched off and the mode selector switch on the
A sensor controlled via a sensing plate in the control unit must be set to the transport position. On
middle of the front attachment raising the front attachment, it is securely held in the
Proportional-action valve to raise/lower the front raised position. Any vibrations caused by irregular
attachment surfaces are damped. All other hydraulic functions are
disabled.

AutoControl includes the following components in


addition to the level control: Note the statutory regulations when
Control unit for the transverse angle driving on public roads!
Hydraulic cylinder for the transverse angle
Two additional sensors mounted on the outside
right and left of the front attachment
Additional control functions on the
CommanderStick
Swing frame
Proportional-action valve for the transverse angle

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.3


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1

5
2

4 3

33918

19 12
17

10 13

18 11 15

20 14

16

32504/1

8.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Operating elements
Layout of the control unit for EMR-D self-levelling (basic variant) and AutoControl (variant with lateral tilt
adjustment, optional):

Function
1 Mode selector
1.1 Transport position, Calibration
1.2 Cutting height setpoint
1.3 Ground contact pressure control (with transverse angle control in the AutoControl version)
1.4 Distance control (with transverse angle control in the AutoControl version)
2 Overstroke button
3 Ground contact pressure selector
4 Cutting height selector
5 Diagnostic indicator (red LED)
6 Status indicator (lights up in Automatic mode) (green LED)

Controls on the CommanderStick:

Key Function
10 Raise front attachment Normal High speed

11 Lower front attachment Normal High speed

12 Raise reel

13 Lower reel

14 Swivel front attachment, left side down

15 Swivel front attachment, right side down

16 Automatic EMRD

17 Retract reel

18 Advance reel

19 Cutting angle forward

20 Cutting angle back

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.5


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1

5
2

4 3

33918

19 12
17

10 13

18 11 15

20 14

16

32504/1

8.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Quick guide
5. Distance control 1.4
1. Prerequisites for practical use
The ground contours are detected by sensing plates
Front attachment has been fitted, the wiring
and the front attachment kept at a constant distance
connected and the system calibrated.
from the ground.
The main work switch and the threshing clutch The version equipped with "level control can only
must be engaged. respond to unevenness of the ground in driving
Set mode selector to the required position and direction. The transverse angle cannot be controlled.
press "Automatic" button. Both the transverse angle and the distance from the
The required setpoint is set via the corresponding ground in the presence of longitudinal and transverse
rotary control. bumps are compensated by the "AutoControl"
The green status indicator lights up when control is version.
active.
Safety regulations must be observed!
The automatic system is deactivated for manual
adjustments and must be reactivated.

2. Transport 1.1

Set the mode selector to transport position and raise


the front attachment to the required position via push-
button (10). Switch off the main work switch.

3. Cutting height setpoint 1.2

The EMR-D operates purely as a position control in


this mode. The position of the front attachment relative
to the machine is determined and adjusted by the
position sensor on the conveyor channel.

4. Ground contact pressure control 1.3

In this operating mode, a pressure controller


processes the signals received from the pressure
sensor on the drive axle. The front attachment only
adjusts to ground contours in the direction of travel
with the "Level control" version. It adjusts to all
ground contours with the "AutoControl" version.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.7


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.1 1

5
2

4 3

33918

19
20

10 21
33938

11

16

32504/1

8.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Operation
Overstroke button (2)
The "EMR-D" Electronic Cutting Table Control has a
built-in diagnostic system and is self-monitoring. On pressing the button, the crop elevator is raised to
the mechanical end stop.
If the system is in good working order, the green status
indicator (6) and diagnosis indicator (5) on the control
unit will light up briefly (approx. 1 second) after
switching on the ignition for self-monitoring purposes Operating modes
and will then go out.
Transport position (1.1)
Flashing sequences of the red diagnosis light indicate Switch the mode selector switch (1) to the transport
faults in the system. These faults are described in the position (1.1).
Troubleshooting section.
The front attachment can be raised or lowered with
The Electronic Cutting Table Control will only function if the "Raise front attachment" (10) and "Lower front
the following criteria are met: attachment" (11) buttons. When no push-button is
activated, a position controller is keeping the feed
The front attachment is mounted and electrically
passage at the current hoisting height. An active
connected.
vibration damping system is constantly active in
The system is calibrated before being started up "Transport" mode, even if the threshing clutch is not
for the first time (see section on Calibration). engaged. This damping system prevents valve leaks.
The main work switch (21) is switched on.
switch lit. Always keep a safe distance from the
The threshing section is engaged. front attachment.
In Transport position, the front attachment
automatically adjusts its position.
To work with the Electronic Cutting Table Control, the
mode selector switch (1) must be switched to the The "Automatic" button (16) is disabled in Transport
desired position. Press the "Automatic" button (16) to mode.
activate EMR-D. Set the desired setting with the
relevant rotary knobs (3) or (4). These settings can When driving on public roads, the operating functions
also be changed while the machine is in operation if must be disabled. Therefore, after the crop elevator
required. has been raised to the desired position, the main work
switch (21) must be switched off when driving on

When the selector switch (1) is set to a


different mode, the automatic system is
public roads.

Switch off the main work switch (21)


deactivated. To activate the desired mode,
when driving on public roads.
the "Automatic" button (16) must be pressed
again.

Cutting angle adjustment


This function is only available on machines with
hydraulic cutting angle adjustment.
Manual adjustment:
Button (19) Cutting angle forward
Button (20) Cutting angle back

Automatic cutting angle adjustment (only with


"Balance" option):
Press keys (19) and (20) simultaneously
Automatic cutting angle control ON
Press keys (19) and (20) simultaneously again
Automatic cutting angle control OFF

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.9


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.2 1

33918

10 21
33938

14
11
15
16

32504/1

8.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Cutting height setpoint (1.2) The automatic control can be overridden and thus
deactivated at any time by pressing one of the push-
The following prerequisites must be met in order to
buttons "Raise front attachment" (10), "Lower front
work with cutting height setpoint:
attachment" (11), "Swivel right" (14) or "Swivel left"
(15). The previously set control values are restored by
The front attachment must be mounted and
pressing the "Automatic" button (16) again.
electrically connected.
The system must be calibrated before being Any faults (e.g. cable breakage) will be displayed by
started up for the first time (see section on the diagnosis indicator (5) in the control unit (see
Calibration). section on diagnostics).
The main work switch (21) must be switched on.
The threshing section must be engaged. An emergency system is started by the control unit if
The mode selector switch (1) must be switched to the position signal is defective. In such a case, the
cutting height control (1.2). front attachment can be moved to its mechanical stops
via the push-buttons.

The EMR-D operates purely as a position control in


this mode. The position of the front attachment relative
to the machine is measured by position sensors on the
conveyor channel. The sensing plate sensors are
disregarded.

The front attachment can be raised or lowered with


the "Raise front attachment" (10) and "Lower front
attachment" (11) buttons. The front attachment can be
pivoted to the left or right with the "Pivot front
attachment" buttons (14) and (15). These operating
buttons have top priority.

Press the Automatic button (16) to activate the load


control at the specified "cutting height" set on the
control unit. The green status indicator LED (6)
remains constantly lit to indicate that this setpoint is
active and that the control is enabled at the specified
setpoint level. The lateral tilt angle set with keys (14)
and (15) remains unchanged.

The required cutting height can be infinitely varied via


the cutting height selection control (4) on the operating
unit. The front attachment is raised by turning the
control clockwise and lowered by turning it
anticlockwise. This setpoint covers approx. 50 % of the
cylinder stroke. The remainder can be covered via the
push-buttons.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.11


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.3 1

33918

21
33938

16

32504/1

8.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Ground contact pressure control (1.3) The front attachment is lowered to the ground under
position control as soon as the "Automatic" button (16)
The following prerequisites must be met in order to
is pressed. The green status indicator (6) flashes
use the ground contact pressure control:
rapidly at the same time. The front attachment then
automatically switches over to pressure control. The
Front attachment has been fitted and the electrical
green status indicator (6) lights up continuously to
connections made.
indicate that ground contact pressure control is
The system must have been calibrated on the activated.
currently mounted front attachment (see section on
Calibration). The required ground contact pressure of the front
The main work switch (21) must be switched on. attachment can be set via the Ground contact
The threshing section has been engaged. pressure selector (3) on the operating unit. The
Mode selector (1) has been set to ground contact attachment is relieved when the control is turned
pressure control (1.3). clockwise; the contact pressure is increased when the
control is turned anticlockwise.

In this operating mode, a pressure controller In the case of the "Level control" version, the front
processes the signals received from a pressure attachment only adjusts to ground contours in the
sensor on the drive axle. direction of travel. With the "AutoControl" version, it
adjusts to ground contours in the direction of travel
In the "Level control" version, one sensing plate with and also at right angles to the direction of travel.
sensor is installed under the front attachment. If the
front attachment lifts off the ground, this is detected by
the sensor and can be counteracted if necessary Ground contact pressure control mode is only
effective when the front attachment is
when the ground contact pressure control is active. connected and should only be selected there.

There are three sensing plates with sensor installed


under the front attachment in the "AutoControl"
version. The two outer sensors are used to control the
transverse angle. They also prevent the front
attachment from lifting off the ground. The middle
sensing plate is ineffective in this case.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.13


Electronic Cutting Table Control

1.4 1

33918

10 21
33938

15

11
14
16

32504/1

8.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Distance control (1.4) The required distance between front attachment and
ground can be set on the operating unit via the
The ground contours are scanned by sensing plates
"Cutting height selector" (4). The front attachment is
installed on the front attachment. A distance controller
raised when the control is turned clockwise and
ensures that the front attachment is always kept at a
lowered when control (4) is turned anticlockwise. The
constant distance from the ground in this mode. This
automatic control can be overridden and thus disabled
distance can be set on the controller.
any time by actuating the keys "lift front attachment
(10) or "lower front attachment (11). The previously
Only one sensing plate with sensor is installed under
set control values are restored when the "Automatic"
the front attachment for the "Level control" version.
button (16) is pressed again.
This means that the control can only respond to
uneven ground conditions under that one sensing
plate. The transverse angle cannot be controlled.

Three sensing plates with sensors are installed under Connection and removal of front
the front attachment for the "AutoControl" version. attachments
Both the transverse angle and the distance from the
ground are controlled via the two outer sensors. The
middle sensing plate is used to support vertical The engine must be switched off and the
distance control in the presence of bumps. ignition key removed before connecting or
disconnecting the universal joint shaft
The following prerequisites must be met in order to and before making or breaking electrical
use the distance control: or hydraulic connections b etween
machine and front attachment.
Front attachment has been connected and the
electrical connections made. Connection: Hook up front attachment, make
The system must be calibrated before being mechanical, electrical and hydraulic
connections.
started up for the first time (see section on
Calibration).
The lifting cylinder only extends as far as the
The main work switch (21) must be switched on. electrical stop when the push-button "Raise front
The threshing section has been engaged. attachment" (10) is pressed. For lifting or lowering on
Operation mode selector switch (1) is switched to the transport cart overstroke key (2) can be used. This
automatic clearance control (1.4). raises the front attachment beyond the electrical stop,
until it reaches the mechanical stop. The overstroke
button (2) may only be pressed briefly.
Distance control is enabled with the setpoint preset on
the operating unit when the "Automatic" button (16) is Removal: Lower the front attachment to the
pressed. The green status indicator lights up ground and break the hydraulic,
constantly to show that this setpoint is active and that electrical and mechanical connections.
the control has been enabled for the setpoint level Place the front attachment on the
specified there. The lateral angle set via push-buttons transport trolley and unhook it.
(14) and (15) is not maintained.
Particular care must be taken when
connecting and removing front
attachments (cutting table, etc.): high risk
of injury!

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.15


Electronic Cutting Table Control

31470

8.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Calibration Second calibration step
The system must be calibrated or recalibrated when To determine and save the weight of the front
starting up for the first time, using new tyres, changing attachment.
front attachment or changing the weight of the front
attachment and when mounting an additional hydraulic Required:
cylinder for the crop elevator. Three calibration Start engine and switch on the main work switch.
operations are required. These three calibration steps Switch the mode selector switch to the Transport
must be carried out on a surface that is as flat and position (calibrate).
smooth as possible.
Move front attachment at least 100 mm (raise or

The front attachment must be raised or


lowered at least 100 mm before each
lower) and then lower it completely.
Front attachment must be just off the ground
calibration (to release the electric lock). (50 ... 100 mm).
Simultaneously press the buttons for "Lower front
If you make a mistake during calibration, switch off the
attachment" and "Raise front attachment" and hold
engine and restart the calibration procedure from the
them for at least 7 seconds.
beginning.
diagnostic indicator flashes eight times to
confirm calibration.

First calibration step The second calibration process is now complete.


To determine and save the position of the conveyor
channel when the front attachment is placed on the
ground and to register the sensor values on the Third calibration step
sensing plates. Determine and store the weight of the front attachment
with the front attachment raised high, just before the
Condition: end stop.
Front attachment and combine harvester must be
standing on level ground. Required:
Skids and sensing plates must be resting on the After carrying out the first and second steps.
ground. If the weight of the front attachment has changed.
Required:
After changing tyres, after sinking deeply into soft Performance:
ground, when using a different front attachment Start engine and switch on the main work switch.
(different basic setting of the sensing plate sensors Switch the mode selector switch to Transport
and the conveyor channel may be at a different
position (Calibration).
angle to the ground).
Move (raise or lower) the front attachment at least
Performance:
100 mm, and then raise it.
Start engine and switch on the main work switch.
Raise the front attachment to just before its end
Switch the mode selector switch to the Transport stop
position (calibrate).
Simultaneously press the push-buttons "Auto" and
Move front attachment at least 100 mm (raise or hold them for at least 7 seconds.
lower) and then lower it completely. diagnostic indicator flashes twelve times to
Front attachment must be resting on the ground. confirm calibration.
Simultaneously press the buttons for "Lower front
attachment" and "Automatic" and hold them for at The third calibration process is now complete.
least 7 seconds.
The status indicator flashes 5 times to confirm
calibration.

The first calibration step is complete.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.17


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Troubleshooting
The system is constantly monitored for faults by the
EMR-D control unit. Faults are classified in three
categories. The electronic cutting table control EMR-D
responds in different ways, depending on the fault class
concerned.

Reaction to faults:
Serious faults:
Control is halted and interlocked.
Relay is deenergized (to protect the output stage).

Note for driver:


The red diagnosis LED (5) emits the error code. Fault
output is terminated on restarting automatic control.
5
To resume control:
Remedy fault and switch on ignition.
Front attachment can only be raised and lowered by
manual operation of the control valves.

Moderate faults:
33918 Control is halted and interlocked.
It may be possible to continue operation in a mode not
affected by the fault.
The EMR-D remains functional in "Transport" position.

Note for driver:


The red diagnosis LED (5) emits the error code.

To resume control:
Remedy fault and reset the EMR-D by pressing the
push-buttons "Raise front attachment" and "Lower
front attachment".
If a fault is remedied, the red diagnosis LED (5) does
not go out until the keys are pressed. However, if it
has already started emitting a code number it will
complete the code.

Minor faults:
Control is continued.
Note for driver:
The red diagnosis LED (5) emits the error code.

If the fault has been remedied, the diagnostic indicator


goes out when the push-buttons are pressed.
However, the output of code numbers is completed once
in progress.

8.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Fault codes Several faults
Faults can be localized and identified with the aid of the list If several faults occur, the other fault codes are
of fault codes. The fault codes and corresponding indicated after the long break. When all faults have
descriptions can be found on the following pages. The been signalled, they
codes are arranged in order of serious faults, moderate are repeated by the diagnostic indicator until the faults
faults and minor faults. The message for each fault is have been remedied.
made up of two strings of bleeps. The first string of bleeps
indicates the nature of the fault and represents the tens Examples: Fault 22 and fault 35
digit in the fault code.
Two bleeps short break two bleeps long break
First string of bleeps: three bleeps short break five bleeps long
break... REPEAT
One bleep () 10 Serious fault
Two bleeps () 20 Moderate fault - - - - - - -- -- - -
Three bleeps () 30 Minor fault - -- - - - - - -- -
Fault 22 and fault 35
The second string of bleeps follows after a short pause
and classifies the nature and/or severity of the fault. It
represents the ones digit in the fault code.
Indication of the fault code always starts at
the beginning of the fault message and is
then repeated when the ignition is switched
The fault code is consequently made up of the number of off and on again.
bleeps in the first string representing the tens digit and the
number of bleeps in the second string as the ones digit.
The corresponding fault description can then be located in
the list with the aid of this fault number.

The fault is repeatedly signalled by the diagnostic indicator


until it has been remedied.

Examples: Fault 22

Fault 22, for example, is indicated if a break occurs in


the signal line to the setpoint potentiometer for the
cutting height.

Two bleeps short break two bleeps long


break.. REPEAT

- - - - - - -- - - - - -
- - - Fault 22

Examples: Fault 35

(Battery voltage too low):

Three bleeps short break five bleeps long


break... REPEAT

- -- - - - --
- Fault 35

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.19


Electronic Cutting Table Control
List of fault codes
Serious faults

Fault code Brief description Pin No. Description of fault

11 Output stage RAISE 37 Output stage for solenoid valve "Raise front
attachment" is defective or connection between
solenoid valve Raise/Lower and pin 35 on EMR-D
control unit has been interrupted.

12 Output stage LOWER 19 Output stage for solenoid valve "Lower front
attachment" is defective or connection between
solenoid valve Raise/Lower and pin 35 on EMR-D
control unit has been interrupted.

13 Short-circuit 35 The current measured at pin 35 is too high.


Short-circuit between pin 19 and pin 35 or between
pins 37 and 35 (short-circuiting of solenoid is also
possible).

14 Wire break 35 No current is measured at pin 35 although the


solenoids are energized.
Possibly wire break in the feed lines to the
solenoids (pins 19, 37 or 35).
Possibly defect in solenoids.
Possibly no battery voltage present at pin 29 (fuse
defective).
Control box defective.

15 CommanderStick 9 Push-button signal not OK.


Raise/lower/high speed Push-button function RAISE, LOWER or
HIGH SPEED not OK.

16 Power supply 2 Power supply not OK.


20 9.5 V supply or ground connection not OK.

17 Battery 29 Battery voltage over 18 V.

18 Mode selector 21 Selector lever signal not OK.


Wire break or signal not connected.

8.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Moderate faults

Fault code Brief description Pin No. Description of fault

21 Position sensor 6 Position signal not OK.


Wire break or sensor not connected.
Possibly short-circuit or earth leakage fault.
Calibration of position sensor not OK.

22 Setpoint potentiometer 22 Signal from setpoint potentiometers not OK.


Wire break or potentiometer not connected.
"Cutting height"

23 Pressure sensor 8 Signal from pressure sensor not OK (only responds


when pressure control is set on selection switch).

24 Setpoint potentiometer 5 Signal from setpoint potentiometer not OK


"Ground contact (only responds when pressure control is set on
pressure" selection switch).

25 Push-button 14 Push-button "HIGH SPEED" is active although push


"HIGH SPEED" button "RAISE" or "LOWER" is not active.

2. Minor faults

Fault code Brief description Pin No. Description of fault

31 Sensing plate sensor, 26 Signal from right-hand sensor not OK.


right Wire break or sensor not connected.
Possibly short-circuit or earth leakage fault.
This fault can only be diagnosed if sensing plate
control is active, i.e. if the belt clutch for the
threshing section is engaged and "Distance control"
mode has been set.)

32 Sensing plate sensor, 7 Signal from left-hand sensor not OK.


left Wire break or sensor not connected.
Possibly short-circuit or earth leakage fault.

33 CommanderStick, 27 Push-button signal not OK or "SWIVEL RIGHT",


Swivel (right/left) "SWIVEL LEFT" or "AUTOMATIC" function defective.
and Automatic

35 Battery 29 Battery voltage too low (less than 12 V).

36 Defective valve or no Front attachment does not rise although engine is


oil pressure running and an active RAISE current is present at
pin 37 of the EMR-D box. No supply of hydraulic fluid
or valve jammed.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 8.21


Electronic Cutting Table Control
Notes

8.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Balance

Chapter 9

Balance

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 9.1


Balance
Balance Description
4 6 5 1 BALANCE 3 8
Brief description
AUTO
9
The purpose of the Balance control is to keep the
combine harvester in a horizontal position within certain
limits when driving on a slope. The machine is levelled
both laterally and longitudinally.
AUTO
Longitudinal levelling can be deactivated in special
8 situations.
7
2 NEUTRAL
If hydraulic cutting angle adjustment is installed, the
DEUTZ-FAHR 35395 control system can adjust the cutting angle of the cutting
table within a certain range so that the cutting table
remains parallel with the ground.

The Balance control is not operational until


the engine is running,
the charge control light is extinguished,
the main working switch is on and
the parking brake (handbrake) has been released.

Pos. Control element/indicator Function


1 Key LIFT - Machine is being lifted horizontally / automatic mode is deactivated
- Key (2) simultaneously pressed: Activation of dual-line control
- Key (7) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 0 s

2 Key LOWER - Machine is being lowered horizontally / automatic mode is deactivated


- Key (1) simultaneously pressed: Activation of dual-line control
- Key (7) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 1 s

3 Key TILT RIGHT - Machine is being tilted to the right / automatic mode is deactivated
- Key (4) simultaneously pressed: Activation of single-line controller**
- Key (7) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 3 s

4 Key TILT LEFT - Machine is being tilted to the left / automatic mode is deactivated
- Key (3) simultaneously pressed: Activation of single-line controller*
- Key (7) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 2 s

5 Key AUTO - Switching on automatic mode..


- Keep key (7) simultaneously pressed while switching on: Calibration mode on
- Key (1) simultaneously pressed: Slow position controller is being activated
- Key (2) simultaneously pressed: Fast position controller is being activated

6 LED AUTO Display automatic mode On/Off:


LED is constantly lighting: Fast position controller is activated
LED is flashing: Slow position controller is activated.

7 Key NEUTRAL - Causes the axle cylinder to travel into half extended position (keep pressed until
middle LED (8) is lighting / automatic mode is deactivated
- Keep key (5) simultaneously pressed while switching on: Calibration mode on
- Key (1) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 0 s
- Key (2) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 1 s
- Key (4) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 2 s
- Key (3) simultaneously pressed: Delay cutting angle controller 3 s

8 LEDs (10 pcs) Indication of axle cylinder position

9 LEDs AUTO key (4 pcs) are flashing if calibration mode is selected.

When single-line control is active, all LEDs are momentarily lighting while pressing the key (5) AUTO.

9.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Balance
Operation
Driving on roads
Prior to on-road driving the machine shall be
completely lowered.

Activate Balance for this purpose (activate engine and


working master switch, release parking brake) and lower
the machine completely by means of pressing the key
"LOWER (2) (both lower LEDs (8) are lighting).

Manual operation:
The machine can be moved into any required position via
the four yellow buttons ("LIFT" (1), "LOWER" (2), "TILT
4 6 5 1 RIGHT" (3) and "TILT LEFT" (4)) on the control unit. The
BALANCE 3 machine then remains in this position.
AUTO
9
Neutral position:
The "NEUTRAL" button (7) is used to set the machine to
a neutral middle position in which it remains parallel with
AUTO the ground. The button must be pressed until the
machine has reached its neutral middle position (the
8 middle LEDs (8) light up).
7 However, the machine does not adjust to the topological
2 NEUTRAL features in this case.
DEUTZ-FAHR 35395
CAUTION!
If the gear is engaged or the service brake is
activated, the combine harvester is moving
forward or backward in case of being lifted or
lowered by means of the Balance control.

Automatic mode:
Activate:
TPress "AUTO key (5).
LED "AUTO (6) is lighting. The machine is being held
in horizontal position through automatic correction.

Deactivate:
Press "LIFT key (1) or
"LOWER key (2) or
"TILT RIGHT key (3) or
"TILT LEFT key (4) or
Press "NEUTRAL key (7).

LED "AUTO (6) extinguishes. The machine is in


manual mode.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 9.3


Balance
Single-line and dual-line control:

4 3 Activation of single-line control (lateral tilt control):

The control by the longitudinal axle


(longitudinal control) is being deactivated.

Press the keys "TILT RIGHT (3) and "TILT LEFT


(4) simultaneously.
- The single-line control is activated.
Activate automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO
key (5).
35396 - Serving as a function indication all LEDs are
momentarily lighting when the automatic mode is
activated.

Activation of dual-line control


(Logitudinal and lateral tilt control):

The control by the longitudinal axle


(longitudinal control) is being reactivated.

1 2 Press the keys "LIFT (1) and "LOWER (2)


simultaneously.
- The dual-line control is activated.
Activate automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO
key (5).
- Serving as a function indication the LEDs are not
35397 lit when the automatic mode is activated.

Activation of position controller


4 6 5 1 BALANCE

9
3 8 The fast position controller is activated as
factory default and after each calibration.
AUTO

Activation of the slow position controller:


Press the keys "AUTO (5) and "LIFT (1)
AUTO simultaneously.
- Status indication: In automatic mode the LED
8 "AUTO (6) is flashing.
7
2 NEUTRAL
Activation of the fast position controller:
Press the keys "AUTO (5) and "LOWER (2)
DEUTZ-FAHR 35395
simultaneously.
- Status indication: In automatic mode the LED
"AUTO (6) is lighting continuously.

9.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 05.2005


Balance

Calibration of position controller

The calibration of the position controller shall


be carried out prior to adjusting the EMR-D.

Start the engine (charge warning indicator must be off).

Switch on the main work switch.

Park the combine harvester so that it is level in all


directions. Set Balance to "NEUTRAL" (press button
down until machine is in a horizontal position).

Put on the parking brake (handbrake).

Press and hold the buttons "AUTO" and


"NEUTRAL".
AUTO NEUTRAL
Release the parking brake (handbrake).

After 10 seconds the Balance is switching over to


calibration mode.
The four middle LEDs (9) flash.
One LED on the right and left light up
continuously.
The machine begins to move.
The Balance is in calibration mode.

Press "LIFT" continuously until the machine reaches


its upper dead centre.

Press "LOWER" continuously until the machine


reaches its bottom dead centre.

Press "LIFT", "LOWER", "TILT RIGHT" and "TILT


LEFT" to adjust the machine until it is absolutely
horizontal in all directions. Use a spirit level to
check the adjustment if necessary.

Bild 22

BALANCE

AUTO 9

AUTO

9 NEUTRAL

DEUTZ-FAHR Bild 23

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 05.2005 9.5


Balance
Briefly press "LIFT" and "LOWER" simultaneously.
4 6 5 1 BALANCE 3 8 The data is being saved.
AUTO
9
The calibration process is finished:
- The middle LEDs (9) light up. One LED (8) lights up
in the middle of the light bands on the right and left.
AUTO - Lateral and longitudinal levelling is active.
- Automatic mode is inactive.
8 - The fast position controller is activated, delay
7 cutting angle controller 0 s
2 NEUTRAL - The dual-line control is activated.

DEUTZ-FAHR 35395 If the machine was not absolutely horizontal


during calibration , it may move a few
centimetres when switching over between
AUTOMATIC and NEUTRAL.
The adjustment should be repeated if the
deviation is too large.

Operation of the automatic cutting angle


11 control
Machine requirements:
All electrical leads connected
10 All position encoders correctly installed and set

By factory default and after each calibration the


delay for the cutting angle controller is set to 0 s.

Automatic cutting angle control is active when the


Balance control is active and cutting angle control has
35398
been switched on by simultaneously pressing the buttons
"CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD" (11) and "CUTTING
ANGLE BACK" (10). Indication is done through control
lamp (12).
12
Cutting angle control is deactivated when the machine is
switched off or when the Balance control is deactivated
and must then be reactivated if required.

35430

9.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Balance
Manual operation:
2 Can be used immediately after starting the machine and
switching on the main working switch.
Otherwise deactivate automatic cutting angle control by
3 simultaneously pressing "CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD"
(2) and "CUTTING ANGLE BACK" (3). Indicator (12) is
off.
The cutting angle can be set as required via the buttons
"CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD" (2) and "CUTTING
ANGLE BACK" (3) on the multi-purpose lever.
1
Automatic operation:
35398 Release parking brake (handbrake).
Engage threshing section.
Set the EMR-D operating mode (pressure or position
control).
12 Press (1) to set automatic cutting table control to
Automatic.
Set required setpoint on EMR-D control.
Activate automatic cutting angle control by
simultaneously pressing "CUTTING ANGLE
FORWARD" (2) and "CUTTING ANGLE BACK" (3).
Indicator (12) lights up.
Set the machine to a neutral position on level ground.
Adjust the cutting table so that the earlifter skids are
parallel to the ground.
35430 Completely lower the machine and then completely
raise it again. When correctly adjusted and when fitted
with the recommended tyres, the earlifter skids remain
virtually parallel to the ground throughout the entire
adjustment process.
Correct the cutting table position or bearing pressure
again if necessary.

Indicator (4) flashes when the cutting table is disengaged


and automatic cutting table control (EMR-D) is switched
off. Cutting angle control remains active. The cutting
angle is also adjusted if the machine is adjusted via the
Balance control (e.g. for manoeuvering on a slope).

If the cutting angle is changed (e.g. when disengaging


the cutting table), the new value upon activation of the
automatic system is adopted as the new default. The
adjustment must be repeated.

Automatic cutting angle control must be


deactivated in order to lower the cutting
mechanism onto the transport cart!

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 9.7


Balance
Calibration / adjust delay for automatic
cutting angle control
10
Calibration of cutting angle control limit positions

11 Press the keys "CUTTING ANGLE FORWARD (10) and


"CUTTING ANGLE BACK (11) simultaneously and keep
pressed for at least 10 seconds.

The cutting angle adjustment drives to both end positions


and stores the values. During operation, the cylinders will
be electrically deactivated just before they reach the
35398 mechanical end position.

4 6 5 1 BALANCE 3 8 Adjusting the response delay of the cutting angle


9 controller
AUTO

It is recommended to work with a response delay


of 2 seconds.
AUTO
8 Delay in Press the keys
7 seconds simultaneously to select:
2 NEUTRAL
0 NEUTRAL and LIFT (7 and 1)
DEUTZ-FAHR 35395 1 NEUTRAL and LOWER (7 and 2)
2 NEUTRAL and TILT LEFT (7 and 4)
3 NEUTRAL and TILT RIGHT (7 and 3)

The selected setting will be memorized until the next


change is carried out.

9.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Checks Required Before Start-up

Chapter 10

Checks Required Before Start-up

307.7326.36 englisch (en) 02.2006 10.1


Checks Required Before Start-up
Checks required before daily use

In order to ensure that the combine harvester


is ready for its daily work and is safe for use in
traffic, the most important functions of the
combine harvester must be checked daily bid
for driving all working with it. Any faults which
are detected must be rectified.
For these tasks, please refer to the
Maintenance and Inspection Table and the
Lubrication Plan as well as to these Operating
Instructions.

30534 General roadworthiness of the combine harvester


and its fittings:
Check the lights
Check the turn signal indicators and brake
lights, hazard warning lights
Check the brakes
Check tyres for wear and correct air pressure
(visual inspection)
Check that the wheel nuts and wheel bolts are
tightened to the specified tightening torque;
retighten in accordance with specifications
Engine
30535 Check oil level with dipstick.
Check that the engine cooling system is full and
free of leaks (visual inspection).
Check the oil cooler for leaks (visual inspection).
Check the fuel system for proper fill level and for
leaks (visual inspection).
Remove dirt and crop residuals from the engine
compartment (especially at the turbocharger, fire
hazard!).

Inspection of the coolers:

3 1 - Open the closures (2) and (3) and swivel the


rotary sieve pan (1) outwards.

The engine must not be started when the


sieve pan is swivelled down, as the V-
2 belt of the sieve pan drive may thus be
damaged.

35382

10.2 307.7326.36 englisch (en) 02.2006


Checks Required Before Start-up
- Detach the condenser (7) and the fuel cooler (8)
6 7 and swivel down.
5 - Check hydraulic oil cooler (5), charge air cooler
(6), air conditioning condenser (7), fuel cooler (8)
and water cooler (10) for leaks (visual inspection).
1 Remove possible dirt accumulation.

8 The vanes must not be damaged or bent.


- Check whether the vacuum suction hose (4) for
10 the coolers is connected properly.
3 35383
- Remove possible dirt accumulations at (3) and
check whether the opening (3) of the vacuum
suction hose (4) is clear.

1
- Swivel in the condenser (7) and the fuel cooler (8)
and lock.
- Swivel in the rotary sieve pan (1) and close the
2 latch (2).
3

4
33993 Checking the hydraulic system:
Check the level in the hydraulic tank
Check for leaks (visual inspection)

General inspection operations/maintenance:


Check the brakes
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan
(lubrication intervals).
Check the attachments
Inspect and remedy any oil discharges and leaks
Check the fuel level of the fuel tank
Check the warning systems
33965 Check that the guards and protective devices are
fitted and in working order
Check the machine for any signs of crop wrap-
around and remedy wrap-around if necessary.
Check the tension of the drive belts and chains.

307.7326.36 englisch (en) 02.2006 10.3


Checks Required Before Start-up
Checks before starting up after maintenance and Check the engine:
repairs Check oil level
Check the general road safety of the PowerLiner Engine fixing
and additional equipment: Sealing (leaks)
Lights V-belt tension
Turn signal indicators and brake lights Warning systems
Hazard warning lights Clean the engine compartment
Brakes Fuel tank
Check tyres for wear and correct air Check the hydraulic system:
pressure (visual inspection) Check oil level
Check that the wheel nuts and wheel bolts Clean the oil cooler
are tightened to the specified tightening Sealing (leaks)
torque; retighten in accordance with
Check the drive units:
specifications.
Check oil level
Check the engine:
Adjust belt clutches
Check oil level
Belt and chain tension
Clean the engine compartment
Check the coolant level Check the settings of the threshing section

Check the hydraulic system: Check that the mechanical operating elements run
Check the hydraulic oil levels of the hydraulic smoothly and easily
systems for the forward/reverse drive and the
working machinery
Clean the oil cooler Check that all screwed fixings are secure

Check the warning systems Check that all guards and protective devices are
fitted and in working order

Check that all screwed fixings are secure


Lubricate the machine in accordance with the
lubrication plan (lubrication intervals)
Check that all guards and protective devices are
fitted and in working order

Check the general condition of the machine after


any previous damage

Make sure that no loose accessories, parts and


tools are left on or inside the machine.

Checks before starting up after storage


Remove all special preservation products.
Check the general road safety of the PowerLiner
and additional equipment:
Lights
Turn signal indicators and brake lights, hazard
warning lights
Brakes
Check tyres for wear and correct air pressure
(visual inspection)
Check that the wheel nuts and wheel bolts are
tightened to the specified tightening torque;
retighten in accordance with specifications.

10.4 307.7326.36 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport

Chapter 11

Driving and Transport

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.1


Driving and Transport

Safety instructions Never leave the combine harvester unattended


while the engine is still running.
Read the operating manual and ensure you are fully The combine harvester is fitted with two
familiar with all the operating elements before independent brake systems. For traffic safety
starting the combine harvester. reasons, it is imperative that both brake systems
undergo a thorough inspection at regular intervals.
Before setting out, check the road safety of the
This work must be performed in a specialised
machine.
workshop.
Before starting the engine, make sure that no gear
Always check that the brakes are functioning
is engaged and that all guards and protective
correctly before driving the machine.
devices are fitted and in operating position.
The brakes must be submitted to a thorough test at
Before starting the engine, make sure that no-one
regular intervals.
is inside the danger zone around the vehicle. Give
a warning signal (horn). Settings and repairs on the brake system may only
be carried out by authorised workshops or
Only start the engine from the driver's seat. The
recognised brake service stations.
engine must not be started by short-circuiting the
electric wires of the starter motor because Comply with the specified axle loads and gross
otherwise the machine may start moving vehicle weight.
immediately.
Adhere to the required tyre pressures when
Do not run the engine in an enclosed room ballasting the wheels.
danger of poisoning (toxic fumes).
The handling properties of the combine harvester
After switching off the engine, always turn the are influenced e.g. by the road surface and
ignition switch to position "0"and remove the attached equipment. You should therefore adapt
ignition key. your driving style to the terrain and surface
conditions. Take particular care when working and
Take care when handling fuel due to the increased
turning on slopes. Never declutch and change
fire risk. Never refill the fuel tank close to naked
gears on a slope.
flames or ignitable sparks. Never smoke while
refilling the fuel tank. The combine harvester has a rear wheel steering
system. Take account of the modified steering
Always switch off the engine and remove the
characteristics when driving.
ignition key before refilling the fuel tank. Do not
refill the fuel tank in enclosed rooms. Immediately
wipe up any spilt fuel. The combine harvester slews outwards
when cornering.
Never leave the driver's cab while the combine
harvester is moving.
Always fully lower the front attachments before
Always wait until the engine, gearbox and hydraulic leaving the combine.
oil have cooled down before carrying out
maintenance and repair work.

When leaving the combine, protect it against rolling


away (handbrake, wheel chocks, in gear). Switch
off the engine, remove the ignition key and lock the
cab. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition
key!

11.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Road driving Road driving

In case of on-road driving the grain tank The grain tank must always be empty
discharge pipe (1) must be swivelled in when driving on public roads.
and locked. In addition it must be checked
manually whether the latch at the support The grain tank extension must be
(2) of the grain tank discharge pipe is completely retracted and the grain tank
engaged. cover must be closed and locked.

When driving on public roads, the transport of an


extra person is only permitted on the specially
provided driver's seat. Otherwise the transport of
persons is prohibited.

For travel on public roads, the individual wheel


1 brakes must be deactivated (interlock the brake
pedals).
Swivel the ladder to the front and latch.

With the Balance feature, fully lower the machine.

In the event of excess width, the


panoramic lights must be switched on
when driving on public roads.

33706 Obey the national top speed limit in your


country for driving combine harvesters on the
road.

The maximum width gauge for the roads


must be obeyed.
Front attachments exceeding the maximum
2 width gauge must be unhitched.

The crop elevator must be set to the transport


position, and the guard plate (3) must be
fitted.

If folding cutting tables or maize pickers


remain on the machine, they must be raised
33706
to the transport position. The required
protective devices must be fitted. Excess
width markings and lights must be fitted.

Always comply with national and


international legislation and safety
standards.

Downhill driving

When driving downhill, always select the


same gear that would have been required
3 to drive the combine uphill.

33706

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.3


Driving and Transport
Engine operation
Engine running-in period
The engine is ready for operation immediately, but please
remember that a new engine must first be run-in.
During the running-in period, the engine may consume
more oil than normal.
Therefore, during the running-in period, check the engine
oil level twice every day. After the engine is run-in, the oil
level should be checked once a day (monitor the oil
pressure).

Motor oil
The engine shall be filled with motor oil in compliance
with the classification specified in the maintenance and
inspection table.

The oil viscosity must be selected as a function


of the ambient temperature. Deutz Fahr
recommends viscosity class 15W40.

The maximum permissible coolant


temperature must not be exceeded.
The maintenance and lubrication
instructions must be strictly followed.

Before starting
The following conditions must be met before starting the
2 engine:
The battery master switch (1) must be turned on.
Handbrake on
Sufficient diesel fuel in fuel tank
Sufficient engine oil (check with dipstick)
Ignition key in zero position
Commander Stick in neutral position

35383

11.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Set switch (1) engine speed to "lower idle speed.
Grain tank unloading, cutting table and threshing
section disengaged.
The servomotors of the belt clutches may
move when switching on the ignition and
1 starting the engine. The clutches will be
driven to the disengaged position.
Turn the ignition switch to position I and check that the
oil-pressure and battery lamps on the central
instrument cluster both light.

33964

Starting the engine

3 The engine can only be started with the


Commander Stick (3) in neutral position!
Outside of the neutral position sensor (2)
will activate the immobiliser system.

Ignition key positions:


0 = Zero position
I = Ignition on
4 2
II = Start engine
35384 The engine can and may only be started
when the Commander Stick is in the Neutral
position.
Turn the ignition key to position II (Start) until the
engine starts. When the engine is running,
0 immediately let go of the ignition key. As the engine
I
speed increases, the warning lights (battery charge
and oil pressure) should go out.
II

Do not operate the starter for longer than


max. 20 seconds without interruption. After a
long starting attempt, allow a pause of at least
1 minute before repeating the start procedure.
33946
If the engine still does not fire successfully at
the 2nd starting attempt, determine the cause
and remedy the fault.

In case of new engines or after works carried out


at the fuel system, the fuel system must be bled
prior to the first start attempt.

Never operate the starter motor while the


engine is running.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.5


Driving and Transport
After starting the engine
Allow the cold engine to warm up by running at the lower
idling speed for at least 1 minute. After starting the
engine, check that the telltale lights for the oil
pressure (1) and battery charge (2) go out as the engine
revs up. If the battery charge light does not go out on
2 starting the engine, briefly increase the engine revs (for
about 2 seconds). If the oil pressure light does not go out
after starting the engine, immediately switch off the
engine and remedy the problem.
1 Select the desired engine speed.
30506

Setting the engine speed


Preselect the desired engine speed with the engine
3 speed selector switch (3)
Lower idling speed
Higher idling speed
Nominal engine speed

4 Engine monitoring
33938 Monitoring the engine with the instrument panel
(4) Failure lamp engine control (EMR)

Continuous light: A minor error is pending. The engine is


still operative; depending on the failure
power will be reduced.

Flashing: A major failure is pending; the engine


shuts down. Contact a specialised
workshop immediately.

(5) Hydraulic temperature display


6 5 (6) Central instrument cluster
(7) Coolant temperature indication

33897

11.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Engine monitoring

Overheating:

1. In case of engine overheating a visual and audible


warning is issued.
2. Warning light (1) is lit red.
3. The central warning light (2) flashes.
4. The buzzer resounds.

2 1
33520-1

Indication coolant temperature (3)


3
Green: Normal operating temperature
Orange Operating temperature too high.

In the event of coolant loss, immediately stop


the engine. Otherwise allow the engine to
idle at no load for a few minutes and then
switch the engine off.

Check cooling system:


33933 Clean cooler; check cooling air intake and coolant circuit
resp.
Refill coolant if required. Check drive belt for cooler fan.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.7


Driving and Transport
Switching off the engine
Turn the engine speed selector switch (2) to the "lower
idling" position.
Turn the ignition key (1) to the "0" position and

1 2 remove.

Just like any other internal-combustion engine,


this engine should not be switched off directly
from full-load operation. It is better to let the
engine run down at lower idling speed for
1 to 2 minutes for temperature compensation.
35629
In case of danger, switch off the engine
immediately.

Jump-starting with an auxiliary battery


If the capacity of the vehicle batteries is insufficient to
start the engine, and external battery can be used. This
should be connected to the poles of the vehicle battery.

The auxiliary batteries must be connected in


parallel.
Make sure that the polarity of the batteries is
correctly matched

Always connect the positive pole first, then the


negative.
Disconnect in reverse order (negative first).

Fuel quality
Only use commercially available brand diesel fuel with a
sulphur content of less than 0.5%, and make sure the
system remains clean when refilling. A high sulphur
content affects the oil change intervals.

At low outside temperatures, use only winter diesel fuel.

For the permitted fuel specifications, please refer


to the Engine Manual.

Prior to refuelling with diesel fuel shut off the


engine and always dispose of spilled fuel. No
smoking.

11.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Ground drive
A
The combine harvester is equipped with a hydraulic
ground drive system.
The drive speed is infinitely variable in the individual gear
1 ranges by means of the Commander Stick (1).

The engine can only be started with the


Commander Stick (3) in neutral position.

Drive-away and acceleration


After starting the engine
33930 Set the engine speed to idling.
Select the desired gear (3).
Release the handbrake (2).
B Accelerate the engine to normal revs.
3
Regulierung der Geschwindigkeit und der Regulate
the speed and direction with the Commander Stick (1).
Neutral position: Figure A

In the Neutral position of the Commander


Stick, the combine harvester is at standstill.

Only shift the gear when the combine harvester is at


standstill and the Commander Stick is set to Neutral.
If the combine harvester does not come to a halt when
you set the drive lever to Neutral, the neutral position
33929 must be corrected at the Bowden cable of the
hydraulic pump.

After releasing (pull Commander Stick to the left), the


C Commander Stick can be moved forward and back for
infinitely variable travel speed adjustment.

Forward: Figure B
Release the Commander Stick from Neutral and
slowly press it forward.

Reverse: Figure C
Release the Commander Stick from Neutral and
slowly press it back.

Do not change gears on a slope.


When travelling downhill, change gears in
33931 good time and shift down to bottom gear.

Speed ranges
For the speed ranges, see "Technical Data" section.
2
For operation in Germany, the speed ranges of
the individual gears are limited, so that the top
speed is max. 20 km/h.

33911

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.9


Driving and Transport
Operating principle and instructions for the
brake system
1 2
The combine harvester is equipped with two mutually
independent brake systems, so that one system can
continue to function even if the other fails. The following
brake systems are used on the combine harvester:
Hydraulically operated service brake, controlled by
brake pedals (1).
Mechanically operated handbrake (parking brake),
controlled by hand lever ( 3).
Before leaving the combine harvester, make sure that the
30567 handbrake ( 3) is applied. In addition, on sloping ground,
block the front wheels with the wheel chocks.

3 Steering brake for assisting the steering in the field


Separate the brake pedals by releasing the interlock
catch (2)

The left pedal acts on the left drive wheel steer left
The right pedal acts on the right drive wheel steer
right.

33911 Only use the steering brake sparingly and


sensitively.

After operating the steering brake, the brake pedals must


again be interlocked with the catch (2).

However, when driving on public roads, the


pedals must always be locked together by
the interlock bar (2) to ensure that both drive
wheels are braked together.

Adherence to maintenance specifications is


an essential safety factor (see chapter
maintenance).

11.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Trailer coupling
The non-automatic trailer coupling (1) is designed to
hitch the transport trolley.

When coupling and uncoupling, make sure that


the coupling bolt (2) engages and is secured.
1

2 The use of the braked transport trolley is only


permitted in combination with the automatic
trailer coupling.

31572

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.11


Driving and Transport
TWheel nut tightening torques
Drive wheels = 750 Nm
Steered wheels = 310 Nm
Nm Transport cart for cutting mechanism 3,6 - 4,8 m = 170 Nm
Transport cart for cutting mechanism 5,4 - 7,2 m = 310 Nm

The wheel nuts must be retightened on


delivery of the machine, after 5 hours of
operation and after 20 hours of operation.
Thereafter, every 50 operating hours, check
that the wheel nuts and wheel bolts are
30765 securely seated and retighten if necessary.

Tyre pressures

Tyre size LI bar


1)
650 / 75 R 32 172 A 8 2,51) 2.22) Continental
2)
800 / 65 R 32 172 A 8 1.41)1.32) 1.73) Goodyear
3)
Michelin
4)
14.9 / 80 24 12PR 3.4 Can only be used up to 20 km/h
500 / 60 22.5 8PR or 10PR 1.1
405/70 R 204) 12PR 2.3
600/55-26.5 8PR 1.1

Swivelling ladder
The swivelling ladder can be adapted to the varying tyre
widths:

1 1. Remove screws M10 (2) together with fasteners.

2. Shift the platform (1) outwards or inwards.

3. Reinstall screws M10 (2) together with fasteners.

2 2

11.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Variable steering axle (optional)
The combine harvester can be equipped with a variable
steering axle.
With this axle, the normal track of 2050 mm can be
adjusted up to 2620 mm in steps of 190 mm.
This adjustment facility is designed to ensure that no
correction to the track setting is required: only the track
rod is adjusted in its seating.

Warning: the 2810 mm track must not be


used for driving on public roads (excess
width).

Before changing the track width, the combine


must be safely jacked underneath the rear
support tube (1).

The screwed fixings must be retightened on


delivery of the machine, after 5 hours of
operation and after 20 hours of operation.
Thereafter, these fixings should be checked for
tightness and retightened if necessary every
50 operating hours.

Tightening torque for the screws on the axle


body: 410 Nm (41 kpm)

Adjusting the track width

1. Unscrew and remove the two screws (2) in the track


rod tube.

2. Unscrew the three screws (3) on both sides of the axle


housing and slide the adjusting piece one or max. two
spaces along.
When the screws on the right-hand side are
unscrewed, the bracket (4) for the steering cylinder
comes loose.

3. Retighten the adjusting piece, and the cylinder bracket


will automatically be set to the correct position for the
new track width.

4. Tighten the screws in the desired holes of the track


rod (do not forget the spring washer).

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.13


Driving and Transport
Ballasting
Ballasting can be performed either by ballasting the
steering axle (extra weight) or by filling the steered
wheels with water.

Do not exceed the permissible maximum axle


loads and gross vehicle weight.

Ballasting the steering axle


1
The additional weight (1) is fixed centrally underneath the
31578 steering axle. Use only Deutz original clamps. Secure the
nuts with a locknut.

Filling the tyres with water


1 The following accessory is required for filling the tyres:
combined water filling and drain valve (Hanauer Maus),
31579
available from EHA Ventilfabrik W. Fritz KG, Mlheim
(Main), Germany.

If there is a danger of frost, anti-freeze must be


mixed with the water to protect the tyres.

3 Magnesium chloride or calcium chloride are good anti-


freeze agents.
Use a large container to mix the anti-freeze chemicals
and water.
Pour the anti-freeze agent into the water, stirring
constantly until it is dissolved.
Filling the tyres
2 Jack up the combine harvester.
31580
Turn the wheel so that the tube valve is at the top.
Unscrew the valve insert.
Screw the water filling valve (2) to the tube valve.
Connect the water hose.
Fill with water until water comes out of the vent
pipe (3).
2
Remove the water filling valve.
Refit the valve insert.
3 Inflate the tyre up to the specified pressure.

11.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Driving and Transport
Emptying the tyres
Jack up the combine harvester.
Turn the wheel so that the tube valve is at the bottom.
Unscrew the valve insert.
Drain the water.
Screw on the combined filling/drain valve.
3 Inflate the tyre: the air pressure forces any remaining
water out of the vent pipe (3).
Unscrew the combined filling/drain valve.
Screw in the valve insert.
Inflate the tyre up to the specified pressure.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11.15


Driving and Transport

90043

Towing the combine Transport driving over long distances


We recommend that for longer transport distances the
To tow the combine harvester, switch the gearbox combine harvester should be transported on a low
to neutral. loader. Comply with the maximum width and height
Swivel ladder forward and secure in place. regulations for road transport. It may be necessary to
dismantle certain parts for this purpose (steps,
Use a towbar.
wheels, etc.).
Obey the maximum machine towing speed for your
country.
Do not tow the machine further than absolutely
necessary.

Switch on the hazard warning lights and


revolving warning lights. Fit warning
notices.
Observe and follow the relevant national
regulations.
Observe local safety regulations.

11.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table

Chapter 12

Cutting table

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.1


Cutting table
Safety instructions

Safety instructions for front


attachments/trailers

Take care when installing front attachments Similarly, for operational reasons, the chains and
(cutting table and others) on the combine rollers of the maize picking attachment cannot be
harvester: risk of injury. fully protected against access/contact in the
working zone. It is therefore also essential to keep
a safe distance from all these moving parts during
Before driving on public roads, raise the front
operation. This safety warning also applies to all
attachments to the specified position.
other optional equipment.

When driving on public roads with raised front


Dangerous cutting tools are located under the
attachment, the main work switch must be switched
guards of the straw chopper attachment. These
off. Before leaving the combine harvester, lower the
cutters may continue to rotate after the drive has
front attachments and remove the ignition key.
been switched off. It is therefore essential to keep
a safe distance from the straw chopper until all
Do not allow anyone to remain between the elements have come to a complete stop.
combine harvester and the front attachment
without first securing the vehicle against rolling with
Always make sure that all shaft guard systems are
the handbrake and/or wheel chocks.
fitted as specified and that the universal shaft
protection tube can turn freely. Fit the safety chain.
Take particular care when coupling a trailer.
Never allow universal drive shafts to be driven
Whenever the combine is driven with trailers, the without the appropriate guard systems.
individual wheel braking system must be
deactivated (interlock the pedals).
Park front attachments securely.

Front attachments and trailers must only be fixed to


the devices provided.

Adhere to the maximum permissible trailer


noseweight.

Before carrying out any work underneath a raised


front attachment (cutting table or other) make sure
that it is secured supported from underneath.

For practical operational reasons, the cutting table,


intake auger, reel etc. cannot be fully protected by
structural guards etc. against access/contact. It is
therefore essential to keep a safe distance from all
these moving parts during operation.

12.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table

Safety instructions for maintenance


working on the cutting table

Repairs, assembly and conversions require Refit all dismantled parts.


appropriate skill, specialised knowledge,
experience, tools and equipment.
Refit all guards.

If necessary, have this work done by a specialised


For operational reasons, the cutting table, reel and
workshop.
similar components cannot be fully protected
against contact. Therefore always keep a safe
Fully lower the cutting table and reel. distance from these moving parts during operation.

If the reel has to remain raised, support it safely Observe the safety regulations.
from underneath and secure it to prevent
accidents.
Observe the accident prevention regulations.

Unhitch the cutting table from the combine.


Do not carry out any work on the cutting table while
it is attached to the combine.

Remove the intake auger drive chain so that the


auger can be turned more easily.

When assembling, cover the knife of the cutter bar


with several layers of strong cardboard or similar
material as well as fitting the standard knife guard-
plate. Proceed in the same way for the reel tines.

For the safety of all persons participating in


conversion work, remove the cutter bar drive belt
and the reel drive chain.

The cutting table drive line (belt drives, chains,


speed variator) may still be slightly "pretensioned"
by belt/chain tensioners, friction, dirt etc.. If this
"tension" is released, e.g. by vibrations or jolts
during servicing, parts of the cutting table may start
moving and cause injury.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.3


Cutting table

6 4 5

7
3

8 9 10 1 11 2

12

13
35586

Construction of the cutting table


(1) Cutting table frame
(2) Skids
(3) Main drive with PTO shaft
and adjusting pulley for reel variator
(4) Reel variator (speed control)
(5) Servomotor for reel variator
(6) Reel support arm with hydraulic horizontal and
vertical reel position adjustment
(7) Pick-up reel
(8) Crop divider
(9) Ear lifter
(10) Knife and knife drive
(11) Intake auger
(12) Table trolley
(13) Locking bolt

12.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Reel drive
The reel speed variator (4), which can be controlled by
the servomotor (5), permits infinitely variable adjustment
of the reel speed within the range from about 16 rpm to
45 rpm.

The reel speed may only be adjusted while the


engine is running.
The rotary speed of the reel should always be
slightly faster than the forward speed.

A slipping clutch protects the variator drive against


overloads in the reel is blocked.
The reel is adjusted in the vertical and horizontal
directions by hydraulic controls..

Under normal harvesting conditions, the reel


must be positioned vertically above the cutter
bar.

Knives
The mowing system consists of a reciprocating cutter bar
with alternating upper and lower cutting faces, i.e. when
the leading blade of one knife section is cutting against
the upper half of one prong, the leading blade of the next
knife section is cutting against the lower half of the next
prong. As a result, the chatter and cutting forces that
might otherwise lift the blades off the prongs if they were
all facing the same direction are exactly cancelled out, so
that the blades continue to cut close against the prongs.

Intake auger
The height of the intake auger above the trough is
adjustable and is also driven via a slipping clutch. The
tines can be positioned to suit the crop.

Support cylinder
A fourth support cylinder (1) is absolutely indispensable
with a 6.00 foldable Geringhof cutting table in
connection with a rape harvesting attachment
with 6-row maize pickers
with cutting tables between 8.10 m and 9 m wide
It is also recommended
for 7.20 m cutting tables with rape harvesting
attachment
1
34917

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.5


Cutting table
Mounting the cutting table
Park the transport trolley and place chocks under the
wheels to prevent it rolling.
Remove the protective panel from the crop elevator.
Open interlocks (4).
Switch on the main work switch.
Drive the combine harvester up to the transport trolley
1 from the side. At the same time, raise the crop
elevator to avoid damaging the wheel.
Move the combine harvester until the mounting pins
on the crop elevator rest in the centring holes of the
32868
cutting table (1).
Unlock the locking devices (3) at the transport cart.

Observe that the skids (2) are resting on the


support unrestrictedly and do not get stuck.

Lift the cutting mechanism from the cart.


Close the interlocks (4).

33994-1

90064

4
32803

12.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.7


Cutting table
Connecting the cutting table

Connecting the drive shaft


Remove the cardan drive shaft from the holder (2).
Press the locking pin and push the drive shaft on to
the shaft journal (5).

The shaft must be cleaned and greased before


connection.
5
1
It is possible to turn the journal extension (5) by
means of hook wrench (A) in order to ease
35384 coupling of the drive shaft.

Make sure that the drive shaft engages correctly


on the journal (5). Use only authentic OEM drive
shafts or shafts that can pushed in far enough
through the guide sleeve to ensure that the
locking pin engages in the groove.

Protect the shaft guard from being turned by the shaft


by attaching the safety chains (1) and (3).

Make sure that the drive shaft is correctly


mounted. The drive end must be connected to
the crop elevator.
3
2
31591
Strictly follow the safety instructions
When working on the front attachment,
always switch off the engine and battery
master switch, and lower the front
attachment to the ground or support it from
underneath. Prevent the vehicle rolling.

Note:
A When using a wide-angle drive shaft, it may be necessary
to shorten the guide sleeve (4).

The shaft journal is hardened. Do not anneal.

4 5
33737 Cutting tables from 8.10 m and 9 m wide have a
second drive shaft (6) for the separate drive unit
of the pick-up reel.

32910

12.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Connecting the control lines
(standard equipment)

Electrical lines:
Remove the plug from the holder (5) and plug it into
the cutting table.

Hydraulic lines:
1 2 3 4 The hydraulic lines are connected by quick-release
couplings which are colour-coded to prevent wrong
connections.
31591
Take care that the couplings are
connected as marked. Incorrect
connection will result in malfunctions and
an increased risk of accidents.
The pressure in the hydraulic system must
be relieved before connection.

(2) = Green or no marking:


Reel horizontal adjustment, forward
(3) = Silver: Reel horizontal adjustment, back
(4) = Black: Reel vertical adjustment

When disconnected, these couplings must


5 always be fitted with dust caps.
31591

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.9


Cutting table
Connecting the control lines
4 (multi-way coupling optional)
1
Electrical lines:
Lift the cover of the dummy socket (5) on the combine
harvester.
3
Release the plug by turning counter-clockwise and
2 remove it.
Plug the plug into socket (4) and lock into place.

32802 The socket cover prevents unintended


loosening.

Hydraulic lines:
5 The hydraulic lines are connected by the multi-way
coupling (6), in a single operation.

3 Hydraulic connections:
6 Reel horizontal adjustment, forward
Reel horizontal adjustment, back
Reel adjustment, vertical

7 Before plugging in the connector (3), clean the


connecting surfaces.
32784

Lift the clip (2), and pull the connector (3) out of the
holder (1) on the cutting table.
Press the locking button (8) and fold out the clip (7).
Fit the connector (3) and lock with the clip (7).

32805

12.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Dismounting the cutting table

Removing the drive shaft


Press the locking pin, and pull the drive shaft out of
1 the journal on the crop elevator and place it in the
holder (2).
2 3
When the drive shaft is uncoupled it must always
be stored and secured in its holder.

31591
Disconnecting the hydraulic lines
(standard equipment)

Electrical lines:
Disconnect the electrical and hydraulic lines and
replace the connectors (4) in the holder (5).
Fit dust caps to both sides of the quick-release
couplings (3).
4
5
Disconnecting the control lines
31594 (multi-way coupling, optional)

Electrical lines:

Always store the plugs in the dummy sockets.

Insert the plug in the dummy socket and lock in place.

7 6
The cover of the dummy socket prevents the
plug coming loose inadvertently.

9 Hydraulic lines:
Press the release button (7) and swing the lever (8)
8 downwards.
32805 Remove the connector (9) and hang it in the
holder (10) on the cutting table.

10

32802

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.11


Cutting table
Dismounting the cutting table
Park the transport trolley and place chocks under the
wheels to prevent it rolling.
Move the locking devices (3) at the transport cart to
unlocked position (2).
Approach the transport cart carefully with combine
harvester from the side. At the same time lift the feed
passage such that the wheel will not be damaged.

1 Observe that the skids (5) will be resting on


32803 the support unrestrictedly and do not get
stuck.

Open the interlocks (1), lower the cutting mechanism


on the transport cart and at the same time observe the
3 check mark at the finger bar.

Always put down the cutting mechanism such


that the check mark is centric between the
locking devices (3).
2
Move locking devices (3) to locking position (4).
90064
During the transport the cutting mechanism
must be locked with both locking devices (3)
on the transport cart!
3

90060

33994-1

12.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.13


Cutting table
Transport and the transport trolley
Transport trolleys for HMW II with a cutting table width of
5.40 m 7.20 m are supplied in the version without
brakes.
Transport trolleys for HMW II with a cutting table width as
from 7.20 m with rape cutter, and with a cutting table width
as from 8.10 m, are supplied in the version with brakes.

The braked transport trolley is only available in


combination with the automatic coupling.

Support wheel (jockey wheel)


Transport trolley version without brakes
1 To retract the jockey wheel:
Raise the jockey wheel off the ground by turning the
hand crank (1).
Press down the foot lever (2) to release the wheel
and fold it upwards by hand.
Fully raise the wheel with the hand crank, until it
rests against the end of the tube (3).
2
To extend the jockey wheel:
Release the jockey wheel by turning the hand
33432
crank (1).
Fold down the wheel until it engages in the locking
mechanism.
Lower the wheel with the hand crank.

Transport trolley version without brakes

3 Caution: risk of crushing.


Use only your foot to raise and lower the
jockey wheel (3).

33433 To retract the jockey wheel:


Fully raise the jockey wheel with the hand crank (1),
until it rests against the end of the tube (3).
Press on the U-piece with your foot until the
wheel (5) pivots upwards on the other side.

The jockey wheel is maintained in the transport


position by a strong spring.

4 To extend the jockey wheel:


3 Swing the wheel down with your foot.
Lower the wheel with the hand crank.

5
33434

12.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Height adjustment of the drawbar eye
1 The height of the transport trolley towing eye is adjusted
by turning the hand crank (1).

2 3 If height adjustment by cranking is insufficient in


the braked version, the position of the jockey
wheel must be changed:

Support the drawbar securely.

Unscrew the screws (2) on the frame of the table


32787 trolley.
Adjust the jockey wheel, and
Insert the screws (2) into different holes (3) and
tighten to secure the jockey wheel in place.

Hitching the table trolley


4 Open the trailer coupling.
Drive the combine to just in front of the table trolley.
Pull the table trolley up to the combine and hitch up
the coupling (the coupling pin must engage).
Connect the connecting cable for the rear lights.
The light blocks must be folded out and locked in
33003
position.
Place the wheel chocks in their holders and fasten
them securely.
In the version with brakes, fix the safety cord (4) of the
breakaway brake to the combine harvester.

Strictly follow the safety regulations.

Raising the jockey wheel to Transport position

Make sure that the jockey wheel is fully


retracted when in Transport position, in
order to prevent any contact of the wheel
with the ground while driving.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.15


Cutting table
Transporting the cutting table

Strictly follow the safety regulations.


Before transporting the cutting table on the
table trolley, check that:
whether the cutting mechanism is properly seated on
the supporting areas and both locking bolts (3) are
properly engaged at the cutting mechanism,
the lighting cable for the table trolley is plugged into
the combine harvester.
the rear lights of the table trolley are in working order
and are not concealed.
the wheel chocks are in their holders and properly
secured.
1 the support wheel is fully raised to the transport
position.
2 whether the cutting mechanism is secured with the
circlip (1).

Parking the transport trolley


After parking the transport trolley, block the wheels with
the two chocks to prevent it rolling.

90036

Adjusting the contact surfaces


The transport trolley can be used for transporting cutting
3 2 tables of various widths. The contact surfaces (2) must be
adjusted accordingly.

The contact surfaces (2) can be adjusted only in a


workshop.
This must be done to ensure that the maximum
permissible coupling load is not exceeded.

3
90035

12.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.17


Cutting table
Cutting angle control with Autocontrol
A The cutting angle adjustment system depends on the
optional equipment of the combine harvester.
For automatic cutting angle adjustment with Balance,
please see the section on "Balance".

The cutting angle should be set to a value that positions


2 the cutting table parallel to the ground, with the sliding
1 surfaces of the ear lifters resting on the ground.

33940
In case of a too steep cutting angle:
- Too many stones are being collected.
In case of a too flat cutting angle:
- Stray grain is not collected properly.
B
Mechanic cutting angle adjustment

Basic adjustment: 584 mm


1 Actuating range: 515 to 715 mm

Mechanic adjustment (figure A and B) is done through


both threaded spindles (1).

35628 The length of the rods must be identical on each


side.

The angle must be adjusted to the same value


on both sides.
C
Proceed as follows to adjust:
Loosen the locknuts (2)
Turn the threaded rods (1) until you have reached
the desired cutting angle.
Tighten the locknuts (2)

Hydraulic cutting angle adjustment


3 Hydraulic adjustment (Figure C) is infinitely variable and
33941 is actuated by hydraulic servo cylinders (3) operated by
control buttons on the Commander Stick.

Basic setting of cutting angle without Autocontrol


5 6
4 If tyres with a different dimension are mounted, a basic
adjustment at the feed passage is necessary:

Remove screws (4) on both sides of the feed passage.


- Evenly adjust rods (5) by means of nuts (6) such that
the cutting mechanism is located parallel to the
ground and the proper boreholes for the screws (4)
are aligned.
Mount the screws (4) and tighten.
90102

12.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Operation
1
For operation of the cutting mechanism the
working master switch (7) must be switched on
and the charge control light must be
2 extinguished.

Raising and lowering the cutting table

Observe safety regulations.


32504
The following variants for raising and lowering the cutting
table are available, depending on the equipment level:
Raising and lowering with the Commander Stick:
3 Button (1) = Raise the cutting table, Normal Fast
Button (2) = Lower the cutting table, Normal Fast
4 With EMR-D:
6 Raise the cutting table with the "Overstroke" key (to
place it on the transport trolley).
Also, set cutting angle fully back.
With Balance:
5 See Section on "Balance".

33898
Engaging the cutting table
Before engaging the cutting table, it is
essential to comply with the safety
instructions.

The cutting table can only be engaged when:


the charge control light is extinguished,
the main work switch (7) is active, and
the threshing section is running.

Press button (3) for the threshing section. The symbol (6)
7 flashes while the clutch is engaging and remains
constantly visible when the threshing section is engaged.
33938
Press button (5) for the cutting table. The symbol (6)
flashes while the clutch is engaging and remains
constantly visible when the cutting table is engaged.

Disengaging the cutting table


Press button (4). The cutting table will be
disengaged.

Emergency stop: press foot-switch (8),


(e.g. in the event of foreign bodies in the cutting table,
clogging of the crop elevator and in hazardous
situations).
8
33959

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.19


Cutting table
Pick-up reel adjustment
3 Adjust the pick-up reel by means of the multi-function
lever.
2
Horizontal adjustment (2) = Reel forward
4 (1) = Reel back
1
Height adjustment: (3) = Raise reel
(4) = Lower reel

33504/1

Reel speed adjustment


If the automatic pick-up reel control is switched off, the
reel speed is directly set with the keys on the
Commander Control 2000.

Keys (5): Increase reel speed (+)


Keys (6): Reduce reel speed ()

5
Automatic reel control
When the automatic pick-up reel control is selected, the
6 ratio of the reel speed to the ground travel speed is
33898 increased or reduced with keys (5) or (6).

Pick-up reel adjustment


For long laid crops, set the reel far forward and as low
as possible.
For short crops, set the reel back.

Regularly check the chain tension of the reel


drive, and adjust if necessary.

12.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Reversing the cutting table drive
1 The cutting table is reversed by means of rocker
switch (1). See the "Threshing section" chapter for a
description of the reversing device.

33938

Manual reversing
The mechanical reversing device (3) is provided for
manual reversing.
2
CAUTION
Danger of injury

Disengage the cutting table drive.


Switch off the engine remove the ignition key.
Attach reversing device (3) to the shaft (2), insert
31003 proper lever and turn back drive mechanism.
Remove reversing device.

35581

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.21


Cutting table
Mounting optional attachments

The following safety precautions must be


observed that all times when working on the
cutting table:
Disengage the cutting table drive.
Stop the engine remove the ignition key.
1 Support the table on stands when working
underneath it.

2 Ear lifters
31603-1
The ear lifters improve the cutting performance in green
or laid crops or in crops with overhanging ears.

The number of ear lifters that should be installed


depends on the condition of the crop, and so the
following recommendations can only be of
general guidance:
Green and laid crops: fit an ear lifter to every fourth to
sixth prong.
3 Leave the outer three to four prongs free.
To install the ear lifters, fit the specially designed
spool-type mounts (1) in the selected positions.
To vary the height of the ear lifter tips, up to three
31018 spacing washers (2) can be fitted if required.
Unused ear lifters must be stowed in the holder at the
back of the cutting table (3).

Ear lifter height adjustment

For better results in difficult ground conditions,


the height of the ear lifter can be adjusted by
changing the hole (4) used for the spring clip
attachment.

4
Before adjusting the ear lifters, reset the cutting
angle of the combine harvester.
X To adjust the cutting angle, raise the ear lifters.
Adjust the ear lifters so that the contact area (X) is
31604-1 parallel to the ground.
Never lower the ear lifter so far that the cutting table
exerts pressure on it.
When you have set the correct position, fully insert the
spring clip and press it down until it rests against the
guide shoe.

4
31605-1

12.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Crop divider
1 The HMW II cutting table has a retractable crop divider.
The crop divider can be adjusted by means of the
following components:
Divider plate (1)
Guide plate (2)
Nose (3) (complete crop divider assembly).

3 2
Adjusting the divider plate
The divider plate (1) can be adjusted for height and
angle.
Loosen screws (4)
33430
Adjust the height and angle of the divider plate and
Retighten the screws (4)

1 Adjusting the guide plate


The guide plate (2) can be adjusted for height and angle.
4 To adjust the height:
Loosen screw (5)
Turn the guide plate (2) together with the guide rod (6)
Tighten screw (5).
To adjust the angle:
Loosen screw (7)
Push the guide plate (2) together with the guide
rod (6)
33429
Tighten screw (7).

Adjusting the righting plate (righting bar)


This component is adjusted in the same way as the guide
6 plate for both height and angle.

The righting plate is designed to push laid crop


back into the standing crop in order to prevent
stalks being torn on the cutting table frame.
5 2
Height of the divider nose (crop divider height)
The ground clearance of the overall crop divider
assembly can be set.
7
The crop divider must be positioned with its nose
pointing slightly upwards.
33429 To adjust, first lift the retaining plate (9)
Adjust the height with the setscrew (8).

In standing crop, the crop divider should be


positioned 5 cm above the ground, and in laid
crop it should slide along the ground.

Transport position/Working position


To set the crop divider to the transport position, raise the
retaining plate (9) and fold the crop divider inwards.
8 1 Lodge the retaining plate (9) behind the notch (10).

10
33431

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.23


Cutting table
Spreader bars

1 The spreader bars (1) are necessary for dry,


short straw with straight, smooth stalks and
preferably dense growth.

Blockage and heaping may occur in these cases, leading


to high compaction in front of the intake tines at the inside
end of the auger.
The result is an irregular, pulsating transfer of crop from
the intake auger to the straw intake channel and from
35582
there to the threshing components, leading in turn to crop
loss, poor threshing quality and uneven work.

For crops that are very damp and therefore


heavy, or for crops that generally tend to wrap,
2 the spreader bars should be removed.

For machines with the Balance system, the


following additional components can be mounted
on the cutting table in the event of difficult crop
conveying conditions:
Auger extensions
Stripper extension

3
30129A

Legend
(1) Spreader bar
(2) Fixing points for the auger extension
(3) Fixing points for the feed combs

12.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Important notes for operation
A clean cut and an even conveyer feed are essential
preconditions for obtaining optimal yield from the
threshing section.

The following adjustments and settings will help


minimise grain losses.
Adjust the crop divider so that no blockages occur.
Adapt the reel speed to the forward speed of the
combine.
Make sure that the reel tines are correctly adjusted.
Monitor the drive and guide of the knife.
Monitor the contact pressure of the cutting table on
the ground.

To prevent operating problems, all necessary


maintenance work must be performed at the
specified intervals.

Regularly check the tension of the chains and drive


belts. Make sure that all drive belts are always clean
and free of grease.
Do not set the slipping clutches too tight, because
otherwise they would not perform their function as
overload protection devices.
Before carrying out any work on the cutting table,
disengage the cutting table drive, switch off the engine
and remove the ignition key.
The cutting table must be supported on a suitable
stand when working underneath it.

Strictly follow the safety instructions.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.25


Cutting table

1 2
3

8
4

7 6 5

32861/4

1 Chain pick-up reel drive Maintenance and adjustment


2 Chain reel speed variator reel transmission gear
3 V-belt reel speed variator Maintenance intervals
4
5
Reel speed variator
Chain adjusting pulley intake auger Lubricate the cutting table as shown in the
lubrication plan at the end of this manual.
6 Slipping clutch intake auger
7 V-belt knife drive
8 Slipping clutch reel Daily:
Check cutting fingers and knife sections for
damage, replace if necessary

Every 100 operating hours:


Check the tension of the drive chains and belts and
just as necessary.

For the first time after 200 operating hours, then


after 500 operating hours and thereafter every
500 operating hours:

Run the reel speed variator and make sure that it is


running smoothly.
Check the cutter bar guide.
Check the slipping clutch, reel drive and intake
auger.
Check that the reel is parallel to the ground; if
necessary, vent the reel lifting cylinders.

12.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Adjusting the reel tines
Under normal harvesting conditions the tines of the pick-
up reel should be either vertical or inclined only slightly
forwards. In laid crop or short cereals, the tines should be
adjusted to provide better pick-up.

Raise the locking rod (1).


Set the reel tines to the desired position by swivelling
the lever (2).

31019
The 7.2 m, 8.1 m and 9 m cutting tables have a
control star on both the left and right side for
adjusting the reel stars.

In this case, the reel tines must be set


identically on both sides.

32985

Venting the reel lifting cylinders


If the reel starts to tilt and therefore scrape against the
cutting table frame, the vertical reel cylinders must be
3 bled.

Open the venting screw (3) very carefully.


If it is opened to quickly, the air will
escape rapidly and the reel may drop
suddenly.
For further adjustment, open the venting
screws (3) only slightly in order to prevent
31621 the reel from dropping suddenly.

Fully raise the reel.


Open the bleed screw (3).
Close the screw again as soon as hydraulic oil starts
being discharged with no air bubbles.
If necessary, repeat the procedure after raising and
lowering the reel several times.

Regularly check the hydraulic oil level.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.27


Cutting table
Adjusting the tension of the V-belt for the
1 knife drive
Tension the V-belt (2) by moving the tensioning pulley.
Turn the knife drive forwards.
Check that the V-belt brands in the centre of the
tensioning pulley (1). If necessary adjust the position of
the tensioning pulley (1) by inserting or removing
washers.

2
32983

31622

12.28 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Intake auger

The height of the intake auger must be set to prevent


wrapping and to ensure that the crop is evenly fed to the
3 crop elevator.

The clearance (x) between the intake auger and the


cutting table trough must be 612 mm, or in the case
of rapeseed 2025 mm.
y
1 The height is adjusted at the outer bearing (1).
90062
Measure distance (y) between the mount and
adjusting screws and ensure that the auger is parallel
to the trough.
Adjust spreader strips (2.1) and (2.2).

The intake auger must not scrape; take account


of intake auger imbalance.
Check the spacing with the cutting table installed.

y The position of the intake auger tines can be adjusted to


suit the crop conditions by adjusting the flange (3).
1
32983
Please note that at the rear the intake tines must
retract fully flush into the guides (4).

Each intake auger tine of the cutting tables has a


specially designed weak point (safety break point) to
prevent further damage when larger hard objects are
2.1 drawn in by the intake auger.
5
If this safety mechanism is activated, stop the
combine and remove the
X ignition key. Immediately remove the object from
the stone trap and replace the damaged tines.

2.2 4 The feed finger clearance to the cutter bar floor is


adjusted as follows ex works:
31625
23 mm 2 mm

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.29


Cutting table
Replacement of the feed fingers
1 Remove the cover (1) and (2) respectively.
2 Pull out the retaining spring (5) from the bearing (4).
Remove the damaged feed finger and insert new
finger into the bearing (4).
Check before inserting the retaining spring (5) whether
the feed finger is sitting completely down in the
bearing (4).
3

31438 These additional tines (3) can be removed when


harvesting crop with long stalks that tend to wrap.
The sockets must then be blanked with covers
(Part No. 1603 1678).

5
35053

12.30 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Mhwerk
Intake auger drive
1 Adjust the idler sprocket (1) so that the slack side (2)
(lower length) of the chain sags 12 mm.
Adjust the chain guide (3) so that it is (X3) = 5 mm
from the chain.
For new machines or new chains, retighten after
5 hours; thereafter, check daily and correct when
necessary.

2 3
31003
X3

31608

Clearance between spreader strip and intake auger


A A) as close as possible

B) 5 mm

33007

Setting the slipping clutches after a long


period out of operation
Before starting up for the first time or after a long period
in storage, we recommend that you loosen the
compression springs of the clutches to allow the clutches
to slip freely for a short time. Then set the clutches in the
normal way.

Important: After frequent slipping, coat the hub and


bearing bush (G) with Molykote grease.

21491

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.31


Mhwerk
Transport trolley, version with brakes
Setting the overrun brake
1. Make sure that the cable-pull is routed straight
between the brake links.
1
When using Bowden cable sleeves, make sure
that they are as short as
possible and run as straight as possible.

2. The cable-pull or brake linkage must be con-


nected but not slack.
32790

3. The towbar (1) must be fully extended.

4. Support the axle from underneath.

5. Tighten the turnbuckle nut (2) until you feel a slight


resistance in the wheel brakes. Lock the turnbuckle
nut with the locknut.

2 CAUTION!
Always turn the wheels in the forward
direction of rotation.

33436 6. Carry out a function test (braking to a stop) in the


forward direction (maximum overrun of the towbar
under load: 5060 mm).

7. Carry out a reversing function test. If the resistance is


too great, slightly loosen the turnbuckle nut.

With the handbrake on, the gas spring must


automatically reset the handbrake lever when in
reverse.

After the first load application, the cable


and cable grommet adjust to each other
the overrun may be slightly increased
if necessary retension, i.e. tighten the
turnbuckle nut.

12.32 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Table trolley maintenance intervals

1. After the first journey under load:

Check the brake cable grommets, cable clamps and


bolt fixings.

2. After 50 80 operating hours or full overrun:

a) Loosen the transmission (cable) turnbuckle


b) Readjust the wheel brakes as described in the
maintenance instructions under "Readjusting the
wheel brake"
c) Set the cable-pull system so that it is free of play
d) Grease the guide rails and profiled grooves in the
towbar eye.

3. Every 3 months:

a) Lubricate the transmission device (Bowden cable)


and check that it is free of play.
b) Check that that the cable-pulls run smoothly.

After carrying out maintenance work and


adjustments, always check that the fixings
are securely tightened and test the brakes.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.33


Cutting table
Replacing components
Replacing knives

The knife must not bind or be difficult to move.


Damaged prongs and knife sections must be
replaced.

1 31622

After unscrewing the two screws (1) the knife can be


pulled out and replaced by the spare knife (2). Always
secure the spare knife with the spring clip (4).
1
Always ensure that the newly fitted knife (4) is
installed correctly and securely.

2
30005

The spare knife (4) is kept in the upper transverse


tube (3).

31007

Replacing knife blades (5) and fingers (8)


5 If the riveted knife sections have to be removed for
repairs, they can be refitted using screws.
Use M6 x 16 hexagon head screws and self-locking
nuts.
Keep to the alternate blade-up / blade-down sequence
when refitting the knife sections.

8 The prongs are screwed to the cutter bar in pairs.


Note the positions of the coils (6) for the ear lifters
6 when replacing the fingers.
If necessary, spacer washers (7) can be fitted.
7 31623

12.34 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Replacing reel tines
1 Loosen screw (2). Change reel tines.
When fitting new tines, ensure that the connecting
segments (1) are engaged with each other.

Changing the linings of the slipping


clutches
2 The clutch linings are identical for all the slipping
clutches.
We recommend changing the linings in pairs.

31620 Figure shows the construction of the "intake auger"


slipping clutch; the reel drive clutch is of similar
construction.
The chamfer of the friction lining (3) must not rest
against the centring edge of the clutch hub (4).
Mount the bearing bush (5) with Molykote grease.
3
5 Refit the guards after completing
4 maintenance.
6 After replacing the linings, allow the clutch to slip for
some time in order to run in the linings and then adjust
to the correct value (see "Maintenance and
Adjustment").
21491

Setting the slipping clutches


7 After changing the clutch linings, the slipping clutches (7)
and (8) must be adjusted on a test rig.

Tighten the nuts (6) so that the clutch slips at about


100 Nm.
Make the clutch slip about ten times at a speed of
approx. 200 rpm for 5 seconds each time, allowing it
8 to cool between each slipping period.
Tighten the nuts (6) alternately until
the reel drive clutch (7) slips at 350 Nm
33738 the intake auger clutch (8) slips at 700 Nm.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.35


Cutting table
Troubleshooting on the cutting table

Problem Remedy

Pick-up Crop delivered unevenly With the TCS option, adjust the ratio of the pick-
reel up reel speed to the travel speed.
Match the reel speed to the forward speed
The reel tines are set to excessive pick-up.
Reel wraps at the reel tines Raise the reel and adjust the tines to reduce
pick-up.
Adapt the reel speed to the forward speed.
Reel wraps at the side Set the inner righting plate of the crop divider
further inwards and if necessary higher.
Reel scraping against cutting table Reel is tilting: bleed the vertical reel cylinders.
frame

Intake Auger wrapping Tines too far forward when in rear position.
auger At the rear, the tines must close against the
auger tube = no back-feed.
If necessary, dismount the tines between the
auger spirals.
Poor delivery Set the auger/trough clearance and position
the L-section skimmer closer.

Crop Blockages at the divider nose Raise the divider nose


divider and Poor pick-up of laid crop Check the clearance and position (height) of the
ear lifters ear lifters.
Set the reel further forward and reset tines for
increased pick-up.
Under some circumstances, cut crop from
another direction.
Picking up too many stones Reduce the number of ear lifters. Raise the nose
of the ear lifters or cutting table.

Cutter bar Knife stationary Foreign bodies in the cutter bar.


Replace damaged prongs and knife sections.
Check V-belt tension.
Knife cutting poorly Blades are blunt and must be replaced or
sharpened.
Align the knife centrally with the crop.
Keep knife guides well lubricated.
Knife stops too easily V-belt too loose (knife drive).
Knife has too much play.
Too much weed/undergrowth (increase cutting
height).

12.36 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Cutting table
Troubleshooting on the cutting table

Problem Remedy

Transfer Crop fed unevenly Fit auger extension.


to crop Fit spreader strip extension.
elevator The clearance intake auger straw duct is too
large: Extend intake chains.
The cutting angle is swivelled too far to the front.

ATTENTION
In case of a completely swivelled out
cutting angle, there is hazard of running
the risk to collect significantly more
stones with the cutting mechanism.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 12.37


Cutting table

12.38 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism

Chapter 13

Threshing mechanism

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.1


Threshing mechanism

Safety instructions for the threshing Refit all guards.


section Strictly follow the safety regulations.
Strictly follow the accident protection
Repairs, assembly and conversion work require regulations.
appropriate expertise, specialised knowledge
and experience, together with the necessary The machine height is increased when
equipment and tools. the grain tank discharge tube is slewed outboard
If necessary, this work should be left to a the grain tank cover is open
specialist workshop. When working on slopes, the grain tank should not be
Refit all dismantled components. completely filled.

Crop elevator
Tensioning the feed chain
1 2 The chain-and-slat conveyer of the crop elevator receives
the crop from the intake auger and conveys it to the
threshing drum.

Check the chain tension daily.

Remove the feed passage cover to check the


chain tension.

35390 With a correctly tensioned chain, the 3rd feeder slat (3)
(counting from the front roller) just touches the plastic
guide rails.

Proceed as follows on both sides of the feed passage to


tension the chain:
Loosen the lock nut (2).

3 Tension the feed chain with the nut (1).


Tighten the lock nut again.

34150

Adjusting the intake roller


The clearance between the front intake roller and the
feed passage floor must be set to different values for
cereal and maize harvesting.

Wheat harvesting:
Low feed chain clearance: Plate (4) bottom

34951

13.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Maize harvesting:
High feed chain clearance: Plate (2) top

Strictly follow the safety instructions.


Switch off the engine and remove the
ignition key.

To raise the lever (1), turn the plates (2) through 180.

1
2 In addition, for harvesting maize, the smoothing shaft (3)
must be removed. The holes left in the side panels after
34951 removing the shaft must be sealed with blanking covers
(part No. 16024678).

35391

Reversing device
5 Drive with electric motor
The reversing device (5) is located on the right-hand side
of the crop elevator. With this device, all the drive units of
the cutting table and the crop elevator intake chain can
be turned in reverse in the event of a blockage. The
reversing device is controlled by rocker switch (6).

The reversing device can and may only be


operated if:
the main work switch is on.
33943 the cutting table clutch is disengaged.

Operation
6 Disengage the cutting table.
Wait until the drive units of the cutting table come to a
complete standstill.
Start the reversing device with rocker switch (6) and
run the cutting table in reverse until the flow of
material is totally removed.

Before clearing a blockage by hand:


Observe the safety instructions.
Switch off the engine and remove the ignition
33938 key.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.3


Threshing mechanism
Threshing section
Engaging the threshing section

Make sure that all safety regulations


are duly observed before engaging the
thresher.

The threshing section must always only be


engaged when the engine is running at low
idling speed and must only be disengaged
after the machine has discharged all material
and is running empty. If the straw chopper is
engaged, the straw chopper will
automatically be engaged first, followed by
the threshing section. This precaution
prevents the straw chopper from clogging.

The chopper must only be switched on or off


with the straw guide plate when threshing
mechanism is out of gear!

Set the engine to the lower idling speed by means of


switch (1):
2 Start the engine.
1 Switch on the main work switch (2).
33938
When the main work switch is activated the light
in the switch is lit. (Charge control light must be
extinguished).

3 5 Engage the threshing section clutch with button (5).


Engage the cutting table with button (6).

4
Symbols (3) and (4) flash while the clutch is
engaging and remain constantly lit when the
clutch is engaged.
Increase the engine revs to operating speed.
6
Cal Diag Setup

35402
If the main work switch or the engine is switched
off, all clutches are automatically disengaged.

After completing threshing, always allow the


machine to continue running for about
30 seconds.
Otherwise, the step of the frogmouth sieve
will be clogged by falling straw. In addition,
falling straw can lead to adjusting problems
on louvre-type sieves.

13.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Setting the speed of the threshing drum
The speed of the threshing drum is infinitely variable
1 between 410 and 1220 rpm. With the threshing drum
reduction gear, the adjustment range is from 205 to
610 rpm.

Only change the drum speed while the drum


is running. In order to preserve the easy
2 action of the variator we recommend that you
fully readjust the variator drive from time to
3 time.
Cal Diag Setup

Button + (2) = Increase speed


Button (3) = Decrease speed

The speed of the threshing drum is displayed on the


display of the Commander Control 2000 at (1).

35402

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.5


Threshing mechanism
Rapid opening of the concave/separator
concave
The concaves can be opened by the following
procedure to clear blockages or for cleaning:

Commander Control 2000:


1 Open concaves: Hold down key (1) for three
seconds.
Close concaves: Briefly press one of the Setup
2 Cal Diag Setup keys (2).

35402

Threshing drum reduction gear

Observe the safety instructions. Switch off


5 the engine and remove the ignition key.

Drive with reduction gear


Threshing drum speed = 205610 rpm
The driver (4) and liner (5) on the side panel are held
together by bolt (3).

Drive without reduction gear


4 Threshing drum speed = 4101220 rpm
31549
The driver (4) and V-belt pulley (6) are held together by
bolt (3).

6
3

31550

13.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.7


Threshing mechanism
Basic adjustment of the concave
1. Engage the rod in the appropriate position for threshing
cereals or maize:
Rod engaged in lower hole A = cereals
Rod engaged in upper hole B = maize

2. Fully close the concave. In the "Set clearances" display


of the Commander Control 2000, set bars (1) and (2)
for the concave clearances forward/back to position 1.
A 3. Check the adjustment dimensions on the servomotors
2x

B 3 35
for forward (3) and back (4), and set the correct
35583
dimension if necessary.

2
1 1 1

35403

402

35502

413

35503

13.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
4. The basic setting is adjusted by means of setscrews
(2) on both sides of the combine harvester.

2
Before checking or correcting this setting, make
sure that the servomotors (1) are fully retracted
(closed).

5. Adjust the concave clearance as follows:


2
When carrying out this adjustment, ensure
that the concave is precisely parallel with the
X2 threshing drum.

Basic adjustment for cereals:

Concave inlet, measured at the fourth bar:


distance X1 = 6 mm
Concave outlet, measured at the last bar:
1 distance X2 = 2-3 mm
X1 2x
3 35

Basic adjustment for maize:

Concave inlet, measured at the 3. bar:


distance X1 = 30 mm
Concave outlet, measured at the last bar:
distance X2 = 10 mm


35583
Inspection holes (3) are provided on both sides
of the combine harvester to help measure the
concave clearances.
3
6. Turn the threshing drum by hand, and make sure that
it does not strike or rub the concave.

X1 The concave must be parallel to the threshing


drum.

X2 Concave clearance "front", X1


Concave clearance "back", X2

34913
Notes:
Each combine harvester leaves the factory with the basic
settings to match the installed concave.

After changing the basic setting, perform the


"Calibrate clearances" procedure.

Run through the adjustment range, and make


sure that the threshing drum does not rub
on either side.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.9


Threshing mechanism
Turboseparator
2 Drive is by a duplex V-belt from pulley (1) to pulley (2).
1.2
2.1 Both pulley (1) and pulley (2) have two steps, this giving
1 two speed ranges.

Refer to the section "Basic adjustments on the threshing


section" for information on speed ranges and
turboseparator clearances.
1.1
2.2
Speed Speed V-belt to be installed to
range rpm pulley pulley
34911
I 380 1.1 2.1
II 790 1.2 2.2

Setting the turbo separator speed


3
4 Place the push-on lever on the bolt (6).
Swing the idling pulley (3) aside, and lock it in the hole
5 (7) with the spring pin (5).

Caution:
Risk of accident. Make sure that the spring
6 pin (5) is fully and securely engaged. The
idling pulley arm (4) is permanently spring-
7 35504
loaded and can suddenly spring back.

Move the drive belt to the desired position.


Slightly raise the idling pulley with the push-on lever.
8 9 10 Release the spring pin and slowly let the idling pulley
swing back into place.
Check that the idling pulley (3) is flush with the belt.
Check the belt tension. Check length L of the
compression spring (8) and if necessary adjust it with
nut (10) against the adjustment plate (9) (see also
section on "Maintenance").
L

35036

13.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Basic setting of the separator concave
1 2
The basic setting of the clearance between the separator
concave and the turbo separator is factory-set. For the
3 possible clearance settings in threshing operation please
see the section on "Threshing section settings".
405

Approximate basic setting:


In the "Set clearances" display on the Commander
Control 2000, reduce bar (5) down to notch 1.
4 30 Check the set length of the servomotor (1), and if
necessary set the correct length.
Vertical clearance between the bearing plate (4) and
5

35036
guide plates (3) = approx. 5 mm. Set the correct
clearance on the pull-rod (2).

5
After setting the clearance, turn the turbo
separator by hand, and make sure that it neither
strikes nor rubs against the concave.

Ask a specialist workshop to conduct the precise


basic setting.

1 1 1

35403

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.11


Threshing mechanism
Equipment Impeller - Humped Reversing Drum
1 Impeller
For most crops, continuous strips (1) must be bolted to
the reversing drum.

Each fixing point must be fixed by 2 screws.

Humped Reversing Drum


To harvest maize and similar crops, the continuous bars
must be replaced by wearing plates (2).

33486 The wearing plates must stand out slightly from the
mounts. However, they must never project higher than
the side rings.

2 If necessary, as an adjustment aid, place a ruler


over the rings.

To avoid any imbalance, always equip the


turbo separator fully and uniformly.

33487

4 De-awning plates
By closing the de-awning plates (5) the concave
apertures can be closed up to the 5th bar, so that the
more awkwardly de-awned or separated crops such as
90 barley and durum wheat can be cleanly threshed.

3 Lever down (3) De-awning plates open


Lever up (4) De-awning plates closed


34000
Closed de-awning plates are standing for:
- Smaller separating surface of the concave
which means a higher amount of broken grain.
- Higher straw walker losses due to less
separating capacity.

In case of a higher amount of broken grain one


of the de-awning plates can be reopened, so
that only 4 concave apertures are covered. See
following description.

2x
3 35

5 35583

13.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Open de-awning plate
1 A At (A) all five de-awning plates (3) are closed.

Opening of the fifth de-awning plate (7) is done as


2 3 folllows:

Loosen nut (4) and shift locking rod (6) until limit stop
is reached, so that the stud (5) is entirely releasing the
lever (1).
4 Retighten locking rod with nut (4).
Hinge down de-awning plate (7) as shown in (C).
34000-3
Now threshing can be done with four closed de-awning
plates.
1 B
5 For closing of the fifth de-awning plate (7) proceed in
reverse order.

6
In doing so, observe that stud (5) is engaging in
the opening in lever (1) and nut (4) is firmly
retightened.
4

34000-2

34000-1

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.13


Threshing mechanism
Cleaning the drum and concave
1 Access to the threshing drum is possible through the
following openings:
two access covers (1) on the sides,
the threshing drum cover (2) above the intake
passage,
the stone trap.

Cleaning procedure:
Lower the crop elevator (3).
Open the access cover (1) and threshing drum
34000 cover (2).
Carry out the required cleaning and/or maintenance.
Close the access cover (1) and threshing drum
cover (2).

The threshing drum has 8 bars and is balanced. It can


only work perfectly if these bars are neither bent nor
badly worn.
2 3
To avoid imbalance, all bars must be equally
clean.
The tightness of the bar fixing bolts must be
regularly inspected.
Bent or worn beater bars (4) may be replaced
34915 only in pairs on opposite sides of the drum.

4 Repairs to the drum should only be carried out


by a qualified specialist.

In particular with damp or green crop, the concave and


threshing drum can become slightly dirty, with the
following results:
Poor grain separation due to matting of material in the
concave.
Imbalance of the threshing drum.
Overloading of the straw walkers.
4 Uneven feed to the sieves.
32895

13.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Emptying the stone trap
1 The stone trap collects the stones and impurities
2 conveyed with the crop by the crop elevator chain.

6
5 The stone trap must be cleaned daily, or more
often in the case of stony ground or laid crop.
The stone trap must thoroughly cleaned when
threshing seed crops or changing crops.
Raise the crop elevator (1).

Observe the safety regulations.


Switch off the engine and remove the key.
34917
Engage the crop elevator support (2).

7
4 To open and close the stone trap, use the push-
fit lever from the toolbox.

Lever (3) up stone trap closed


Lever (3) down stone trap open
Unlock safety lock (8).
3 Push the lever into its fitting and press the lever (3)
down the stone trap will open.
Empty the stone trap and then close it again.
Secure stone trap by means of safety lock (8).
34916

The stone trap is spring-loaded and is therefore


held in the closed position by spring pressure.

Adjustment:
In the closed position, the levers (4) must move inwards
8 at least 5 mm over their dead centre.
The levers are adjusted at the stop screw (5) for standard
machine versions or at screw (6) in Balance versions.
The stone trap must be adjusted at the link rod (7) to
ensure that it closes safely.

35610

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.15


Threshing mechanism
Adjusting the dust plates
The function of the dust plates (2) and (3) is to reduce
dust generation during the threshing process. Their
effectiveness depends on the correct adjustment and
condition of the dust plates.
Incorrectly adjusted and/or bent dust plates will not
perform their function efficiently.

The dust plate (2) can be adjusted after loosening the


1 screws (1).

31638 The clearance (X) between the dust plate and threshing
drum must be 10 mm and can only be inspected or
adjusted in a workshop.

3 4 1 Dust plate fixing screws


2 Dust plate
3 Dust plate
4 Reversing drum
5 Threshing drum
6 Turbo separator
7 Dust plate / anti-wrapping plate (in machines without
2 turbo separator)

Dust plates (2) and (3) are securely fixed in the adjusted
5 6 position.
33950-1 In machines without turbo separator, another spring-
loaded dust plate is mounted at (7).
This dust plate must not be bent and must be able to
move freely. The dust plates can be inspected via the
maintenance flap on the straw hood.
X

X 7

35584

13.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Straw walkers
1 2
Note:
Model range 5650H, 5680H has 5-stage straw
walkers (3). Variants 5660HTS, 5690HTS are also
equipped with the turbo separator, which shortens the
straw walker space. Consequently, this version is
equipped with 4stage straw walkers.

The open straw walkers separate the remaining grains


from the straw and convey the straw to the straw outlet or
3 the chopper.
31641
The deflector flap (1) mounted as standard behind the
first straw walker stage catches the flying grains ejected
4 from the threshing drum and rear beater.

At regular intervals check that the deflector is


undamaged and in working order.
In particular with damp straw and high weed
content, the deflector flap and straw walkers
must be regularly cleaned. There must be no
matting on the straw walkers.

Access to the straw walkers for cleaning and


maintenance is obtained by lifting the cover (4) on the top
31642
of the straw hood.

Strictly observe the safety instructions.


Before carrying out any work in the straw
walker chamber, switch off the engine and
remove the ignition key.

The straw walker area is protected by a straw warning


5 lamp (2) to protect against clogging and consequential
damage. The visual indicaton (5) is in the combined
instrument gauge. In addition, an audible signal is emitted
by the horn.

30506

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.17


Threshing mechanism
Integrated straw chopper (optional)
NOTE:
Straw choppers, complete with drives, made by various
manufacturers may be installed on the combine harvester.
Operation and maintenance are described in the related
manufacturer's instructions. The following description
2 applies to the version KPAB.

WARNING
During operation, while the engine, driv
units and straw chopper etc. are still running,
33936 noone should be allowed within the danger
zone close to the machine. Do not touch any
moving parts of the machine. Wait until they
have come to a complete standstill.
1
If the knives are broken, stop immediately.
Switch off the machine and replace the
broken knives. Otherwise the straw chopper
can be destroyed by the resulting imbalance.

Standard version
No display for the straw chopper is provided in the
driver's stand. The warning light of the speed monitoring
3 is integrated in the central instrument.
33981
Only adjust the straw guide plate while the
threshing section is disengaged. Risk of
injury.

Engaging the straw chopper


Move the hand lever to position (1) to fold the straw guide
3 plate (3) down towards the front. The straw falling from
the straw walkers is now fed to the straw chopper.

Activation of the straw chopper is controlled with the


switch (4). The electronic monitoring will be realised by
the inductiv sensor (5)

Disengaging the straw chopper


31642
Move the hand lever to position (2). The straw guide plate
(3) is folded back. The straw will now fall directly from
The straw chopper is switched off with the switch (4).
4

35431

13.18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Straw chopper clutch with electric servomotor
If the straw chopper was switched on by moving the straw
guide plate, the actuator motor activates the straw
chopper when the threshing mechanism is engaged.
1 When the threshing section is disengaged, the straw
chopper clutch (1) is also disengaged.

When the straw chopper is engaged:


Only engage the threshing section at low engine
speeds.
Wait until no more straw remains in the straw
walkers before disengaging the threshing
33979 section.

The servomotor is controlled as a function of current. As


2 soon as a predefined current (operating point) flows
across the servomotor, the servomotor is switched off.
Since the force that a servomotor brings to the coupling
movement is proportional to the flow of current, the drive
belt will still be correctly tensioned even when lengthened
due to ageing.

3
Adjusting the back blade/reversing the knives
Pull the back blade (3) slightly to the rear when harvesting
33841
a damp crop.

The knives (2) have a cutting edge on each side. When


one side becomes blunt, the knives can be reversed.

ATTENTION!
Replace broken knives immediately.
Strong imbalance may cause high
consequential damages.

Converting the straw chopper for harvesting maize


Make the following modifications before our threshing
maize or other crops with long stalks:

Remove the back blade (3).


Remove the friction bars.
Remove one knife from each pair of knives (2), taking
care that only knives which are opposite each other are
removed, since the mechanism will otherwise the
unbalanced.
Mounting the larger pulley to reduce the speed of the
straw chopper and transfer the drive belt to this pulley.
Move the tensioning pulley for the drive belt and set
the tensioning spring to the correct dimension.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.19


Threshing mechanism
Chopper KPAP (only 5650-5660)

1 1 Straw guide plate (chopper in off-position)


2 Straw guide plate (position chopper operation)
3 Lever for deflector adjustment
2 4 Chopper
3 5 Levers for straw guide plate

4
90025

Manual central setting of deflectors


5 With the switch (3) all deflectors are being set
simultaneously:
- Position front = Broad spreading
- Position rear = Narrow spreading

3
90052

Electrical setting of deflectors


6
The setting is done with servo motor (6).

90027

13.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.21


Threshing mechanism
Chaff spreader (manufacturer: KPAB)
The chaff spreader (1) is fixed at the front left and right-
1 hand sides by two locking levers (2). It can be e.g. be
swung back in order to change sieves.

Relax the tension on the drive belt and remove the V-


belt.

Before releasing the second locking lever,


always hold the chaff spreader with your
other hand. Otherwise, the chaff spreader
35458
will swing by the force of its own weight.

Hold the chaff spreader firmly and loosen the two


locking levers (2).
1
Swing the chaff spreader back, and lock again.
After swinging it back into working position, refit the
drive belt.
2

35459

Chaff spreader (manufacturer: Heuling)


Before releasing the locking lever (6), always
hold the chaff spreader firmly with one hand
3 on the grip rods (3) or (4). Otherwise the
chaff spreader will swing under the force of
its own weight or of the gas pressure
springs.

4 6
Setting the working position

8 Remove the drive belt.


35460 Hold the chaff spreader by the grip rod (4).
Release the locking lever (6).
Swing the spreader to the desired position and lock it
6 on both sides in the oblong holes (7).
5
If necessary, set the tilt angle:
Loosen the screw (5). Set the desired tilt angle and
retighten the screws.
Tighten the drive belt.
Set the belt guide (8).

7
35462

13.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Adjusting the belt guide
11 10 Operate lever (12) and adjust the guide (11) so that
the V-belt does not touch the block of wood on the
guide.
12
After long harvesting operation, check that the
drive belt (10) is running freely and does not
come into contact with the guide (11). If
necessary, adjust the belt guide.

Swinging out the chaff spreader


14 13 In order to change sieves, the chaff spreader can be
35461
swung fully back.
Remove the drive belt.
Press the lever (14) to release the lock on the shaft
16 1 (13) and push the shaft (13) in as far as it will go.
1
Hold the chaff spreader by the grip rod.
Release the lock and swing the chaff spreader back
as far as it will go and lock it in place.
To swing the spreader back into working position,
proceed in reverse order. Then set the belt alignment by
15 pushing the shaft.

Spreader plates
2 34918 The straw distribution is determined by the position of the
straw plates. They can optionally be adjusted manually or
electrically.

Manual adjustment
The straw plates (2) are set to the desired position with
the adjusting lever (1) and are locked at (16). The screws
(15) should only be adjusted in exceptional cases.

Electrical adjustment (optional)


The spreader plates (2) can be electrically adjusted with
the switch (3). The setting of the spreader plates is
displayed by the indicator lights. The following positions
4 3 5 are possible:
35379
half left/full left indicator lamps (4)
half right/full right indicator lamps (5)

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.23


Threshing mechanism

1 2 3 4 5 6

11 10 9 8 7
30002

11 12

15 14 13
0039-2

13.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Key The returns auger then feeds these tailings to the two
returns elevators.
1 Stepped grain pan
2 Step
The incompletely threshed ears are rethreshed by the
3 Top sieve
paddle blades or de-awning plates of the returns ele-
4 Bottom sieve
vator and are delivered back to the stepped floor of
5 Sieve extension
the grain pan.
6 Straw walkers, 4 or 5 stages
7 Tailings return pan
The quantity of returns should be kept to a
8 Tailings elevator
minimum by careful selection of the grain sieve
9 Return grain pan
openings and adjustment of the fan speed.
10 Grain auger
11 Winnowing fan If the sieves are too fine or the winnowing air blast
12 Diffuser piece, top too weak, the returns elevators may be overloaded
13 Diffuser piece, bottom and output will be reduced.
14 Adjusting scale (left and right)
15 Adjusting lever The cleaning of the grain in the sieves is supported by
the blast of the air from below, which is generated by
Screening and winnowing the cleaning fan (11).
Model range 5650H 5680H is equipped with 5-stage Diffuser setting
straw walkers (6). Model range 5660HTS 5690HTS
is also equipped with the turbo separator, which The diffuser is factory-set to 20 mm (14). This setting
shortens the space available for the straw walkers. only needs to be changed e.g. in extreme harvesting
Consequently, this version is equipped with 4stage conditions.
straw walkers.

The mixture of grain, broken straw and chaff from the


concave and the straw walkers falls on to the grain
pan (1), where it is loosened and spread out by the
vibratory motion, so that it is transported evenly to the
sieves.

Dirt accumulating in the grain pan will result in


grain losses due to uneven feeding of the
sieves.

Initial coarse screening takes place at the steps (2) of


the grain pan.
Here, grains and short straw fall onto the top sieves,
while the chaff is blown out of the machine by the air
blast from the winnowing fan.

Grain and heavier chaff are separated from the light


chaff in the front section and fall to the bottom sieves
(4), whilst unthreshed heads are returned via the
sieve extension (5) to the tailings return pan (7).

Fine cleaning occurs in the grain sieves. The grains


falling through these sieves are passed via the grain
pan (9) to the grain auger (10).

Grain which has not been de-awned together with


some heavier residue fall off the rear of the sieve box
to the tailings returns pan (7), which conveys them to
the returns auger (tailings auger) (8).

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.25


Threshing mechanism
Setting the fan speed
3 The winnowing fan speed must always be set in
combination with the choice and adjustment of sieves.

1
Always set the speed that blows out a
maximum of chaff without causing any grain
loss.

2
To increase the fan speed: Press key + (1)
Cal Diag Setup
To reduce the fan speed: Press key (2)
35402

Activating/deactivating automatic reel


speed adjustment
(optional)

The automatic reel speed adjustment enables the reel


4 speed to be automatically adjusted to the travel speed.

Switching on/off
Press the keys Cal + and (5) simultaneously.

After activating automatic reel speed adjustment, the


Cal Diag Setup symbol appears next to the reel speed symbol (4)
to indicate automatic reel speed mode.

For further information, see the


5 "Commander Control 2000" section.

35402

13.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Changing and adjusting sieves
4 (Standard version)

Changing the sieves

The hand lever (1) for opening the rear cover


of the sieve box (2) is spring-loaded. After
5 5 opening the cover, return the lever to its
original position in order to partially relieve
3 the pressure springs in the locking system.
1 2
33952
Removing the sieves
Dismantle the sieves in the following order:

6 1. Sieve extension
2. Top sieves
3. Bottom sieves
7 and refit them in reverse order.

Removing the sieve extension


Switch on the sieve box light.
With the lever (1), unlock the back panel (2) of the
sieve box.
33954
Fold down the back panel (2) of the sieve box, and
return the lever (1) to its original position.
Remove the tubular sensor (3) and lay it safely to the
side.
Unscrew and remove the three fixing screws (4).
Loosen the two hook screws (5) on each sieve
extension.
Remove the spring pin (6) and release the sieve
adjusting rodding (7) of the sieve extension.
Remove the sieve extension (8) by the adjusting
levers and lay it on a clean surface.

8
33960

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.27


Threshing mechanism
Removing the top sieves

2 Unscrew and remove the two fixing screws (1) on the


two top sieves (2).
1
Pull the top sieves (2) out to the rear and lay them on
a clean surface.

Removing the bottom sieves


Loosen the four wing screws (3).
33960
Swivel the four clamps (4) 90 and engage them in the
notches of the side wall and middle ridge. Pull the
bottom sieves (5) out to the rear and lay them on a
clean surface.
Switch off the sieve box light.

5 5 Cleaning/inspecting the sieves

4 Remove foreign bodies from the sieves.


3 Blow out the sieves when dry.
Check the sieves for damage and deformation.
33958

Check the louvres of the sieves, and realign if


necessary.

3
Installing the bottom sieves
Push the bottom sieves as far as they will go into the
lower sieve box.
Turn the four clamps (4) 90 to release them from the
locked position, and secure them with the four wing
4 screws (3).
33438

Installing the top sieves


Push the top sieves in as far as they will go. Check
that they are installed in the correct position.
Insert the screws (1), but do not tighten yet.

13.28 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Installing the sieve extensions
2 Push the sieve extensions in as far as they will go.
1 Connect the sieve adjusting rodding (1) with the sieve
adjusting rods (2) of the top sieve (if necessary, adjust
the setting of the connecting head) and secure with
the spring pin (3).
3
Insert the hook screws (11) and secure with nuts.
Tighten the screws (8) of the top sieves.
Insert and tighten the three fixing screws (4).
Check the tubular sensor (7) for external damage and
reinstall.
33954

4 Adjusting the sieves

The sieve louvres must be adjusted in accordance


with the specifications in the threshing table.

When correctly set, the major proportion of the grains


should be separated on the first two thirds of the sieve
area.
7
6 5 To adjust, press down the levers (9) and (10) and engage
them in the desired position.
33952
Lever (10): Top sieve adjustment
Lever (9): Sieve extension adjustment

8 To check the setting, measure the sieve hole size or


verify with a gauge.
Fold up the back panel of the sieve box (5) and lock
with lever (6).
Switch off the sieve box light.

10 9

33960

11
35508

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.29


Threshing mechanism
Changing and adjusting sieves
Electrical sieve adjustment

Changing the sieves


The hand lever (1) for opening the rear cover
of the sieve box (2) is spring-loaded. After
opening the cover, return the lever to its
original position in order to partially relieve
3 the pressure springs in the locking system.
1 2
Removing the sieves
33952 Dismantle the sieves in the following order:

1. Sieve extension
2. Top sieves
3. Bottom sieves

and refit in reverse order.

Removing the sieve extensions


With the lever (1), unlock the back panel (2) of the
sieve box.
4
Fold down the back panel (2) of the sieve box, and
return the lever (1) to its original position.
33953
Remove the tubular sensor (3) and lay it safely on the
side.
Unscrew and remove the three fixing screws (4).
Loosen the two hook screws (5) on each sieve
9 extension.
5 6 Remove the coupling fork of the adjusting rodding (9).
5 Pull the sieve extensions (6) out by the adjusting
levers and lay them on a clean surface.

Removing the top sieves


4 Always remove the fixing screws (8) from
35449 both sieves, even if only one sieve is to be
removed. Otherwise the sieve adjusting
mechanism may be damaged.

7 Unscrew and remove the two fixing screws (8) on


each of the two top sieves (7).
8

33960

13.30 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Fully open the top sieves: operate the servomotor with
button (6) until it strikes the end stop.
1
The sieve adjusting balls (1) are thereby released
from the ball retaining sockets (2) on the sieves.
The sieves are moved one step further back

Pull the top sieves out towards the rear and lay them
on a clear surface.

2
35038 Removing the bottom sieves
Always release and pivot the clamps (4) on
3 both sieves, even if you are only removing
one sieve. Otherwise, damage to the sieve
adjustment mechanism is possible.

Release the four wing screws (5).


Turn the two clamps (4) on the two lower sieves (3)
90 and engage them in the notches on the side panel
4 and central ridge.
Fully open the lower sieves: operate the servomotor
5 with button (7) until the end stop.

The
33958
sieve adjusting balls (1) are thereby released
from the ball retaining sockets (2) on the sieves.
The sieves are moved one step further back.

Pull the bottom sieves out towards the rear and lay
them on a clear surface.
Switch off the sieve box light.

Cleaning/inspecting the sieves

4 5 Remove foreign bodies from the sieves.


Blow out the sieves when dry.
33438 Check the sieves for damage and deformation and
align if necessary.
Check the basic setting of the sieves, and realign if
necessary.

33992

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.31


Threshing mechanism
Basic setting of the sieves
1 Top sieves and bottom sieves
X1
The distance (X1) from the front edge of the top sieve (1)
to the bore centre of the ball retaining socket (2) is
26.2 mm. This distance corresponds to a clearance (X2)
of 25.6 mm between the ball retaining socket (2) and the
end stop (3).

3 Make sure that the louvres of the left and right-


hand sieve are opened the same amount.
2
X2 If necessary, modify the distances slightly.
33490
After adjusting, retighten the lock-nuts.

Installing the bottom sieves and top sieves


Clean the guide rails and sieves.
4 5 Fully open the sieve adjusters with buttons (4) and (6).
Push in both bottom sieves as far as they will go.
Fully close the sieve adjuster with button (7).

6 7 The sieve adjusting balls (8) engage in the ball


retaining sockets (9) and pull the bottom sieves
forward.
33992
Fix the bottom sieves with the clamps and wing
screws.
Push in both top sieves as far as they will go.
Fully close the sieve extension with button (5).

The sieve adjusting balls (8) engage in the ball


retaining sockets (9) and pull the top sieves
forward.
9
Fit the four fixing screws in the top sieves.

8
33980

13.32 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Installing the sieve extensions
Push in the sieve extensions (3) as far as they
1 will go.
2 3 Insert the pin in the coupling fork of the
adjusting rodding (1).
Insert hook screws (2) and tighten with nuts.
Insert and tighten the three fixing screws (4).
Check the tubular sensor for external damage
and reinstall.

4
35449 Calibration and sieve adjustment
For calibration and sieve adjustment, see the
section on the "Commander Control 2000"
Switch on the sieve box light with button (5).
5

Notes:
Calibration is only possible if the sieve box light
is on.
The maximum time of 5 minutes specified for
calibration must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
calibration will be automatically aborted.
33992 Always make sure that the louvres of the left
and right-hand sieves are opened the same
amount.
If necessary, modify the basic setting slightly.
The sieves must be clean for calibration.
Remove stalks and foreign bodies.

Checking the settings


Set the sieve hole size successively to 4, 8 and
12 mm and check.

In the event of deviations, check the basic


setting and repeat the calibration.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.33


Threshing mechanism
Setting the sieve extensions
The louvres of the sieve extensions are manually
adjustable independently of the top and bottom sieves.
The relevant specifications are provided in the threshing
table.
1
Set the desired louvre position with the handwheels (1).
Turn anti-clockwise to increase the louvre gap.
Turn clockwise to reduce the louvre gap.

35449
Emergency adjustment

Before carrying out an emergency adjustment, first


check the relevant fuses and relays.

With the standard equipment version, if the Commander


3 4 2 Control 2000 fails, the sieves can be adjusted by means
of the buttons on the rear left of the combine harvester.
Pushbutton functions:
(2) Sieve box light ON/OFF
(3) Top sieve OPEN
(4) Top sieve CLOSED
5 6 (5) Bottom sieve UP
(6) Bottom sieve DOWN
33992
Press button (2) to switch the sieve box light on.
Press buttons (3), (4), (5) and (6) to adjust the sieves.
Use the handwheels (1) if necessary to adjust the
louvres of the sieve extension.
Press button (2) again to switch off the sieve box light.

13.34 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Grain tank
The grain tank is filled by the grain elevator (1) and the
transverse delivery auger (2), which takes the grain from
the elevator head and transports it evenly into the grain
tank.

Observe the safety instructions.

Before all work on the grain tank, switch


1 off the engine and remove the ignition
key.
33442
Never reach into a working elevator.
Always use a push-rod to clear blockages
in the grain tank.

3
"Grain tank full" indicator
When the grain touches the sensor (3), the indicator light
2 No. 5 in the central instrument cluster is flashing and the
panoramic light is activated in short intervals.
4 When the grain touches the sensor (2), the indicator light
No. 5 in the central instrument cluster lights continuously,
the horn is sounded and the panoramic light is permanent
31649 activated.

To test that the sensor is functioning correctly,


touch the sensor surface from underneath. The
indicators described above must be activated.
5 In particular with damp grain, the surface of the
sensor must be cleaned daily.

The grain tank light (4) can be operated with the ignition
switched on, using the switch on the control console.

Inspection flap
Grain samples can be taken from the grain tank by
31650
opening the hinged flap (5).

6
If a sample is taken when the grain tank is
almost full, the sample flap can only be closed
again when the tank is empty.

Inspection window
The inspection window (6) to the left of the driver's seat
enables the driver to make a visual check of the grain
level.

33906

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.35


Threshing mechanism
Accessible surfaces
1
To avoid accidents and damage caused
by treading on components, use only
the engine compartment steps and tread
areas fitted with black non-skid pads (1).

35393

ATTENTION!
2 Do not step on the cooling water and
charge air lines (2).

35585

Locking the grain tank cover

The grain tank cover is specially hinged so that it


can be opened from both front and back.
Gas struts (3) are fitted to assist in opening the
3 grain tank cover.

Observe and follow all general and special safety


instructions.

During transit and on public roads,


the grain tank cover must without fail
33744 be closed and correctly locked.
For all work on the grain tank, the
engine must be switched off and the
ignition key removed.
Never reach into running augers or
elevators.
Use a push-rod to clear any blockage
in the grain tank.

13.36 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Locking bolts, front (A) and (B)
B A
Stand on the right side platform to
release and lock the right-hand bolt (A).
Stand on the left platform to release or lock
the left-hand bolt (B).

The lock is released by turning the bolt (4) manually 180.


The bolt is retracted by the curved path (5) and engages
on the flat surface (3).

90050

The bolt is spring-loaded.


4
The grain tank cover can be swung up at the front, using
the rear locks as hinges and swivels.

3 Never release all four locks at once,


and never lift the grain tank cover on
or off.

5 30599

To close, press the grain tank cover down against the


pressure of the gas strut and close both locks correctly.
1
Rear lock

Access to the grain tank from the engine compartment is


only required during servicing or repairs.

Therefore the rear locks can only be released with a tool.


To do so, loosen the hexagon head screws (1) until the
cover can be lifted.
The gas struts provide only slight support assistance for
30600 rear opening. The front locking bolts now act as hinges
and swivels. Secure the open cover with the prop (2).

Make sure that the props (2) are safely


2 and correctly fixed and engaged.

After closing the cover, the hexagon head screws (1)


must be retightened correctly.

90028

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.37


Threshing mechanism
Grain tank light
1 The grain tank light is installed on a pivoted mounting
2 and is switched on and off by switch (1) when the
ignition is switched on.

Retracting/extending the grain tank


extension

No other persons may be in the hazard


area around moving parts while the grain
33938 tank extension is being retracted or raised.
The grain tank extension must be operated
by only one person.
The grain tank extension is retracted and
raised with the engine on using the lifting
cylinder powered by the working
hydraulics.
No loose parts or objects may be located
in the area of movement of the grain tank
extension.

Important

In case of transport driving the working master switch


(3) must be switched off, the grain tank extension must
be fully retracted and the grain tank cover must be
closed and locked. Check by visual inspection. A
warning/notice to this effect is also provided in the
drivers cab. Make sure that this notice is always in
place and clearly legible. If the extension is raised while
working, make sure that it cannot hit any low overhead
cables, bridges or similar obstacles.

Iftanktheextension
grain tank cover is open or if the grain
is extended, the warning
message "grain tank extension extended"
occurs at Commander Control 2000 when
ground speed 2,0 km/h.

Operation

The grain tank extension must only be


extended or retracted when grain tank is
empty.

Drive the grain tank extension to the desired position


with switch (2).

13.38 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Note

The grain tank is raised max. 350 mm.


In the extended position, dimension X is approx. 370 mm.
The extension is fully retracted when edge (3) rests on
3 the grain tank cover plate (4).
4
Before carrying out any work on the grain
tank extension, its surrounding parts, the
working hydraulics (disconnecting pipes,
X repairing leaks etc.) or changing the
32842 hydraulic oil, the grain tank extension must
be fully retracted.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.39


Threshing mechanism

3 Cover plate adjustment


1
The cover plate (1) is designed to guarantee optimal
operation in its factory-set position (2). However, this
2 position can be adjusted (3) (4) to vary the quantity of
grain conveyed.

4 (3) = Maximum grain delivery


(4) = Minimum grain delivery

If necessary, for crop that does not flow freely (e.g. grass
seed) the clearance can be increased. However, the gap
must not be set so large that it causes damage to the
31653
drive system due to overloading.

5 We recommend that you set the cover plate to


the narrow position when harvesting crop that
flows freely and that you raise it when
processing wet crop or crop that does not flow
freely.

If the crop is difficult to discharge, reduce


the engine speed to avoid overloading the
drive components.
6
Grain tank discharge pipe
When driving on public roads, the grain tank
33995 discharge pipe (5) must be swung inboard
and mechanically locked in the transport
position. In addition it must be checked
7 manually whether the latch at the support (6)
of the grain tank discharge pipe is engaged.

8 Swinging the grain tank discharge pipe outboard:


Press key (7). The grain tank discharge pipe is
unlocked and swings outboard for about 7 seconds.
The indicator lamp (9) on the central instrument
cluster lights up.

A full grain tank discharge tube requires much


longer to swing outboard. If it has not swung out
far enough after 7 seconds, press key (7) again.
35402
Both when swinging the discharge pipe in and
out, the movement can be stopped by pressing
buttons (7) or (8) again.
Swinging the grain tank discharge pipe inboard:
Press button (8). The grain tank discharge pipe is
9 unlocked and swings inboard for about 7 seconds.
The indicator lamp (9) on the central instrument cluster
lights up.

If the grain tank discharge tube is not locked in


position after pressing key (8) for the first time,
press the key again.
Proper locking of the grain tank discharge
pipe can only be checked by a visual
30506
inspection at (6).

13.40 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Emptying the grain tank
1
Always observe the safety regulations before
activating the grain tank emptying system.

The grain tank can be emptied while the


combine harvester is moving or at rest, and the
grain tank discharge pipe can be in any outboard
2 position. The grain tank discharge pipe must be
unlocked.

Never leave the driver's seat during the


33995 emptying process. Therefore:
Make sure that nobody is in the hazard
zone/swinging range of the grain tank
3 discharge tube.

The grain tank clutch cannot be engaged when


the grain tank discharge tube (1) is swung fully
inboard.
Swing the grain tank discharge tube (1) outboard.
Open the protective flap (3) to allow the pushbutton
(foot-switch) (4) to be operated.

The outlet hose (2) must not lie on the grain


4 33910 during emptying.

Activate emptying by pressing the pushbutton (4) with


5 your foot.

Press the button again to stop the emptying


process.

Symbol (5) flashes while the clutch is in the


process of engaging/disengaging and remains
constantly lit when the clutch is engaged.

After completing the emptying process, protect the


foot-switch (4) again with the protective flap (3).

35402

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.41


Threshing mechanism
Fully emptying the grain tank

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Empty the stone trap.


Open the following cleaning flaps:

1 Below the tank:


Athe cover of the grain auger (1)
the cover of the returns elevator auger (2)
2
On the grain elevator:
33758 the cleaning flap (3)

On the grain tank discharge auger/discharge pipe:


the cleaning flaps (4)

On the returns elevator:


the cleaning flaps (5), (6) and (7).

Close the side flaps on the combine harvester.

Never reach into the openings when the


3 machines running!
31656
Allow the threshing mechanism and the grain tank
discharge system to run briefly so that any grain
residues can fall out.
Switch off the engine!
Remove any remaining grain (by, for example, sucking it
out).

Thoroughly clean the grain tank when changing


crops and, in particular, before threshing grain to
be used as seed.
4
After maintenance and cleaning, close the flaps again and
secure the locks with spring clips.
35509

7 33983

13.42 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Grain elevator
The grain elevator has two inspection and service flaps
(1) and (3).

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition


key.

After opening these flaps (1), the tension of the chain can
be checked, and the chain can be inspected for dirt and
cleaned if necessary.
1
2 Never put your hands or any tools through
31656
these openings in the elevator when the
engine is running.

3
Checking the chain tension

The tension of the elevator chain must be


checked at regular intervals.

The chain should be tensioned such that it is still


possible to shift the chain laterally by hand at the
chain wheel (2). If the tension is too slack, the
carrier plates will hit the elevator shaft.
If the tension is too high, the wear on the chains
31657
and sprockets will be increased, and grain
breakage will be caused in the elevator trough
(grain pan).

4 Reach into the service aperture (1) and check whether


the chain is tensioned such that it is still possible to just
shift the chain laterally by hand on the chain wheel (2).

Retightening the chain


5
Detach block tightener (5).
Loosen counter nut and adjust the two tightening
screws (4) at the elevator head such that the
6 conveyor chain is properly tensioned.

33807 Always adjust both tightening screws evenly.


Do not overtighten the chain: it should still be possible
to move it laterally on the lower sprocket.

If the chain is overtightened, the shaft of the


elevator chain will be overloaded: the result may
be wear of the bearing and rupture of the shaft.
Through adjusting the chain tension it is necessary to
retighten the drive chain (6). For this purpose the block
tightener (5) shall be adjusted and tightened accordingly
again.

The length of the drive chain (6) must be


possibly adjusted by removing or inserting of
one half chain link.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.43


Threshing mechanism
Returns elevator
Adjusting the speed
1
The speed of the returns elevator (tailings elevator) can
be adjusted by selecting the pulley used by the drive
belt (1).

Large V-belt pulley = 800 rpm


Small V-belt pulley = 1100 rpm

Moving the drive belt from pulley to pulley


2

90074
When the V-belt is moved, tensioning pulley (2)
must also be displaced axially. For this purpose
move spacer sleeve on the clamp screw.

After moving the drive belt to the other


3 pulley, the speed must be calibrated and
the speed tolerance must be reset.

35407

Friction insert/baffle plates


7 Friction insert (6) is mounted ex factory. Instead of the
friction insert mounted at the safety flap (5), the baffle
plate (4) supplied in the toolbox must be mounted in case
of pressure-sensitive grain/crop. Also refer to the
specifications in the threshing chart.

6 The friction insert is disawning non-threshed


grain.
4
5 To clear blockages, all 3 flaps on each returns elevator
32096 can be opened.

7 5 Note the position of the pressure tab (7) for


the safety flap (5). The short leg of the tab
must press against the flap (5).
35

Observe the dimension for the initial tension of the


pressure spring (8).

L0046

13.44 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
berlastsicherung

In case of returns elevator overload the safety flap (1) is


being forced outwards. When the flap opens, switch (2) is
activated and the information is routed to the combined
2 instrument gauge.
1 At the combined instrument gauge the control light (3) is
lit.

Select idling speed, and then switch off the


engine and remove the ignition key. Then
close the safety flap (1).
31660

Cleaning the returns elevator


30506
Strictly observe the safety regulations.
Never put your hands or any tools in th
elevators while the engine is running.

4 The returns elevator has three service and cleaning flaps


(1), (4) and (5).

1 Switch off the engine and remove the ignition


key before cleaning the elevators.

Open the flaps, check the inside of the grain elevator


for dirt and clean as necessary.
After cleaning, close the flaps carefully.
5 33983

Cleaning the conveyor augers


The elevator augers are accessible from the underside.
The cleaning flaps can be removed.
6
Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key
before cleaning the augers.
After cleaning, close the flaps carefully.
The cover must engage securely in the swivel
7 holder (6).
Secure the 2 clamps with the spring clips (7).

31662

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.45


Threshing mechanism
Trouble shooting

To prevent problems and malfunctions during operation,


please observe the following points:

When changing crops, especially in the case of seed


crops, the threshing section, sieves, winnowing fan
and grain tank must be thoroughly cleaned.
Always check that all settings correspond to the
specifications given in the section on "threshing
section adjustments".
Perform all necessary maintenance work at the
specified intervals. Please refer to the section on
maintenance of the threshing section.

Strictly follow all safety instructions


and regulations.
Always switch off the engine (and remove the
ignition key) before carrying out cleaning
and maintenance work.
Before starting the engine, make sure that
no-one is in the danger zone around the
combine harvester and that all inspection
covers and other covers and cladding panels
are refitted and locked into position.

Drum wrap-around
Proceed as follows if crops wrap around the threshing
drum under unfavourable harvesting conditions:

Stop the combine harvester. Disengage the threshing


section and cutting table.
Keep key (1) pressed for three seconds. The concave
is opening completely at front and rear.
Extend turbo separator completely.
1 Attach reversing device (3) to the threshing drum shaft
at the left machine side. Turn threshing drum
clockwise and remove crops wrapped around the
2 drum.
If the crops wrapped around the drum cannot be
removed, open the stone trap and the lateral covers
and remove the blocking threshing residues.

Ensure that the reversing device (3) is


removed again after the failure has been
3 eliminated.

Remove the reversing device (3), close stone trap and


cover again.
Start the engine and engage the threshing
mechanism.
Press Setup key + or (2): The concave clearances
adjusted before will be restored.
35594 Move turbo separator into original position.

13.46 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Drum wrapping Drum speed too low or ground travel Check the basic setting see adjustment table.
speed too high If crop is damp, increase drum speed, or reduce
forward speed if necessary.
Threshing gap too narrow with high Open the concave as far as possible without
throughput causing grain loss in the threshing section or on
the straw walkers.
Damp crop Drive slower.
Uneven intake Set the cutting angle further back.

Excessive Drive belt slipping Adjust the idling pulleys to the specified setting.
variations in drum Clean the belt and pulleys.
speed Throughput too high Reduce forward speed and match drum speed
to the crop.
Concave/drum clearance too small. Slightly open the concave inlet and outlet.
Engine cannot attain the required revs. Check whether the engine speed switch is set
to position nominal speed.
Contact our customer service.
Check the adjustment of the cutting table. Set
Uneven crop feed. the cutting angle further back.
Install auger extension.

Unadequate Crop not yet ready for threshing. If possible, wait until the crop ripens fully.
threshing Uneven feed to drum. Check the cutting table/crop elevator settings.
(grain left in ears)
Wrongly adjusted concave clearance Check the basic setting against the threshing
and drum speed. adjustment table.
Threshing drum bars or concave bars Check the threshing drum bars and concave
damaged or worn. bars for damage and wear, and replace if
necessary.

Broken grain in tank Drum speed too high and concave Check/correct settings against the threshing
clearance too narrow. adjustment table.
Too many returns Open the lower sieve more.
Fan speed is too high Decrease fan speed.
De-awner engaged. s Disengage the de-awner.
Elevator chain too slack/tight. Adjust chain tension.
Drum out-of-balance. Check rasp bars on drum for damage.
If necessary, clean drum.
Friction plates in the returns pan. Remove the friction plates.
Excessive speed at the returns Adjust to low speed.
elevator.
The lower sieve is adjusted too Open the lower sieve more.
narrowly

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.47


Threshing mechanism
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Blockage in straw Engine power too weak. Check air filter, fuel filter and injector pump.
walkers Speed of the straw walker shaft too Check engine speed/belt tension.
(check functioning of low.
straw warning
Crop too damp (on slope). If necessary, fit additional guide ribs to the straw
signals)
walkers.
Straw blockage in the chopper. Check chopper knife wear.
Adjust the tension of the clutch belt.
Open the counterknife in progressive steps.

Grain losses at the Very high straw content. Reduce forward speed.
straw walkers Check the speed of the straw walker shaft.
Grain ejected by the threshing drum Check that the deflector flap is correctly mounted
and rear beater. and undamaged.
Straw walker overload. Drive more slowly.
Straw walker blockage. Clean the straw walkers.
Threshing section not optimally Correct the threshing section settings:
adjusted. reduce concave clearance, increase drum
speed.

Excessive grain Too much short straw on sieves, Reduce drum speed; open concave slightly.
losses at the sieves because the threshing section is set
too close.
Heavy matting on the sieves. Open sieves. Increase fan speed.
Sieve set too fine. Open sieves.
Fan speed too high. Reduce fan speed.
Check the adjustment of the diffuser.

Dirty grain Too much short straw. Reduce drum speed; open concave slightly.
Louvres too far open. Set louvres to narrower opening.
Insufficient winnowing air blast. Increase fan speed.
Grain in winnowing fan. Clean fan.
Check the adjustment of the diffuser.

Uneven supply to Crop too damp, high proportion of Clean concave and grain pan.
the sieves green material: concave and grain pan
dirty.

Sieve box Sieves loose. Check sieve mountings.


knocking Sieve box suspension mounting or Check that all screws of the sieve box
drive defective. suspension mounting are securely tightened.
Check the settings of the sieve box drive.

Too much short Drum speed too high and concave Reduce the drum speed. Open concave slightly.
straw and chaff clearance too low.
in the returns Top sieve and sieve extension open Set louvres to narrower position or increase air
too far. flow.

Too much grain Top and bottom sieve set too narrow. Open louvres.
in the returns Sieves dirty. Clean sieves.
Fan speed too high. Reduce speed.

13.48 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Threshing mechanism
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Inadequate Drum speed too low and concave Increase drum speed. Reduce concave
de-awning clearance too high. clearance.
Engage de-awner plates.
Check mountings of the de-awner plates.
If possible, wait for the crop to ripen.
Fit friction plates in the returns elevator.

Insufficient cleaning Grains are lying in front of the fan Clean the fan above the service aperture.
rotor.

Elevator clogged In case of a clogged elevator (ratchet Clean the fan above the service aperture.
(Warning: coupling is responding) grains are After removal of the blocking the cover of
the ratchet coupling falling from the grain auger into the fan the fan duct must be opened and the
must be automatically duct. grains in front of the fan must be
released removed. (see also problem dirty grain)
if the auger is
jammed)
Open the lower flap on the elevator and clear the
blockage run auger and elevator until fully
emptied.
Check the drive of the grain auger and elevator
head.
Check the fan shaft and clean if necessary.

Check that the grain level monitor of the grain


Grain tank too full. tank is working correctly.
Unload the grain tank in good time.
Grain throughput too high or grain Reduce forward speed.
too damp.
Ratchet coupling responds too soon. Check the ratchet coupling.

Returns elevator Too many tailings/returns. Adjust the threshing section.


clogged Too much green material in the Correct the cutting table adjustment.
returns.
Sieve/air flow setting incorrect. Correct the setting.
Returns elevator speed too low. Shift belt to higher-speed pulley.

Grain tank Cover plate above the unloading auger Lower cover plate (before filling the grain tank).
unloading failure is set too high.
Drive belt too slack. Check grain tank clutch and belt tension.
Chain for grain tank discharge tube too Check and correct chain tension.
slack.
Blockage in discharge tube. The discharge hose from the discharge tube
must always hang freely.
Dirty up-pipe and discharge tube. Clean the up-pipe and discharge tube.
Wet crop must be emptied after finishing
threshing, because otherwise deposits will cake
and compact in the grain tank when travelling
with empty grain tank.
It is prohibited to drive on public roads
with a full grain tank.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13.49


Threshing mechanism
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Excessive belt wear Machine/function group overloaded. Drive more slowly.


Belt too slack. Set belt tension to specification.
Rust or oil on the belt pulleys. Clean belt with washing-up liquid.
Wrong belt fitted. Only use authorised replacement belts.
Belt incorrectly aligned. Check belt alignment and adjust if necessary.

Uneven feed to the Excessive clearance between crop Tighten the conveyer chain and lengthen if
drum elevator chain and cutting table auger. necessary.
Belt incorrectly tensioned. Check and correct belt tension.
Cutting angle too far forward. Set the cutting angle further back.

Broken and Threshing drum speed too low. Increase threshing drum speed.
unthreshed ear tips Damaged threshing drum bar Replace bars.
in the grain tank
Concave is opened too wide Adjust concave clearance narrower.
Concave is damaged. Eliminate damage, check the basic concave
adjustment at the same time, readjust if
necessary.
Unsuitable concave (wire clearance Install proper concave.
too large)*
Dry period during growth. Thresh more aggressively:
Fungal disease. Adjust the concave to a narrower setting
(in this case it is advantageous to have a
narrower concave clearance at the front)
Increase the threshing drum speed
Close the de-awner flaps
Note:
In these settings, a compromise must be
found between excessive grain breaking and
insufficient threshing: if only 1 residual grain
remains in 1 ear tip, you should not thresh
more aggressively. Too many healthy grains
would be destroyed. If 3 grains remains in
an ear tip, you can thresh more
aggressively.

* For durum wheat a wire clearance of e.g. 11mm is required


(Standard = 14mm)
(Nordic countries = 16mm)

13.50 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Chapter 14

Basic adjustments
on the threshing section

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 14.1


Basic adjustments on the threshing section
Factory adjustment of the combine Normal threshing:
harvester Crop: fully ripened
Weather: good: not too wet, not too dry.
Threshing drum speed: 1000 rpm
Speed setting: select the appropriate speed in
Concave clearance: in notch 3 at front and rear the speed column
Hinged de-awners open Concave: as per concave clearance column
Top sieve: 12 mm
Top sieve extension: 14 mm
Easy threshing:
Bottom sieve: 10 mm Crop: fully ripened
Fan speed: 700 rpm Weather : good: dry, brittle straw
Turbo separator speed: 790 rpm Speed setting: select the appropriate speed in
the speed column
Turbo separator clearance: middle position
Concave: Possibly open the concave a little
Returns elevator fitted with friction insert at both front and rear
Returns elevator speed: 1100 rpm

The infinitely variable adjustment and the threshing Professional use:


drum speed indicator together with electric monitor-ing The combine is operated with the attachments
of all important functions by the Commander Control specifically available for the various types of crop.
2000 system make it possible to achieve a very high
threshing output.

The Commander Control 2000 monitors the speeds of


The threshing units should always be set
according to the following rule of thumb:
the straw walker shaft, of the returns elevator and of As vigorous as necessary and as gentle as
the grain elevator. possible!
Any reduction in performance is indicated
visually and acoustically. Proceed as follows to adjust settings:
Find out where the losses occur when driving at
The grain-loss monitor uses sensors to monitor the uniform speed in order to locate the cause.
loss of grain from the straw-walker and the sieve box
as a function of the driving speed. Only change one setting (e.g. gradually adjust the
threshing drum speed by 50 rpm).
Drive about 50 m before assessing the effect of the
Advice on using the adjustment tables for change, taking care to ensure comparable
different crops threshing conditions (vegetation, slope, etc.).

The tables on the following pages refer to the basic Now change the next setting if necessary.
settings of the threshing section as based on practical
experience. Note:
Vigorous threshing results in more broken grain,
These settings may have to be adjusted,
depending on the actual harvest conditions.
short straw in the tank and a higher load on the
sieves.
Gentle threshing under severe conditions results
The following explanations will permit better
in poor threshing of the ears.
understanding of the setting tables:
Gentle threshing under normal conditions results
Difficult threshing: in a higher throughput.
Crop: partially or unevenly ripened
Weather: bad: moist straw
Speed setting: select the appropriate speed in
the speed column
Concave: possibly close the concave a little
further at the front

14.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Basic adjustments on the threshing section
Good threshing is recognisable by: The forward speed can be increased if the
No broken grain in tank above measures do not produce a considerable
No broken pieces of straw improvement with an unfavourable straw/grain ratio
Very few returns (proportion of straw too small).

No poorly de-awned grain


Low grain losses at straw walkers and sieve box Returns
Returns are re-threshed by the baffle plates and friction
A distinction must be made between broken grain due inserts of the returns elevators so that sieves and
to excessively severe threshing and incomplete cleaning section are relieved.
threshing if discrepancies are observed when
assessing the results of threshing.
Returns should consist mainly of incompletely
threshed tailings.
Broken grain
Too high a drum speed together with a small concave
offset produces too severe a threshing. Shaker shoe
There should not be any grains in the chaff on the
Result: Broken grain in tank sieve extension, nor on the last 20 cm of the top sieve.
Cleaning fan overloaded through too
many tailings on the sieves
Grain losses in the sieves After each adjustment, check the result before
proceeding to any further adjustments.

Remedy: Reduce drum speed; if this is


ineffective, increase the concave Adjustment and setting of sieves
clearance slightly.
Open the chaffer sieves and check the
angle of their extension.
The louvre sieve must be set so that all grains
pass through before reaching the end of the
Adjust the winnowing fan sieve.
Reduce forward speed.
The grain sieve will be overloaded with chaff if
Note: Broken grain may also be caused by the louvres are open too wide.
incorrect tension on the elevator chain. Too small a louvre setting results in loss of grain
and overloading of the returns, particularly in
Incomplete threshing the case of the bottom sieve.
Threshing will be incomplete if the drum speed is too
low and this is combined with too great a concave Standard equipment
clearance.
Top sieve: Louvre-type sieve (small US louvres)
Bottom sieve: Louvre-type sieve (small US louvres)
Result : Unthreshed ears
Overloading of the elevators and shaker
shoe
Grain loss in the shaker shoe Additional equipment

Remedy: Increase drum speed, then reduce Various round-hole and frogmouth sieves are
concave clearance. Repeat adjustment available. See price list.
if necessary.
Ensure even loading of the drum.
Check concave and threshing drum for
damage.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 14.3


Basic adjustments on the threshing section
Turbo separator

Harvesting conditions/Threshing result Action


Damp straw and straw walker losses. Threshing must be more vigorous: swing the turbo separator
further inwards.

Dry straw, partly crushed, Swing the turbo separator outwards progressively.
slight sieve box losses.

Straw very brittle, straw crushed, Swing the turbo separator fully outwards.
minor straw walker losses but higher
sieve box losses.

Notes on turbo separator setting


Start threshing with a "vigorous" turbo separator setting. In the event of straw breakage, progressively swing
the turbo separator outwards.

If threshing is too vigorous with normal straw or slightly brittle straw, the straw will be severely crushed and will
clump too densely on the straw walkers. The result will be straw walker losses.

After finishing threshing, always allow the machine to run for about 30 seconds until empty.
Otherwise the straw will clog the frogmouth sieve at the dropping step.

If the machine is switched off too rapidly, long straw will slip from the first straw walker stage to the grain
pan. The long straw can then catch in the sieves on restarting. Short straw can fall through the sieves and
enter the grain tank.

Notes on cutting angle adjustment


For standing crop, set the cutting angle as far back as possible. This setting ensures that the threshing drum is fed
evenly, thereby increasing throughput.

14.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Beans

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 500 10 10 open slewed out 650 750 12 ... 16 14 mm 10 ... 14* 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Difficult 600 10 10 open slewed out 650 750 12 ... 16 14 mm 10 ... 14* 800
threshing (6)** (6)** 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Easy 400* 12 12 open slewed out 650 750 12 ... 16 14 mm 10 ... 14* 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates

** Speed can only be achieved with reducing gear


** For crops which have not ripened uniformly
Recommended: Miscellaneous:
Speed reducing gear for Professional use
threshing drum
Bottom sieve: round hole dia. 13 mm / dia. 15 mm
Fit anti-wrapping protection to the (more effective separation of the pods)
upper shaft of the crop elevator.
A maize concave is required for large beans.

14.5
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.6
CCM

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 650 5 5 slewed out 700 800 32 or 52 800
threshing 380 rpm with window (slow)
(slow) insert without
friction plates
Difficult 700 3 3 slewed out 700 800 32 or 52 800
threshing 380 rpm with window (slow)
(slow) insert without
friction plates
Easy 600 7 7 slewed out 700 800 32 or 52 800
threshing 380 rpm with window (slow)
(slow) insert without
friction plates

Required optional equipment: Miscellaneous:


CCM concave Important: Raise intake chain in conveyor channel
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Drum cover plates The rear axle must be weighted when Remove every second rotary chopper
Maize deflector curtain in straw walker driving on roads with installed maize header. knife
chamber Remove chopper shear bar and friction
Returns cover plates
Frogmouth sieve 32 or 52 mm with or without
window insert or with 80 x 40 mm frogmouth, Removal of the window insert
depending on cob rate increases the cob rate
Stone trap cover
Chopper speed reduction Remove the smoothing shaft from the
Maize header crop elevator (feed passage)
Higher speed for filling auger
In damp harvesting conditions, use a grain tank
emptying aid.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Peas

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 500 600 13 13 open slewed out 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Difficult 500 600 8 8 open slewed out 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Easy 500 600 13 13 open slewed out 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates

Required optional equipment: Miscellaneous:


Special earlifter (Messrs. Schuhmacher) For more effective separation of the pods:
Pick-up if required (Messrs. Bouchard) Bottom sieve: round hole dia. 11 13 mm
(depending on diameter of peas)
If impurities are present in large quantities:
Perforated plates for grain elevator and grain
augera coclea per la granella

14.7
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.8
Grass

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 1000 3 3 open 790 rpm 500 600 2 ... 9** 7 ... 9 5 ... 7 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
slewed inboard raised without
friction plates
Difficult 1150 1 1 closed if 790 rpm 500 600 2 ... 9** 7 ... 9 5 ... 7 1100
threshing necessary (fast) slightly (fast)
slewed inboard raised without
friction plates
Easy 950 4 4 open 790 rpm 500 600 2 ... 9** 7 ... 9 5 ... 7 800
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
slewed inboard raised without
friction plates

** Use fan cover if required (on request)


** Depending on type of seed
Miscellaneous:
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Round-hole sieves with diameters of


4, 5.5 and 7 mm are available if high
purity is required.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Oats

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 950 5 5 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) (fast)
middle notch without
friction plates
Difficult 1050 3 3 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) (fast)
slew inboard without
from middle friction plates
in stages
Easy 850 7 7 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing (fast) (fast)
slew outwards without
from middle friction plates
in stages

14.9
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.10
Grain maize

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 500 7 7 slewed out 750 850 12 ... 14 12 ... 14 15 18 800
threshing 380 rpm (slow)
(slow) without
friction plates
Difficult 600 5 5 slewed out 750 850 12 ... 14 12 ... 14 15 18 800
threshing 380 rpm (slow)
(slow) without
friction plates
Easy 400* 8 8 slewed out 750 850 12 ... 14 12 ... 14 15 18 800
threshing 380 rpm (slow)
(slow) without
friction plates
* Speed can only be achieved with reducing gear
Miscellaneous:
Required optional equipment:
Important: Raise intake chain in conveyor channel
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Classic maize concave The rear axle must be weighted when Remove every second rotary chopper
Drum cover plates driving on roads with installed maize header. knife
Maize deflector curtain in straw-walker Remove chopper shear bar and friction
chamber plates
Top sieve: very long maize louvre
Bottom sieve: round hole dia. 15 18 Recommended:
Stone trap cover Speed reducing gear for threshing drum
Chopper speed reduction Remove the smoothing shaft from the
Maize header crop elevator (feed passage).
Higher speed for filling auger
If grain humidity is less than 20%, remove the
lower sieves and fit a cover to the tailings return
pan.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Linseed

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 1150 2 2 closed bottom notch 550 650 5 ... 9 10 12 mm 3 ... 7 1100
threshing 790 rpm slightly (fast)
(fast) raised with
friction plates
Difficult 1200 1 3 closed bottom notch 550 650 5 ... 9 10 12 mm 3 ... 7 1100
threshing 790 rpm slightly (fast)
(fast) raised with
friction plates
Easy 1100 3 3 closed bottom notch 550 650 5 ... 9 10 12 mm 3 ... 7 1100
threshing 790 rpm slightly (fast)
(fast) raised with
friction plates

Required optional equipment: Additional settings:


Anti-wrapping guard on upper elevator shaft Remove stone trap from cutting table Important:
(unless linseed has been sprayed to death Feed auger set to lowest position Cutting knife and tines must not be
and is unripe) Fit deflectors on feed auger in closest worn. The cutting knife must be sharp
Cover for feed tines position (use smooth cutters if necessary).
(Grain Guard, order No. 1601-2222) Remove chopper shear bars and friction
plates

14.11
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.12
Rape

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 600 12 12 open slewed out 500 700 7 ... 10 closed, 6 ... 8 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Difficult 700 12 12 open slewed out 500 700 7 ... 10 closed, 6 ... 8 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Easy 500 12 12 open slewed out 500 700 7 ... 10 closed, 6 ... 8 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates

Required optional equipment: Additional settings: Miscellaneous:


Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Rape cutting table Raise intake auger by 20 mm If high purity is required:


Hood lining Remove friction plates in chopper housing Bottom sieve: round hole dia. 5.5 7 mm
Remove shear bar
Preferably: Remove every second rotary chopper knife Important:
Speed-reducing gear for threshing drum The concave, returns elevator, top and
Important: bottom sieve must be checked daily for
The chopper knives must be sharp! soiling if the crop is not completely ripe.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Rice

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 500 5 5 790 rpm 600 700 10 ... 12 10 ... 12 8 ... 10 800
threshing (fast) (slow)
middle notch without
friction plates
Difficult 700 3 3 790 rpm 600 700 10 ... 12 10 ... 12 8 ... 10 800
threshing (fast) (slow)
middle notch without
friction plates
Easy 500 6 6 790 rpm 600 700 10 ... 12 10 ... 12 8 ... 10 800
threshing (fast) (slow)
middle notch without
friction plates

Required optional equipment: Miscellaneous:


Rice threshing unit Important: Recommended:
Crawlers (wet rice) The sieves must be checked for soiling Speed reducing gear for threshing drum
Agitator and discharge aid (wet rice) every day when harvesting wet rice and
Auger coating kit cleaned if necessary.
Reinforced returns elevator V2A
Humped beater
Straw-walker rakes
Multi-finger intake auger
Anti-wrapping protection of the upper straw duct
shaft if required.

14.13
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.14
Rye

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 900 1100 6 6 open 790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised without
friction plates
Difficult 900 1100 4 6 open 790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised without
friction plates
Easy 900 1100 7 7 open 380/790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 800
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised without
friction plates

Additional settings:
Turbo separator:
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Straw dry, brittle Slew outwards in stages


Straw green, damp Slew inboard in stages

Straw chopper:
Straw green Swing shear bar outwards in stages
Remove friction plates if necessary if straw resists cutting

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Summer barley

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 950 3 3 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 14 mm 10 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised poss. with
friction plates
Difficult 1050 1 4 possibly 790 rpm 650 750 12 14 mm 10 1100
threshing closed (fast) slightly (fast)
* raised with
friction plates
Easy 900 5 5 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 14 mm 10 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
** raised without
friction plates

* swing inwards progressively from the mid-position


** swing outwards progressively from the mid-position

14.15
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.16
Summer wheat

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 1000 4 4 open 790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised with
friction plates
Difficult 1100 1 4 possibly 790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 1100
threshing closed (fast) slightly (fast)
* raised with
friction plates
Easy 900 6 6 open 790 rpm 650 750 10 ... 12 14 mm 8 ... 10 800
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
** raised with
friction plates

* swing inwards progressively from the mid-position


** swing outwards progressively from the mid-position
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Sunflowers

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 350* 13 13 open slewed out 600 700 12 ... 14 closed, 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Difficult 500 13 13 open slewed out 600 700 12 ... 14 closed, 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Easy 250* 13 13 open slewed out 600 700 12 ... 14 closed, 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates

* Speed can only be achieved with reducing gear

Required optional equipment: Additional settings: Miscellaneous:


Sunflower cutting table Intake auger raised by 20 mm To improve productivity:
Maize concave Remove angled rail on intake auger Top sieve with maize louvre
Raise elevator chain in elevator
For professional use: Swing chopper shear bar out completely The grain concave can be used when
Speed reducing gear for threshing drum harvesting small areas.

14.17
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.18
Soya

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 500 6 6 slewed out 700 800 10 ... 13 14 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Difficult 700 4 4 slewed out 700 800 10 ... 13 14 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
Easy 400* 8 8 slewed out 700 800 10 ... 13 14 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing 380 rpm slightly (slow)
(slow) raised without
friction plates
* Speed can only be achieved with reducing gear

Required optional equipment: Miscellaneous:


Basic adjustments on the threshing section

Flexible soya cutting table For professional use: The drum cover plates must be removed if
Classic maize concave Top sieve: long maize louvre the crop is severely contaminated with
Bottom sieve: round hole dia. 11 13 weeds (if fitted for threshing maize).
In cases with high proportion of impurities: Speed reducing gear for threshing drum
Perforated plates for grain elevator and
grain auger
Additional settings:
Remove chopper shear bar and friction plates

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Triticale

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 950 5 5 open 790 rpm 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised without
friction plates
Difficult 1050 3 3 possibly 790 rpm 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing closed (fast) slightly (fast)
* raised with
friction plates
Easy 850 7 7 open 790 rpm 700 750 12 ... 14 14 16 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing **(fast) slightly (fast)
*** raised without
friction plates

Additional settings: * swing inwards progressively from the mid-position


** possibly 380
The chopper shear bar must be swung outwards in
stages when chopping large volumes of straw. *** swing outwards progressively from the mid-position

14.19
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.20
Wheat

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 950 4 4 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised without
friction plates
Difficult 1100 1 4 * possibly 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing closed (fast) slightly (fast)
* raised poss. with
friction plates
Easy 800 6 6 open 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 800
threshing ** slightly (fast)
*** raised without
friction plates

Additional settings: * swing inwards progressively from the mid-position


* The de-awner must be closed if the tips of the ears ** possibly 380
are not threshed.
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

*** swing outwards progressively from the mid-position


Important:
The working area of the concave is reduced by the
de-awner.
Loss of grain in the straw walkers begins at an earlier
stage and the proportion of broken grain increases.

An acceptable compromise between threshing and


broken grain should therefore be selected for the
setting.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Winter barley

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 1000 3 3 possibly 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing closed (fast) slightly (fast)
middle notch raised with
(45 mm) friction plates
Difficult 1150 1 3 closed 790 rpm 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing * slightly (fast)
raised with
friction plates
Easy 900 4 4 open 380 U/min 650 750 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing ** slightly (fast)
raised with
friction plates

* swing inwards progressively from the mid-position


** swing outwards progressively from the mid-position

14.21
Basic adjustments on the threshing section
14.22
Spelt wheat

Threshing Threshing drum Turbo Fan Top sieve Bottom Returns


conditions separator sieve elevator
Speed Concave De-awner Clearance and Speed Sieve Extension Sieve Speed
[rpm] clearance speed [rpm] hole size hole size [rpm]
notch Grain weight [mm] [mm]
light heavy
front rear
Normal 800 6 6 open 790 rpm 650 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) (fast)
middle notch without
(45 mm) friction plates
Difficult 900 4 4 open 790 rpm 700 12 ... 14 14 mm 10 ... 12 1100
threshing (fast) (fast)
slewed inboard without
friction plates
Easy 700 10 10 open 790 rpm 600 10 ... 12 14 mm 10 ... 12 reduced
threshing (fast)
slewed out without
friction plates

Note:
Basic adjustments on the threshing section

In dry harvesting conditions it is possible to


harvest without lower sieves; in this case the
returns should be covered.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system

Chapter 15

Hydraulic system

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.1


Hydraulic system
The hydraulic and pneumatic lines are
Safety instructions correctly routed and installed by the
manufacturer.
Do not change or mismatch the connections.
The hydraulic system is under very high pressure. All fittings and the length and quality of hose
Only personnel with specialised knowledge and lines must conform to specifications.
experience in hydraulics may carry out Do not make any changes to the shape and
maintenance and/or repair work on the hydraulic position of the lines and mponents, and do not
system. use any unidentifiable parts.
Hydraulic oil escaping from a small hole is almost
After completing maintenance work, refit the
invisible. Therefore use a piece of cardboard to
protective devices and guards and set them to
help locate any leak.
the operational position.
Protect your hands and body from contact with
pressurised hydraulic oil. Check all safety stickers for completeness and
Before carrying out any maintenance and/or repair legibility. Replace any illegible or missing
work on the hydraulic system it must always be stickers at the specified locations.
depressurised, and coupled attachments must be
lowered.
Always observe the following rules:
When working on the hydraulic system, always
switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and
prevent the possibility of combine breakaway (e.g. Only use authorised oils for changing or
wheel chocks, handbrake). Also, if possible, park topping up the oil.
the combine on a horizontal surface.
Unauthorised oils may foam and disable the
When connecting the hydraulic systems, make automatic venting system in the hydraulic oil
sure that the hydraulic hoses are connected as tank.
specified.
Always clean the hydraulic oil tank carefully
If the connections are mismatched, the actuator before checking or topping up the oil level.
functions will be inverted (e.g. the cutting table and
pick-up reel will be raised instead of lowered and With the exception of oil and filter
vice versa). changing, never try to carry out any
maintenance or repairs on the hydraulic
Regularly check hydraulic hose lines, hydraulic system yourself. This work must be
pipes and screwed couplings for leaks, ageing and performed by a specialised workshop.
outwardly visible damage.
Oil escaping under pressure can cause severe Always depressurise the hydraulic lines to the
injury or fire. cutting table (lower the pick-up reel) before
Any replacement parts required must conform to disengaging the clutches.
the technical specifications of the system
manufacturer and to the relevant standards and
regulations. After all work on the hydraulic system,
Wear protective clothing and use guards and carry out a function test.
protective equipment.
Fluids escaping at high pressure (hydraulic oil, Work on the high-pressure circuit of
fuel, etc.) can cut the skin and cause severe injury. the ground drive hydraulics may only
be performed by a specialised
If any fluid has cut through the skin it must be workshop. Incorrect or inadequate
removed immediately by a doctor familiar with ventilation can result in the destruction
injuries of this nature. Otherwise, severe of the motor or pump.
infections may be caused.
Doctors who have no experience of these
injuries should obtain the relevant information
from a competent medical source (hospitals,
emergency services, paramedics etc.).

15.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system
Components of the system
1 The hydraulic system consists of the following
8 components:
2
3-way pump (3)
Ground-drive pump (2)
Ground drive motor
3
Hydraulic tank (4) with return filter (5)
Control-valve block (6)
Line filter (7)
"Micro-top" oil filter (8)
34930 Oil coolers
Additional components for Balance option: pipe cooler
and pump at (1) flanged to the ground drive pump.
4
Pumps
The ground drive pump (2) and 3-way pump (3) are
flanged directly to the engine and are supplied with oil
from the hydraulic tank. They produce the operating
pressure for the hydraulic operating circuits.

5 Hydraulic operating circuits


The hydraulic system is divided into the following
33965 operating circuits:
Working hydraulics (cutting table etc.)
Steering hydraulics
Ground drive hydraulics

}
The individual circuits are independently supplied with
operating pressure by separate pumps.

6 Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank (4) receives the returned oil from the
function circuits and at the same time filters the hydraulic
oil through the built-in return filter (5).

34914 Oil cooling, Type 5670


The hydraulic oil flows through the following coolers:
Cooler mounted on the engine
Cooler in air duct
Pipe cooler (only with Balance system)
7
Oil cooling, Type 5680/90
The hydraulic oil flows through the following coolers:
Cooler mounted on the rotary cooling-air filter
Pipe cooler (only with Balance system)

Line filter (7)


Complete filter 1605 - 4940
34934
Filter cartridge 1605 - 5740

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.3


Hydraulic system
Control-valve block
The control-valve block with the control valves for the
individual functions of the working hydraulics is located
behind the side flap (1) on the left behind the driver's
stand.
1 The valves for the Balance system are located on the
drive axle.

WARNING:
Do not attempt any maintenance or
33963 adjustment of any part of the control block
or hydraulic system. No maintenance or
adjustment is required.

In the event of any problems, please contact


your authorised dealer or your specialised
workshop.

Emergency operation of the solenoid valves


In the event of a failure or defect in the electrical system:

Drive the combine harvester on to a flat surface


and secure it against rolling:
Switch off the combine safely
Disengage all clutches
Apply the handbrake
Place wheel chocks under the wheels.

Make sure that no-one is in the danger zone.


This situation is particularly dangerous,
because the drives are actuated during direct
operation of the valves, i.e.
the grain tank pipe swings in or out
the cutting table and pick-up reel are
adjusted, and the driver has to leave the
driver's seat briefly to perform this
operation.

During this operation, the engine of the combine


harvester must only be run at idling revs.
However, in order to raise a wide cutting table,
the engine speed will have to be increased.

The best course of action is to obtain assistance from a


second person, who must always remain in sight for
signalling and co-ordination.

15.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system
In the event of a failure or fault in the electric system,
direct operation of the valve is possible:
by pressing the extensions of the control pistons.
The control pistons are located under the rubber
sleeves on the front of the valves.

WARNING:
This manual operating mode, acting directly
on the valves, is only intended for
emergencies and must never be used for
long-term continuous use.

Normal version
1 Operation on the front side of the control block
(1) Swivel cutting mechanism to the right
(2) Grain tank extension: extend (raise)
2
7 (3) Pick-up reel, horizontal adjustment: forward
(4) Grain tank discharge pipe: swivel outboard
3 (5) Pick-up reel vertical adjustment: lower
(6) Cutting table: raise
4 (7) Cutting angle: forward

Operation on the rear side of the control block


5
(1) Swivel cutting mechanism to the left
6
34914 (2) Grain tank extension: retract (lower)
(3) Pick-up reel, horizontal adjustment: back
(4) Grain tank discharge pipe: swivel inboard
(5) Pick-up reel vertical adjustment: raise
(6) Cutting table: lower
(7) Cutting angle: back

Balance version
Operation on the front side of the control block
(1) Cutting angle: forward
(2) Grain tank extension: extend (raise)
(3) Pick-up reel, horizontal adjustment: forward
(4) Grain tank discharge pipe: swivel outboard
1 (5) Pick-up reel vertical adjustment: lower
(6) Cutting table: raise
2 (7) Swivel cutting table to side

Operation on the rear side of the control block


3 (1) Cutting angle: back
(2) Grain tank extension: retract (lower)
7 4 (3) Pick-up reel, horizontal adjustment: back
(4) Grain tank discharge pipe: swivel inboard
6 5 (5) Pick-up reel vertical adjustment: raise
(6) Cutting table: lower
34914 (7) Swivel cutting table to side

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.5


Hydraulic system
Hydraulic oil
1 The hydraulic oil system is factory-filled with hydraulic oil
conforming to DIN 51524 H-LP46 (ISO).

Bearing in mind the various additives used by different


manufacturers, we recommend that you always use the
same type of oil. The following oils can be used:
Hydraulic oils
Brand-name hydraulic oils conforming to H-LP46
3 2 (ISO) or higher viscosities are recommended for
countries with very hot climates.
34919

Engine oil
Deutz oil DQC3 or ACEA E4-99
(Viscosity 10W40FE)

Keep all parts and equipment scrupu-lously


clean when refilling/topping up with oil. Only use
clean and filtered oils.

Checking the oil level


Check the oil level every 10 operating hours.

Before checking the oil level:


Lower the cutting table and reel.
Set the balance system to the neutral position.

Check the oil level with the dipstick (2).

The oil level must be between the Min. and


Max. marks.

If necessary, top up the oil (possibly via return filter).

Before topping up, carefully clean the hydraulic


oil tank (3) and filler neck (1).

Filling capacity for oil change:


5670 without Balance: approx. 50 litres
5670 with Balance: approx. 75 litres
5680/90 approx. 75 litres

Oil change

First oil change after 50 operating hours, then


after 500 operating hours but at least once a
year (see also Maintenance table).

Retract all hydraulic cylinders.


Open the hydraulic drain line (4) and drain the
contents of the oil tank.
4
35588

15.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system
Changing the return filter (2) (with each oil change).

When filling with oil, make sure that all parts of


the system are scrupulously clean. Only use
clean and filtered oils.

Plug the oil drain line (1). Pour in oil via the filler neck
(3) up to the maximum mark on the dipstick (4).
Start the engine and operate all hydraulic systems in
order to bleed the system.
Check the oil level and top up with oil if necessary.
1
Never start the engine when the oil level in
35588
the tank is below the minimum mark on the
dipstick (damage to the oil pumps).

CAUTION
After each oil change, the ground drive
2 hydraulics must be thoroughly bled. This
work can only be performed in a specialised
workshop.
3

Changing the return filter


4 Change the return filter (2) with each oil change.
34919 Check the filter housing. Clean it if any deposits are
visible.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.7


Hydraulic system
Replacing the oil filter of the ground drive
hydraulics
Place an oil tray under the Linde pump.
Loosen the hydraulic oil filter (5).
Fill the new filter with hydraulic oil.
5
Moisten the rubber seal at the filter with hydraulic oil.
Screw in the new filter and tighten by hand.

Make sure that the gear shift lever is in


neutral position.
35587
It is not allowed for other persons to stay
within the perimeter of the machine.

Only use qualified and trained personnel.

Place gear shift lever in neutral position.


Place the Commander Stick in neutral position.
Start the engine and let run for a few minutes.
Pull hand brake and shortly move the Commander
Stick to the front and to the rear respectively while the
engine is running at idle.
Turn off the engine and let the machine stand still for
about 1 hour (air bubbles in the oil can thereby
escape to the tank).
Check oil level in the hydraulic oil tank, refill hydraulic
oil if necessary.

15.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system
Clean line filter (1)
Clean filter cartridge (3) after the first 50 operating hours,
then every 200 operating hours as follows:
1
The hydraulic system must be
depressurised, front attachments must be
lowered and the start key must be pulled out.

The combine harvester must be secured


against accidental moving.

Observe all safety instructions!


34934
The filter must be replaced at the specified
service intervals and overhauling
procedures.
If this is not observed, system components
may be damaged.
5
Unscrew lines from line filter while observing the o-
rings.
_ Unscrew screwed end (5) with two open-ended
wrenches (width across flats 32, 41) from the filter
housing (2) while observing o-ring (4).
4 Clean filter housing (2) with diesel oil or petroleum
ether.
Obturate the opening of the screwed end (5) with a
plug and clean the filter element (3) in diesel oil or
petroleum ether with a soft brush.
3
Remove the plug and blow through filter element (3)
with compressed air from inside to outside. Repeat in
case of heavy contamination.
Replace complete line filter in case of visible damage
at the filter element.
2 Check all o-rings for proper condition, replace if
necessary.
Carefully slide filter housing (2) over the filter element,
screw on to the screwed end and tighten while
observing the o-ring (4).
35589
ATTENTION
Observe the direction of flow!

Screw together line filter (1) with the lines again while
observing the proper direction of flow (A-B) and the o-
rings.
Commission hydraulic system and check line filter for
leaks.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.9


Hydraulic system
Replacing line filter (1)
The line filter needs to be replaced in case of:
Damage
1 Replacement of the hydraulic motor
Replacement of the ground drive pump
After 1000 operating hours

For replacement of the line filter see section Cleaning of


line filter.

34934

15.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system
Oil temperature
2 The oil temperature is displayed in the hydraulic oil
temperature display (2) and may reach a maximum of 95
C in constant operation.

Since the cooling of the hydraulic circuit is designed for


average loads, a brief transient temperature rise above
the maximum value is permissible (heavy drive load, in
transport mode, during hill-climbing at high outside
temperatures).

35457 A warning is emitted on reaching the limit.

Excessive oil temperature


(above maximum value)

2 If you observe a constant rise in the oil


temperature above the usual value at normal
load without any visible reasons, switch off
the combine and inform the repair workshop.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for
damage caused by driving at excessively
high oil temperature.

33021

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.11


Hydraulic system
Driving hydraulics, faults and remedies

In general, it is advisable to leave


troubleshooting to a specialised workshop in
order to avoid secondary damage.

Noise
Normally, even under very high load, the ground drive
hydraulics runs very quietly. Therefore, unusually loud
noises indicate a fault.

If high-pitched screeching noises are heard


when the ground drive is subjected to high load,
stop immediately and switch off the engine.
Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank and
the flow of oil to the pump casing.

These noises are caused by a failure in the oil feed line,


i.e. during the intake stroke of the piston pump. If the
leaked oil can no longer be replaced by the feed oil, the
pressure on the intake side drops below boiling point (at
the relevant temperature) and the oil becomes gasified.
1 High-pitched noises occur when the gas bubbles
collapse. Therefore these noises do not indicate
mechanical damage.
33965
Check the filters for contamination. Replace the oil filter of
the ground drive hydraulics (2) and the filter cartridge of the
return filter (1) if necessary. Clean the return filter housing if
required. Check line filter above the fuel tank for
contamination, clean if necessary. Replenish oil.

Once the reason for the lack of oil has been rectified, the
pump will against function correctly.
2 3 Zero point adjustment
If the combine harvester fails to come to a stop when the
commander stick is in Neutral, the zero position can be
corrected at the hydraulic pump:
Correct the zero position at the bearing (2) of the
Bowden cable.
Secure the Bowden cable with lock-nuts.
Thereafter, the zero point should be set by a specialised
workshop.
35587
Pump displacement sluggish or blocked

Proceed as follows to locate the fault:

Check that the Bowden cable runs smoothly.


Check the zero point setting. If the zero position
keeps changing, the oil flow may be impeded by dirt
particles. Ask a specialised workshop to change the
oil and clean the system.

15.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Hydraulic system

Fault Remedy

Oil temperature exceeds limit value. A message Stop immediately.


(warning) and signal are triggered. Clean the oil cooler.
Check the oil level.
Call specialised workshop.

Hydraulic oil foams. Oil level in hydraulic tank is too low:


Replenish oil and bleed system.
Water in the system:
Change oil and bleed system (call on a
specialised workshop).

Combine fails to move either forward or in Check that a gear is engaged.


reverse when the drive lever is operated. Too little oil in tank.

Inadequate traction Call repair workshop.

Precautions for winter storage of the system


In general, it is advisable to leave
troubleshooting to a specialised To prevent corrosion in the oil tank, it should be
workshop in order to avoid completely filled to the brim for winter storage of the
secondary damage. combine.

Pumps and motor housings must be sprayed with


anti-corrosion compound or greased.

Before starting up the combine after winter storage,


the oil must be drained to the Max. mark.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15.13


Hydraulic system
Steering
A safe steering behaviour can only be guaranteed when
the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank is sufficient.

Emergency steering characteristics


If, for example, the combine harvester has to be towed
due to an engine failure, it can be steered manually, but
this will require more force than usual.

35438 Troubleshooting for the working and steering


hydraulics
The working and steering hydraulic circuits are fed from
the hydraulic oil tank (1).

Before trouble shooting it should be checked whether:


- the oil level in the hydraulic tank is sufficient.,
- the working master switch at the control console is
in position ON.,
- the electric system is working properly (fuses, relays
and plug-in connectors).
Then bleed the system by turning the steering wheel
and operating all control levers several times with the
engine running.
After bleeding the system, check that the pick-up reel
is parallel with the cutting table trough; if necessary,
bleed the reel cylinder.
1 2
Checking the hydraulic functions
In general, after working on the hydraulic system, an
operating check is required.
Check the oil level with the dipstick (2)
Remove any oil residue from pumps, lines, motors
etc.
Start the engine.
33965 Check the operation of the hydraulic system.
Switch off the engine and check the entire system for
leaks.

15.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment

Chapter 16

Electrical Equipment

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.1


Electrical Equipment
Notes

16.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment
Miscellaneous:

1. When working on the electrical system, always switch


of the battery master switch and disconnect the cable
from the negative pole of the battery.

2. Make sure that the battery is connected in the correct


sequence. First connect the positive pole and then the
negative.

3. Take care with battery gases, since they are highly


explosive. Avoid generating sparks or naked flames
close to batteries.

4. Use only fuses of the specified rating. The use of


incorrect fuses can result in major damage to the
electrical system.

5. Before starting any electric welding work, the cables of


the alternator and battery must be disconnected.
The earthing point for the welding apparatus must be
located as close as possible to the joint to be welded,
and a good earth connection must be established.

6. Take care when handling battery acid (toxic and


corrosive).

7. Only operate the starter for a limited time. Otherwise


the coil will overheat. Allow the starter to cool.

8. Do not place any tools on the battery.

9. Always lay the electrical wiring so that it cannot catch


any moving parts in order to prevent abrasion or other
mechanical damage.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.3


Electrical Equipment
System Overview of Electrical System

The electrical system consists of the following main components:


1 Common earth terminal, engine frame

2 A1, A2 electronic motor controller EMR

3 Control cabinet

4 A4 control unit EMR-D

5 A30 Commander Control 2000

6 A24 control unit balance II

7 A31 LH1000 hectare counter

8 Control unit air condition/heating/ventilation

9 A32 steering column or A21 throughput display

10 B40 central instrument cluster

11 Control console

12 A19 control unit balance II

13 G1 battery, S1 battery main switch

14 K101 hazard flasher relay

15 A8 powershift device for actuators of belt couplings

16 A10 control unit all-wheel drive (optional)

17 Fuses

18 Relays

19 A3 control unit EMR-D

20 A12 control unit autocontrol

21 A13 logic module: starter blocking/reversing horn/all-wheel drive/differential lock

22 A25 CAN module deflector adjustment

23 A26 CAN module straw guide plate adjustment

24 A27 CAN module sieve adjustment

16.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

11

34939-4

13 12

14 15 16 22 23 24

MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23 SOLARI 1.she

21

20

19

H001 H002

17 18

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.5


Electrical Equipment
Battery master switch (1)
1 The battery master switch (1) is located below the right-
hand side flap, to the right of the battery. The key of the
battery master switch can be removed with the switch set
to position Off.

33996

Battery

The standard version uses low-maintenance or


maintenance-free batteries. The term "low-maintenance"
or "maintenance-free" refers to the acid level.

However, if maintenance is required or if the combine


harvester is fitted with a conventional battery that
requires maintenance, the instructions below must be
particularly observed.

32079 Take particular care during all work on the


battery.
The gases released by the battery are
explosive. Therefore keep the battery away
from sources of sparks or naked flame.
Do not smoke.
Do not spill acid on your skin or clothes.

Checking the acid level

Unscrew the screw plugs on the battery.


The acid level (2) must be 10 to 15 mm above the upper
surface of plates. Check with a wooden stick. If
necessary, top up with distilled water. Never fill with acid.
XXXXX Refit the screw plugs.

2 Immediately recharge the battery if it is weak.

32080

16.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment
Connecting/disconnecting the battery

To prevent short-circuits and damage to the


battery, strictly follow the operating
sequence specified below:

Connecting: First connect the positive cable to


the positive terminal of the battery.
Then connect the earth cable to the
negative terminal of the battery.

Disconnecting: First remove the earth cable from


the negative terminal of the battery.
Then disconnect the positive cable
from the positive terminal of the
battery.

Keep the terminal studs and clamps clean and


greased. Always fix the battery securely.

Due to the alternator on the engine, the


following instructions must be noted.

The engine must not be assist-started with a rapid


charger. Jump-start with an external battery.
When recharging the battery, make sure it is correctly
connected. If the poles are mismatched, diodes will be
destroyed.
Work may only be performed on conductive parts after
the battery has been disconnected.
To prevent damage to semiconductors, never check if
a wire is live by shorting it to ground.
If electric arc welding is required on the combine
harvester:
disconnect the battery, thereby breaking the
electrical circuit
dithe negative clip of the welding apparatus must be
fitted as close as possible to the weld.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.7


Electrical Equipment
Fuses, microrelays

Release the locks (1) and open the control cabinet


door (2).
The electric fuses (3) and micro-relays (4) are located
on the hinged frame (5).
1
If a current load fails, switch the load off and
check the fuse or microrelay.
Pull the fuse from its socket.
If the metal strip inside the transparent fuse
2 has melted, the fuse must always be
33968 replaced.
Only replace the fuse when the cause of the
fault has been remedied.
5
Never try to repair a blown fuse or to bridge
over the fuse contacts with a piece of metal
or wire etc.

If fuses blow repeatedly, have the part concerned


3 4 inspected by your specialised dealer.

16.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.9


Electrical Equipment
Fuse assignment in control cabinet
Left row Mddle row Right row
L M R

56-006

16.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment

34939-4

MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23 SOLARI 1.she

L M R

56-000

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.11


Electrical Equipment

34939-4

MED_ACAD*11/24/10 11:01 AM Rev:12.23 SOLARI 1.she

D1 D2 D3

56-000

16.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment
Relay assignment in control cabinet

56-007

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.13


Electrical Equipment

C0104

1 2
H1b H2b
H3b H4b
F1 F2

X5
X1 X2
H1a H2a

3 4 +12V
X6
GND-
4
F3 F4 R1 R2

R3 R4
X3 X4
H3a H4a

C0105

16.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Electrical Equipment
Integral load switching unit (A8)

14 Load relay
F1 F4 Fuses 30 A
F1 F5 Fuse 60 A
X1 X6 Plug-in connectors
H1b H4b LEDs, control input
H1a H4a LEDs, load output

Description:

Arrangement of the individual belt clutches (channels)

1 Threshing mechanism
2 Feed passage
3 Grain tank discharging
4 Straw chopper

Fuses:

F1 F4: 30 A Blade-type fuse for protecting the individual belt drive clutches (channels)
F1 F5: 60 A Lead-strip fuse for protecting the overall load current against short circuits

Indicators (LEDs):

H1b H4b: LEDs for indicating the switch status at the control input
(signals from the control unit) for belt clutches 1 4

Red: disengage
Green: engage

H1a H4a: LEDs for indicating the switch status at the load output
(connectors X1 X4) for belt clutches 1 4

Red: disengage
Green: engage

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 16.15


Electrical Equipment

Troubleshooting

Faults Possible causes Remedial measures

All clutches cannot be Main work switch off. Switch on the main work switch.
operated.
Charge control light is not Increase engine speed.
extinguished, engine speed is too low.

Engine speed is too high Reduce engine speed

Alternator faulty. Check the battery charge indicator lamp/check the


alternator and replace if necessary.

Fuses blown in switch unit A8. Check the fuses and replace if necessary.

Blade-type fuse 10A threshing


mechanism control in switch cabinet Check fuses, replace if necessary
F42 is defective.

Blade-type fuse 7,5A Commander


Control in switch cabinet F39 is Check fuses, replace if necessary.
defective

Blade-type fuses 30A / F1, F2, F3 or


One clutch cannot be F4 in the clutch control power unit are Check fuses, replace if necessary.
operated defective.

16.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance

Chapter 17

Maintenance

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.1


Maintenance Safety instructions

Safety instructions Ensure good lighting conditions in the


maintenance workshop.
Heavy parts must only be moved and lifted with
Always observe the safety notes in the section the aid of other people or with mechanical lifting
"Safety measures gear.
Ensure that all protective devices and safety and
warning devices are fully functional at all times.
All relevant accident prevention
Replace any missing or defective parts
regulations and safety measures must be
immediately.
strictly observed.

Personnel qualifications:
Work on the chassis, braking system and steering Engine
system may be carried out only by suitably trained
personnel! Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed rooms.
Employ only suitably trained or instructed Danger of poisoning by toxic fumes.
personnel. Clearly define the responsibilities of the Exhaust gases and other gases can cause serious
personnel with respect to operation, equipping, injuries or even death. Direct any such gases into
maintaining and repairing the combine harvester. the open air or ensure that the place of work is well
ventilated.
Before starting maintenance and repair work, make Always allow the engine to cool before starting any
yourself familiar with all necessary working work on the engine or other components which
procedures. become hot during operation.
Caution when draining hot oil or coolant. Risk of
Always use the existing steps and ladders, the
burns.
handles and the railings when climbing on to or from
the combine harvester.
Cooling system
Before carrying out any maintenance work on the
platform on the front right, unhook the rear left No welding work is permitted on components of
platform ladder and hook it to the front or use the cab the refrigerant circuit or in their immediate vicinity
emergency exit. Danger of poisoning by toxic gases!
The maximum ambient temperature of 80 C for
the refrigerant must not be exceeded.
Before starting any maintenance work:

Disengage the threshing mechanism and the


cutting table, switch off the engine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill, engage a gear and
apply the handbrake.
Place chocks under the front wheels. Remove the
ignition key and disconnect the cable from the
negative pole of the battery.

CAUTION

Do not perform any cleaning, maintenance and


adjusting operations on rotating augers and
conveyor parts.
Caution: do not reach blindly into invisible spaces
behind narrow openings.
Always wear tight-fitting clothing and gloves when
working on the machine Keep your hands, feet
and clothing clear of the danger zone around
moving parts.

17.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Safety instructions Maintenance
Keep fire-fighting equipment in the vicinity.
Lifting or jacking-up the combine After completing the welding work, allow the
harvester welded area to cool.

Remove any front attachment which is currently


Ensure that all parts are in good condition and that
mounted.
they are mounted directly.
To lift the combine, use only a lifting device with
guaranteed adequate load-bearing capacity. Repair any damage immediately and replace any worn
The necessary crane suspension points and or damaged parts!
jacking points are provided on the machine.
Never remain under a machine that is only After completion of the work, check all screws and
supported by mechanically or hydraulically nuts and tighten them if necessary.
operated jacks. Remove the front attachment or
added equipment.
Place suitable supports underneath the combine
Protective devices
harvester to ensure that it cannot drop and cause
accidents.
After completion of the work, in store all
To support the machine, do not use brick or protective devices again and ensure that
concrete breeze-blocks or similar building they are securely mounted.
materials that may give way under continuous
load. Use robust, wide, stable timber beams, steel
frameworks or similar systems appropriate to the
load.
Also check that you have not left any
For extra safety, leave the vehicle jack(s) at the
tools or parts on or in the combine
jacking point.
harvester.

Hydraulic couplings

Always observe the colour codes and/or the


numbers when connecting the hydraulic
couplings.
Incorrect connection of the hydraulic couplings
can result in malfunctions and thus in an
increased risk of accidents.

Keep hydraulic couplings clean, use protection covers.

Welding work

Thoroughly clean the combine harvester to


remove any crop residues.
Before starting electric arc welding, always
disconnect the battery cable and the cable
from the alternator. Connect the earth cable of
the arc welding apparatus as close as possible
to the welding point!

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.3


Maintenance Operating fluids and filling capacities

Operating fluids and filling capacities


Designation Capacity1) Fluid Level Change
(litres) Minimum requirement inspection 2) required
interval/hours interval/hours
Fuel tank approx. 555 Diesel; sulphur content less
daily
than 0.5% if possible
3) DEUTZ lube oil TLX-10W 40FE, or
Engine BF6M 1013FC 20 10 50 then
4) oils in compliance with Deutz quality
21
classes DQC-3 (ACEA E4-99)
every 2508)

Side gears 10 Gearbox oil MIL-L 2105 A 50 then


50 8)
Type ZNK 25 (API-GL 5) SAE 90 every 500
Manual gearbox 17 Gearbox oil MIL-L 2105 A 50 then
50 8)
Type ZNK 25 (API-GL 5) SAE 90 every 500
Threshing drum 1.0 Gearbox oil MIL-L 2105 A 50 then
100 8)
reduction gear (API-GL 5) SAE 90 every 500
Bevel gearbox at 0.75 Gearbox oil MIL-L 2105 A 50 then
100 6)
bottom of grain tank (API-GL 5) SAE 90 every 500

Hydraulic system Hydraulic oil DIN 51524 Part 2


8)
ca. 65 HLP46 (ISO) daily every 500

Brake fluid conforming


Brake hydraulics 0.3 to the requirements of 100 every 2 years
DOT 4, DOT 3 or SAE J 1703

Cooling system protective


Cooling system 55 daily every 2 years
agent, Part No. 01011490 (5l) or
AKROS Freeze 100% or
Farmflu
Compressor-type
cooling system 7) 1.8 kg Refrigerant R134a as needed
Compressor 7) 0.207 m 3 Refrigeration oil PGA as needed
Lubricating oil DIN 51501
Chains, joints as needed as needed as needed
L-AN 100

Lubricating grease 9) SAE EP-multipurpose grease NLG 2 as needed as needed

1) The specified fluid quantity is a guideline value. In the event of any discrepancy, the control devices take 6) Or after two years.
precedence. 7) Maintenance work on the compressor-type cab
2) Daily visual inspection for oil loss. cooling system must only be performed by a
3) Without filter change. specialist workshop.
4) With filter change. 8) Or annually.
5) In countries with high air temperatures, oils of higher viscosity can be used. 9) See lubrication plan.

17.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance intervals Maintenance
Maintenance intervals Tightening torques for the wheel nuts
Drive wheels 750 Nm
The work required with each maintenance interval is Steered wheels 310 Nm
described in the "Maintenance and Inspection Transport cart for
Schedule for SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Combine
cutting mechanism 3,6 - 4,8 m 170 Nm
Harvesters". At this point, we will only indicate the
most important tasks and the special factors to take Transport cart for
into account. cutting mechanism 5,4 - 7,2 m 310 Nm

The recommended maintenance intervals are


based on normal operating conditions. In Maintenance required during the running-in period
especially difficult conditions these intervals
must be shortened accordingly.
In addition to the "normal" maintenance laid
down in the "Maintenance and Inspection
For details of the maintenance work on the
cutting table, see the section "Cutting table".
Schedule for SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Combine
Harvesters", various additional tasks must
This work must be carried out in addition to
be performed during the first hours of
that described here.
operation.

Maintenance required before using the machine Motor oil level check daily.
for the first time Retighten the wheel nuts after 1, 5 and 20
Check all screwed fixings and tighten if necessary. operating hours and thereafter every 50 operating
Tighten the wheel nuts. hours.

Clean the water trap. Check the tension of the drive belts and chains
after 10 operating hours and adjust if necessary.
Check the oil levels in the gearboxes, hydraulic
system and brake system. Check the engine, hydraulic system and gearbox
for leaks.
Check coolant level in expansion tank.
Check that all screwed fixings are secure and
Check concentration of cooling system retighten if necessary.
preservative!
Check the tension of the drive belts and chains.
Check the warning devices. Also, during the first few days, particular care
must be taken with the following points:
Check that the protective devices and guards are
fitted and are in working order. Do not immediately run the engine at full revs.
Check the general road safety of the combine Do not overload the engine (work with reduced
harvester, front attachments and additional forward speed).
equipment: Constantly monitor the engine oil pressure.
Lights Do not switch off the engine directly from full load.
Turn-signal indicators and brake lights,
hazard warning lights
Brakes
Check the slipping clutches and adjust if
necessary.
Check the speeds and speed settings.
Drain the fuel pre-filter.

The maintenance required before first use will


generally be carried out by your dealer.

Please check that maintenance has been


duly completed with reference to the
handover declaration and by inspecting the
machine.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.5


Maintenance

17.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance

operating instructions

2
2
2
2

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.7


Maintenance Maintenance intervals

Release list DEUTZ lube oil quality stage DQC III-05

Manufacturer Lubricant type SAE class Availability


DEUTZ DEUTZ OIL TLX-10W40FE 10W-40 Europe
ADDINOL ADDINOL Super Truck MD 1048 10W-40 Europe, Asia
ADDINOL Ultra Truck MD 0538 5W-30 Europe, Asia
AGIP Agip Sigma Ultra TFE 10W-40 worldwide
Autol Valve Ultra FE 10W-40 Germany
Akros Akros Synth. Gold 10W-40 Europe
ARAL Aral MegaTurboral 10W-40 worldwide
Aral SuperTurboral 5W-30 worldwide
AVIA TURBOSYNTH HT-E 10W-40 Germany
BAYWA BayWa Super Truck 1040 MC 10W-40 South Germany
BayWa Turbo 4000 10W-40 South Germany
BP OIL International BP Vanellus E7 Plus 10W-40 Europe
BP Vanellus E7 Supreme 10W-40 Europe
BP Vanellus C8 Ultima 5W-30 Europe
Castrol Castrol Enduron Plus 5W-40 Europe, America,
Australie, Afrique du Sud
Castrol Enduron 10W-40 Europe, Amrique,
Australia, South Africa
Castrol Elexion 5W-30 USA
CEPSA EUROTRANS SHPD 10W-40 Spain, Portugal
CHEVRON Chevron Delo 400 Synthtic 5W-40 North America
DEA DEA Cronos Synth 5W-30 Germany, Europe
DEA Cronos Premium LD 10W-40 Germany, Europe
DEA Cronos Premium FX 10W-40 Europe
ESSO Essolube XTS 501 10W-40 Europe
FUCHS EUROPE Fuchs Titan Cargo MC 10W-40 worldwide
Fuchs Titan Unic Plus MC 10W-40 worldwide
MOBIL OIL Mobil Delvac 1 SHC 5W-40 Europe, SE Asia, -
Africa
Mobil Delvac 1 5W-40 worldwide
Mobil Delvac XHP Extra 10W-40 Europe, SE Asia
OMV AG OMV super Truck 5W-30 Europe
OMC truck FE plus 10W-40 Europe
Ravensberger Ravenol Performance Truck 10W-40 Germany
Schmierlvertrieb
Lube oil refinery Wintershall TFG 10W-40 Europe
Salzbergen
Shell International Shell Myrina TX/Shell Rimula Ultra 5W-30 Europe, designation
varies nationally

Shell Myrina TX/Shell Rimula Ul-tra 10W-40 Europe, designation


varies nationally
Texaco Ursa Super TDX10W-40 10W-40 Europe
Ursa Premium FE 5W-30 5W-30 Europe
TOTAL TOTAL RUBIA TIR 8600 10W-40 worldwide
EXPERTY 10W-40 worldwide

17.8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance intervals Maintenance
Instructions for diesel fuel handling

Never deplete the tank as otherwise it is


necessary to bleed the injection system.

It is recommended to replenish the fuel tank in the


evening after completion of daily threshing works in
order to avoid formation of condensation water in the
empty tank.

Fuel
35596
The diesel engines may only be operated with standard
1 = Summer diesel fuel diesel fuel in compliance with the specifications of the
2 = Winter diesel fuel relevant standard conditions. During the cold season with
X = % kerosene to be added temperatures below 0 it shall be observed to fill up only
Y = Ambient temperature in C winter diesel fuel guaranteeing correct engine operation
down to 20 .
If summer diesel fuel is used with low temperatures, the
paraffin molecules contained in the fuel will deposit in the
filters and thus inhibit fuel delivery to the injection pump.
In certain countries diesel fuels with special additives are
available suitable for temperatures also below 20 .
If there is no winter diesel fuel available (or in case of
availability, but with an ambient temperature below 20),
kerosene can be added with an percentage amount
according to the adjacent diagram.
First fill in the kerosene, then the diesel fuel such that
both fuels will mix only in the tank.
Contact the workshops of our authorised dealers and the
service station operators for any further information on
this subject.

Diesel engines produce exhaust gases, and


some components of these gases are known
for causing cancer or they may cause
abnormalities in newborns as well as other
reproduction damages.

Diesel fuel storing


Storing of the diesel fuel is of particular importance. The
storage tanks must not show any rust or other foulings
which may seriously damage the injection system after
refuelling the combine harvester.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.9


Maintenance
Daily maintenance The points of lubrication supplied by the
centralised lubrication system as well as their feed
Check the oil level in the engine and in the
lines shall be inspected daily. Additionally, all
hydraulic oil tank.
grease nipples not connected must be lubricated
Check the coolant level. manually according to the lubrication chart!
Clean radiator.
Clean the oil cooler and the condenser of the
compressor-type cab cooling system.
Clean engine compartment, engine, charge air
Other maintenance tasks are described in
the "Maintenance and Inspection Schedule
cooler, oil cooler and fuel cooler. for SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Combine
Harvesters".
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan.
Check shafts and rotating machine parts for any Maintenance required after the first 20 and 50
wrap-around and clear if necessary. operating hours
Empty the stone trap.
Check the tension of the crop elevator chain in the Change oil and oil filter in accordance with the
feed passage and retighten if necessary. Lubrication Plan and the Maintenance and
Check that the guards and protective devices are Inspection Schedule.
fitted and in working order. Maintenance work on the engine must be carried
Check the general road safety of the combine out in accordance with the separate instructions.
harvester and additional equipment. Check the engine, hydraulic system and gearbox
Fill the fuel tank. for leaks.
Check the pressure and condition of the tyres. Check that the air intake and exhaust system are
In the event of high dust levels, the fresh air filters securely fixed and have no leaks.
must be cleaned. Check that all screwed fixings are secure and
Check the fuel prefilter for water and impurities. If retighten if necessary.
necessary, drain and clean. Check the tension of the drive belts and chains
Drain the pressure vessel of the compressed air and correct if necessary.
system. Check the warning and safety systems.
Check chaff suction blower below at the rotary Retighten the wheel nuts.
sieve pan for clogging.
Check that the guards and protective systems are
Check fill level in the reservoir of the centralised fitted and in working order.
lubrication system. Replenish suitable lubricant Check hose caps of the engine cooling system
as necessary for firm fit.
Check the pressure-control valve of the
centralised lubrication system. In case of a
grease leakage the blocked point of lubrication
must be detected before the operation of the
combine harvester is continued, and the failure Maintenance required every 50 operating hours
must be remedied.
Maintenance work on the engine must be
ATTENTION! performed in accordance with the separate Engine
It is not admissible to obturate individual Manual.
lines of the centralised lubrication system Check the oil level in the gearboxes.
(e.g. a ruptured hose line) as thereby the
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan.
remaining points of lubrication of the
corresponding divider block will be also Check the tension of the V-belts and chains and
blocked. correct if necessary.
Retighten the wheel nuts.
Check the tyre pressures.

17.10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Maintenance required every 100 operating hours Maintenance required every 500 operating hours
or once a year
Maintenance work on the engine must be Change the oil in the hydraulic system.
performed in accordance with the separate Change the oil in the manual gearbox and side
Instructions. gears.
Check the oil level in the gearboxes. Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan.
Check the brake fluid level. Check the steering, track and bearing play of the
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan. steered wheels, and adjust if necessary.
Check the tension of the drive belts and chains Check the zero-point setting of the drive control
and correct if necessary. and adjust it if necessary.
Check the fixing, terminals and charge of the Check the gearshift and adjust if necessary.
battery. Change the filter cartridge of the ground drive
Check the grain elevator chain and retighten if hydraulics.
necessary. Check the screwed unions of the hydraulic system
Check the sealing brush on the rotary cooling-air for leaks, and check the high-pressure hoses for
filter and change if necessary. leaks and damage.
Drain dirt and water from the fuel tank sump.

Maintenance required after the first 50 hours


and thereafter every 250 operating hours or at
least once a year
Change engine oil.
Change engine oil filter.
Change gear oils (50h).

Maintenance required every 250 operating hours

Check and adjust the basic setting of the concave


and threshing drum.
Check the sieve box drive and rubber mount.
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan.
Check the reversing device.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.11


Maintenance Maintenance intervals

Maintenance required every 1000 operating Maintenance works to be carried out not later
hours than every two years
Engine maintenance must be performed in Change the brake fluid.
accordance with the separate Engine Manual. Replace the safety cartridge of the air filter.
Clean the fuel tank, strainer and filter cartridges. Replace the fresh air filter.
Change fuel filter. Replace the pipe oil filter of the hydraulic system.
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan. Change coolant.
Check the heater glow plugs and change if
necessary.

Daneben sind noch die tglichen


Wartungsarbeiten durchzufhren.
Antifreeze and coolant
Other maintenance tasks are described in The engine is provided with antifreezing compound
the "Maintenance and Inspection Schedule ex works.
for SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Combine
Harvesters". Before the cold season begins the coolant must be
checked for proper antifreeze protection and must
be adapted to the weather conditions / negative
degrees to be expected.
Maintenance as and when necessary
The fastening clamps of the cooling water hoses
Ask a specialised workshop to replace the fluid shall be checked for firm fit.
container of the compressor-type cab cooling Check the cooling water hoses for cracks and
system when the colour of the moisture indicator damage, replace if necessary.
changes.
Clean or replace the air filter cartridge.
Water quality for coolant
Clean or replace the fresh air filter.
Clean the evaporator of the compressor-type cab The values given below must not be exceeded. A test
cooling system. kit (order number 1213 0382) can be obtained from
DEUTZ Service to check the quality of the water
available.

Annual maintenance
Water quality min. max.
Check oil drain hose. ph-value at 20 C 6,5 8,5
Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan. Chloride ion content [mg/dm3] -100
Check the operation of the compressor-type cab Sulfate ion content [mg/dm3] -100
cooling system and cab heater. Carbonate hardness [dKH] -3
Total hardness [dKH] 312
Check the refrigerant level (check for leaks).
Check the warning and safety devices.
Check the belt guides and adjust if necessary.
Check the slipping clutches and adjust if Coolant preparation
necessary.
The preparation and monitoring of the coolant in
Check the basic setting of the threshing section
liquid-cooled engines is especially important because
and correct if necessary.
corrosion, cavitation and freezing can lead to engine
Check the engine speed. damage.
Check the straw walker speed. The coolant is prepared by admixing a cooling system
Drain condensate at the charge air cooler. protective agent with the cooling water.
The cooling system must be monitored continuously
(see 5.1). The water level and the cooling system
protective agent concentration should both be
checked.

17.12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Storage Maintenance
Cooling system preservative
The DEUTZ cooling system preservative can be
Cooling System Protection obtained in the form of casks under the ordering no.
01011490 (5 litres) or 12211500 (210 litres). They are
Protective Agent Protection against freezing to
free of nitrite, amine and phosphate and offer effective
[Vol %] [C] protection against corrosion, cavitation and freezing.
If the aforementioned cooling system preservative is
35 -22 not available, the following products can be used in
40 -28 exceptional cases.

45 -35 Manufacturer Product name


AVIA AVIA Antifreeze Extra
50 -45 ARAL Antifreeze Extra
BASF Glysantin G 48
DEA DEA antifreeze solvent
SHELL SHELLGlycoShell

The cooling system preservative in the coolant shall


not exceed or fall below the following concentration:

Cooling system protective agent Water


max. 45% by vol. 55%
min. 35% by vol. 65%

When nitrite-based cooling system agents


are mixed with with amine-based agents,
harmful nitrosamines are formed.

Cooling system protective agents must be


disposed of in accordance with anti-
pollution regulations.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.13


Maintenance
Storage Clean and lubricate all bearings. For joints and
bearings without lubrication system, apply a coat
Tasks to be performed at the end of the harvest of oil. Clean and grease the threads of setscrews.
season
Check all screws and pipe threads and retighten if
necessary.
Never put your hands in any slots during Spray the machine, including interior parts, with
machine is running rustproofing agent.
Run the compressor-type cab cooling system for a
Thoroughly clean the interior and exterior of the
short period every month. Otherwise, there is a
combine harvester, front attachments and
danger that the compressor shaft gland will dry out
additional equipment. Open all cleaning covers on
and allow refrigerant to escape.
auger troughs and elevators, and allow the
machines to run until completely empty.

If using high-pressure vehicle wash


Warning: This operation is only possible if
the engine has not been sealed with anti-
corrosion compound.
systems, do not aim the water jet directly
at the bearings, alternator, starter engine,
Repair or replace damaged components.
electrical control units and the reversing
device engine. Check all safety stickers for completeness and
legibility. Replace any illegible or missing stickers
Drive all hydraulic cylinders to the extended at the specified locations.
position and grease the shiny parts of the piston
Store the combine harvester in a room sheltered
rods. Then retract the cylinders again so that the
from the weather, and prop up to relieve the load
hydraulic system is depressurised. We recommend
on the tyres.
that you leave the ring of grease formed on the
cylinder sleeves.
Do not store the combine harvester in the
Fill the hydraulic oil tank fully in order to prevent
same room as fertilisers containing
corrosion.
ammonia.
Spray or coat the hydraulic pumps and motors, Danger of corrosion to the plug-in cable
together with the connecting rods and adjusting connectors and the hydraulic cylinder
levers with a rust-protection agent. rods.
Change the transmission oil in the manual gearbox
Seal the diesel engine as described in the
and side gears.
"Engine" Operating Manual.
Remove and clean the conveyor chains and drive
Fill up the fuel tank with diesel fuel.
chains, and then dip them in warm chain grease
and refit. Hand the battery over to a specialised workshop
for maintenance.
Fire hazard! Make sure that sufficient anti-freeze is in the
engine cooling circuit.

Remove the V-belts and clean them with a


glycerine/spirit solution in the ratio 1:10 (or In case of hibernation without antifreezing
compound the cooling water must be
similar), and then refit and tension slightly. drained, see Draining/filling of cooling
Dismantle and grease the knife. Oil the knife system.
guides.

Do not use a steam-cleaner or water to clean


the sieves!
Clean the sieves by blowing out with dry air and
spray them with a rust-protection agent.
Repair all paint damage.

17.14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Engine anti-corrosion sealing Drain water from the fuel pump and the sump of
the fuel tank.
If your engine is to remain at standstill for a relatively
long time (e.g. storage for a long period), we Slightly loosen the slipping clutches and allow to
recommend sealing it to protect against corrosion. slip. Then reset them to the specified value.
Close the cleaning openings on the feed passage
Thoroughly clean the outside of the engine (do not and rotor conveyor.
forget the cooling fins). Check the condition and pressures of the tyres.
Check the engine, hydraulic system and
If using high-pressure vehicle wash gearboxes for leaks.
systems, do not aim the water jet directly Check that all parts of the machine are fitted and
at the bearings, alternator and starter working correctly.
engine (cover the alternator).
Check that all guards and protective devices are
Electronic components:
fitted and in working order.
EMR cutting table control: switches,
sensors Fully readjust the variator control pulleys and
Engine monitoring: switches, sensors check that they are running smoothly.
must never come into contact with Drain the fuel prefilter.
moisture.

The anti-corrosion sealing procedure is described in


the separate "Engine" Operating Manual.
Dewaxing the engine

Collect the anti-corrosion treated oil and the Remove the anti-corrosion agent from the grooves
sealing compound and dispose of them in of the V-belt pulleys.
accordance with environmental and waste Fit the V-belts and if necessary retension after a
disposal regulations. short operating period.
Remove the locks on the intake opening and
exhaust opening.
Drain the anti-corrosion oil and replace it with
Reusing after winter storage engine oil.
Check the lubrication of all chains and tighten the Check the engine for leaks (intake tract, exhaust
chains. system, leakage).
Check the belt pulleys for signs of rust. If
necessary remove rust and tension the V-belts.
Check the tension of all springs.
Fit battery (check battery charge).
Check that the lights and warning devices are
working properly.
Remove/undo all anti-corrosion measures applied
during engine storage.
If anti-corrosion oil was used, the engine
can only be operated with this oil for a
maximum of 10 hours in part-load.
Check the hydraulic oil levels and adjust if
necessary.

If the tank was completely filled before the


combine harvester was taken out of service,
drain off oil until the oil level is at the
maximum mark before putting the combine
harvester back into service.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.15


Maintenance Storage

Lubrication
Lubrication plan
For the combine harvester and accessory equipment,
the lubrication plan is supplied as a separate manual.
The lubrication plan specifies the lubricants,
lubricating intervals and oil change intervals.

The lubricating and oil change intervals are


specified for normal operating conditions. If
operating conditions are especially difficult, it
may be necessary to shorten these intervals.

The listed lubricant quality represents the


minimum requirements: no lubricant of lower
quality may be used. Synthetic lubricants
may also be used, provided that they
conform to the listed specifications. The
lubricants must be free of resin and acid.

Different oil grades may only be mixed under


exceptional circumstances. Ask your dealer
or a service workshop for further information.

If a centralised lubrication system is


existing, all points of lubrication not
connected must be lubricated manually
according to the lubrication chart!

At open lubricating points (e.g. universal


shaft joints), in addition to the specified
lubricants, biodegradable lubricants of the
same specification may be used.

17.16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Central lubrication system Maintenance
Central lubrication system
The central lubrication system is electronically controlled
as a function of the load. When switched on, the
1 indicator lamp (1) comes on automatically and goes out
again when the system is switched off.

If the indicator light (1) is not lighting up at


regular intervals, it is necessary to check the
function of the centralised lubrication
system.
35430

The lubricant reservoir (2) of the centralised


lubricant system must always be filled with a
2 3 sufficient amount of suitable lubricant. The fill
level must not fall below the minimum mark (see
operating instructions of the centralised
lubrication system). The fill level, the points of
lubrication as well as their feed lines shall be
inspected daily.

35613

Installation diagram
In the installation diagram, the allocation and assignment
of the points of lubrication to the corresponding divider
block is shown.

If lines are replaced, they must be connected


according to the installation diagram as the
amount of grease for each point of lubrication is
metered individually by the corresponding divider
block valve!

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.17


17.18
1
Maintenance

4
Right side Speed setting
Angular gear
Tensioning pulley for fan
Tensioning pulley for fan Tensioning pulley
Chopper Tensioning pulley Tensioning pulley
Chopper Tensioning pulley Tensioning pulley
Chopper Tensioning pulley Tensioning pulley
Tensioning pulley Tensioning pulley
3
Chaff spreader Tensioning pulley
Chaff spreader Sieve pitman arm
Chaff spreader Sieve pitman arm
Rear axle Sieve pitman arm
Rear axle Rear axle

2
7
VPKM-5-404
Lubrication aid
VPBM-4-209 Left side
Lubrication aid
VPKM-4-520 Sieve pitman arm Revolvingg turret
Lubrication aid Sieve pitman arm Tensioning pulley
Sieve pitman arm Tensioning pulley
5 6 Tensioning pulley Tensioning pulley
Chopper

8
Feed passage
Pivoting cutting
Pivoting cutting mechanism
mechanism Tensioning pulley
Feeder front left
Feeder front right

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Central lubrication system
Central lubrication system Maintenance
Block Designation Instructions for trouble shooting
No
1 Pump unit of centralised lubrication system ATTENTION!
It is not admissible to obturate individual
2 Divider block right lines from the divider block to the point of
lubrication (e.g. a ruptured hose line) as
3 Divider block thereby the remaining points of lubrication
of the corresponding divider block will be
4 Divider block
also blocked.
5 Divider block
- If points of lubrication cannot be lubricated, identify
6 Divider block the clogging point of lubrication and clear.
7 Divider block above front axle - Call on a specialised workshop if necessary.
(only with Balance)
8 Divider block left

10 Divider block feed passage

Failures

Failures Possible causes Remedy

Indicator light (1) is Power supply of centralised lubrication Check fuses, replace if necessary.
not lighting up any system disturbed.
more
Check power supply.

Pump elements defective. Initiate refurbishment of centralised lubrication system.

Identify clogged points of lubrication (see


Pressure relief valve One or more points of lubrication are installation diagram of centralised lubrication
(3) is activated. clogged. system) and eliminate clogging.
Lubrication grease is
coming out. Call on a specialised workshop as necessary.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.19


Maintenance
Maintenance and care of the IMPORTANT!
engine The maintenance and inspection
intervals laid down in the Maintenance
and Inspection Schedule or Engine

Please refer to the detailed description


provided by the engine manufacturer.
Operating Manual must be observed.

These Operating Instructions will only describe the Engine faults


essential maintenance and care operations required
when using the combine harvester engine. EMR (Electronic engine management)
The EMR engine management system automatically
If the use of oil with a different viscosity is reduces the engine power drastically in the event of
necessary under special circumstances, please engine overload. This power reduction is triggered in
contact your dealer or the SAME DEUTZ-FAHR response to the following events:
Customer Service department for further information.
Coolant too hot, or
Notes: Engine oil pressure too low.
If possible, do not switch off the engine suddenly
from full load but allow it to continue running at Consequently, it is important to watch the monitoring
lower idling speed for a short time for temperature instruments carefully during operation in order to be
compensation. able to react immediately.
In dangerous situations switch off the
Do not continue working with a power-
engine immediately.
reduced engine, but stop immediately.
Do not run the fuel tank dry. If air enters the fuel
If the power is reduced, take the following action:
system, e.g. when changing the fuel filter or
disconnecting fuel pipes, the fuel system must be
Stop immediately.
bled.
Check the display instruments. Switch off the
Check the engine oil level daily.
engine.
Clean the air filter in accordance with the
Locate and if possible repair the fault, e.g. engine
specification. Clean the cooler and the sieve pan
oil level too low, dirty filter etc.
after strong dust and chaff accumulation.
Always keep the engine and engine compartment
If the fault cannot be remedied, immediately call on a
clean. If necessary, blow clean with compressed air
specialist workshop. Do not run the engine at high
and remove oil deposits.
revs.
Collect and dispose of used oil in accordance with
the relevant waste disposal regulations.

CAUTION!

A mixture of oil, dust and chaff in the engine


compartment is easily flammable and
represents an extra fire risk.
Take care when draining hot oil risk of burns.
Always switch off the engine before
carrying out cleaning and maintenance work.
Always switch off the engine before refilling the
fuel tank.

17.20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance

18 3

2 4 7
1 5
6

16 35600
The illustration shows engine type BF6M 913 C,
water-cooled
5
(1) Cylinder head cover
12 (2) Exhaust ejector
(3) Coolant expansion vessel
(4) Exhaust silencer
13
(5) Oil filler neck
(6) Cooling water line engine - cooler
11
(7) Air intake duct (clean air)
14
(8) Air duct charge air cooler - cylinder head
10 (9) Cooling air fan
35475
(10) Lubricating oil filter cartridge
(11) Oil dipstick
(12) Alternator
(13) Plug-in injection pumps
(14) Fuel filter cartridge
(15) Fuel delivery pump
(16) Hydraulic oil cooler
(17) Level monitoring sensor
The engine is accessible by means of the rear ladder.
The cover of the straw hood acts as work platform for
all necessary maintenance work.
15
34938

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.21


Maintenance
Check the oil level
Clean dirt and dust from the oil dipstick (1) and filler
cap (2) before removing.
Pull out the oil dipstick (1) and wipe with a non-fibrous
cloth. Reinsert and pull out.

The oil level must be up to the top marking.

Only use proprietary oils in compliance with


DEUTZ specifications DQC-3 or ACEA
European specification E4-99.
1

33970 Do mix oils of different types.

Observe the oil change times specified in the


maintenance schedule.
2
Changing engine oil

Take care when draining hot oil fire hazard.


Park the combine harvester on a horizontal
surface and switch off the engine.

Drain the engine oil with the engine at operating


33969 temperature. To drain the oil, unscrew the drain
plug (3). The other end of the oil drain pipe is in the
engine oil pan.

Change oil under scrupulously clean


conditions.
Only use brand oils of the grade specified
above.

Screw in the drain plug.


Open the filler cap (2).
Fill the engine with oil up to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
3 Close the filler cap (2).
33975
Note the different maintenance intervals depending
Changing engine oil and filter on the type of oil being used.
If you mix oils of different types, remember that this
CAUTION! will affect the operating temperature range. Due to
The engine oil must be checked daily the possible interactions of the various additives, we
(every 10 operating hours) before starting recommend that you use oil of only one type.
work. For the oil filling capacity, see "Operating fluids and
To check and top up the engine oil, the capacities"
combine harvester must be parked on a
horizontal surface (then switch off engine).

17.22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Changing the engine oil filter
Change the oil filter with every engine oil
change.

Unscrew the lubricating oil filter (1) by turning


counter-clockwise. If necessary, use a special filter
wrench.
Only use genuine original-equipment-manufacturer
1 (OEM) filter cartridges.

2 Observe the following points when fitting the new filter


33971
cartridge:

Clean the sealing surface of the screw-in flange, and


lightly oil the rubber seal of the filter.
Screw in the filter cartridge by hand (without tool) until
the seal rests flush. Check that there are no leaks.
Tighten the filter cartridge by hand.
Check the filter seal again with the running engine,
and tighten the filter if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and top up if necessary.

Important: Make sure of clean conditions when


changing the oil filter.

Catch used oil, and do not allow it to trickle into


the soil. Dispose of used oil in accordance with
waste disposal regulations.

Changing fuel filter


The interchangeable filter (2) acts as fuel filter and must
be changed every 1000 operating hours.

Only use genuine original-equipment-


manufacturer (OEM) filter cartridges.

Observe the following points when changing filter


cartridge:

Clean the filter cartridge and surrounding parts


carefully. Then unscrew the filter cartridge with a filter
wrench. Catch any escaping fuel.
Fit in exactly the same way as the oil filter cartridge.
Bleed the fuel system.

Note: If the engine does not start up despite repeated


attempts:
- Vent the system again by means of the vent
pump.
- For further proceedings see section "Bleeding
of fuel system

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.23


Maintenance
Engine oil pressure
The motor oil pressure is being monitored by 2 sensors:
- Oil pressure switch (3) for indication at combined
instrument gauge
- Motor oil pressure sensor (5) for the EMR

Oil pressure switch (3): An alarm indication results


1 when the oil pressure falls below the specified limit.
The oil pressure lamp (1) lights up, and the central warning
2 light (2) flashes. A buzzing tone is also sounded.
31663
Stop immediately and switch off the engine.
Remedy the fault before restarting.
If necessary top up or change the oil.

In addition, the failure lamp (4) of the EMR is lit at the


instrument panel.
The engine power will be reduced after an advance
alarm time has been elapsed.

19.41

35430

17.24 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Motor oil temperature
1 The motor oil temperature is being measured by
sensor (4). The oil temperature is continuously
indicated in the display field (1) of the combined
instrument gauge. In case of excessive oil temperature
(pointer in the red area) the warning light (3) and the
central warning light (2) are flashing. At the same time
the buzzer resounds.

Furthermore an alarm message "motor oil


temperature too high" appears on Commander
2 3 31663 Control 2000.

Stop work and allow the engine to idle for a


short time for temperature compensation.
Then switch off the engine.
Remedy the fault before restarting.

4
Check the oil level and top up with oil if necessary.
Clean radiator.

Coolant temperature
34928
The coolant temperature is monitored by sensor (6). The
coolant temperature is continuously indicated at the
circular instrument (5). In case of excessive coolant
temperature (pointer in the red area) the warning light (3)
and the central warning light (2) are flashing. At the
same time the buzzer resounds.
5
The engine power will be reduced after an advance
alarm time has been elapsed.

Stop work and allow the engine to idle for a


short time for temperature compensation.
Then switch off the engine.
33897 Remedy the fault before restarting.

Check coolant level.


Check V-belt for cooler.
Check cooler for contamination.
Check cooling air intake.

35623

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.25


Maintenance Engine

Notes

17.26 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Alternator
The engine is equipped with an alternator (1) that is
driven by a V-belt from the engine crankshaft.
1 The V-belt is tensioned by adjusting the position of the
alternator.

Overtightened drive belts lead to rapid wear of


the belts and bearings. When correctly
tensioned, the belts must not slip and must go
in about 15 mm when pressed inwards.

Tension the V-belt (4) as follows:


34924 To tension the belt, loosen the swivel bearing bolt (2).
Loosen the clamping screws (3) and press the
alternator up with a suitable tool.
Tighten the clamping screws (3).

2
Safety precautions for alternator and
regulator
Do not break the connection between the battery,
alternator and regulator while the engine is running.
Do not run the engine with removed batteries, and do
3 not remove the batteries while the engine is running.
4 If the battery charge indicator light is faulty, replace it
34925
immediately.
Cover the alternator and regulator when washing the
engine.
Only check/retension/change the V-belt while the
engine is at standstill.
After maintenance refit the guards and protective
devices.

Fire hazard. Regularly clean dust and crop


residue from the alternator.

Checking the fixing of the tubular cooler

Regularly check that the tubular cooler (5) for the


hydraulic system is securely fixed. Tighten if necessary,
or call on a specialised workshop.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.27


Maintenance
Checking the induction and exhaust
2 1 manifold mountings

The following tasks must be performed every


second engine oil change, and thereafter at
least once a year:

Check the fastening clamps of the intake manifold


and of the charge air lines (1) with the clamp-type
couplings.
Check the exhaust manifold (2) at the cylinder heads
for leaks.
35600 Check hose caps, hoses and pipes from the engine to
the water cooler.
Check charge air lines for damages.
Retighten any loose screws.

Cleaning the coolers


5 3 If the cooling fins of the radiator and coolers are fouled
with dirt mixed with oil and fuel residue, the engine
power is automatically cut back due to the reduced
cooling.

4 The cooler and the suction blower shall be


inspected daily and be cleaned as necessary.

Open the closures (4) and (5), swivel the cooler cover
5 (3) and the rotary sieve pan (1) outwards. The cooler
cover is secured against excessive swivelling by
35382
means of a rope.

Never start the engine while the rotary cooling-


1 6 air filter (1) is swung out of its operating
position, because otherwise the drive belt (6)
can be damaged.

35476

17.28 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Engine Maintenance
Release the catches of the individual coolers and
fold out the coolers.

1 3 Use compressed air with max. 3 bar. Do not


2 blow at an angle across the fins.

Blow out all 5 coolers with compressed air:


Hydraulic oil cooler (1)
Fuel cooler (2)
5 Charge air cooler (3)
4 35510 Air conditioning cooler (4)
Coolant radiator (5)

Remove possible dirt accumulations at (6) and check


whether the opening of the vacuum suction hose (6)
is completely clear.
4

35382

Charge air cooler


Drain condensate of the charge air cooler at least
once a year at plug (7).

35624

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.29


Maintenance
Fold the coolers back and lock in position.
1 2
Fold back the sieve pan (4) again and lock with
spring-type closure (3). Attach cooler cover (2) with
spring-type closures (1).

1
35382

Check whether the vacuum suction hose (5) is


properly connected.

5 35476

Check after swivelling in the sieve pan (4)


4 6 whether the v-belt (6) is resting on the
tensioning pulley (7) and whether it is not
twisted.

7
35476

Draining/filling the cooling system


8 Draining

Do not open the sealing cap (8) until the


cooling system has cooled down.
Take care due to the escape of hot coolant:
danger of scalding and burns.

Collect the drained coolant.


Dispose of used coolant in accordance with
environmental regulations.

35600 Position the collecting container.

17.30 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Only if equipped with cabin heating:
- Completely open heating valve of the cabin heating.
1 2 3
- There are four hose lines located at the cabin floor:

CAUTION!
Both middle hose lines under the cabin floor
are part of the air conditioning system. Do
not open!

4 Open the two outer hose lines (5) and (6) of the
heating circuit at the joints and drain the heating
circuit.
35595
Open the sealing cap (2) at the expansion tank (1).
Attach hose at drain cock (7).
Drain coolant through drain cock (7).
Open the drain plug (8) of the heat exchanger and
drain the coolant from the engine.
6
After complete draining of the cooling system:
- Tighten drain plug (8).
- Close hose lines (5) and (6) at cabin floor again.

5 Filling:

35595-1
If machine is equipped with cabin heating, the
heating valve must be opened.

Close drain cock (7) and drain plug (8).


Fill in coolant at sealing cap cover (2) until sight glass
(3) is covered.
Install sealing cap (2).
Start engine and warm up until thermostat opens.
Turn off the engine.
Check coolant level when the engine is cold and
7 replenish if necessary.
Bleeding is done automatically through the vent
hoses.

35479 Sensor (4) is monitoring the expansion tank level.

35479

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.31


Maintenance
Cooling circuit, overview

2 1.1 1.2 1

5
4

9
7

3
56-107

4 11 12 7

35625 35479

5 3 10

17.32 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Cooling circuit, overview

1 Expansion tank
1.1 Sight glass
1.2 Relief valve in the cap opens at 95 kPa
2 Vent hose from cylinder head
3 Inlet from radiator to coolant pump
4 Return line from thermostat housing to radiator
5 Balance line from expansion tank to suction side of the coolant pump
6 Vent hose from radiator
7 Radiator
8 Coolant pump
9 Heat exchanger coolant/motor oil
10 Drain cock
11 Thermostat housing
12 Connection vent hose (2) at cylinder head

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.33


Maintenance Engine

Notes

17.34 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Air filter
Cleaning the dry air filter
The driver is informed by the central instrument cluster
when the dry air filter needs to be cleaned.
Indicator light (1) lights up, and the central warning
light (2) flashes and a buzzing signal is sounded.
The low-pressure sensor (3) is located in the filter
housing (4).

Frequent removal and insertion of the filter cartridge can


2 1 damage the seal between the outer filter cartridge and
31663 the filter housing (4). The cartridge should therefore only
be cleaned or changed when the indicator light (1) in the
central instrument cluster comes on.

3
4
90004

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.35


Maintenance

1 Never wipe the air filter cover (5) or filter


cartridge with an oily cloth.

Changing the fine filter cartridge


Unscrew the wing nut (6) and remove the cover (5).
Remove the dirty cartridge (3) and either clean it or
replace it with a new cartridge. The cartridge must
be replaced after cleaning 5 times or when clogged
with soot.
2 3 Refit the cover (5) and tighten the wing nut (6).
31696
Only use genuine original-equipment-
manufacturer (OEM) filter cartridges.

If the warning lamp comes on again after cleaning the


outer fine filter cartridge, the inner safety cartridge (1)
must be replaced.
4 If the fine filter cartridge (3) is found to be faulty or
damaged, the safety cartridge (1) must also be checked
and replaced if necessary.
5
6
34927
Changing the safety cartridge

The safety cartridge (1) must not be cleaned. It must be


replaced at the latest after the outer cartridge has been
replaced 5 times.
Remove the air filter (4) cover (5) and remove the
fine filter cartridge (3).
Unscrew the flat hexagon nut (2) and carefully
remove the inner cartridge (1).

Only use genuine OEM filter cartridges.


Never start the engine without fitted filter
cartridges.

Refit the two cartridges in reverse order. Make sure that


both cartridges are correctly seated and secured.

17.36 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Fuel system

1 Fuel tank
The fuel tank holds approximately 555 litres of diesel fuel
and is located under the side cover on the left side of the
combine harvester. The filler cap (2) is located near the
2 ladder to the engine platform.

The tank is vented by a small hole in the


filler cap (1). For this reason, use only an
original spare part if you have to replace
33995
the filler cap.
Thoroughly clean the filler neck (2) before filling the
tank.
Never run the tank dry, since otherwise the fuel
injection system will have to be bled.
We recommend refilling the tank every evening after
completing the daily harvesting work.
4
Due to temperature differences in the evening and at
3 night, condensation may form on the inner walls of the
fuel tank above the fuel surface if the tank is empty or
only partly filled. On mixing with the fuel poured in
later, this condensation water can cause problems in
35588 the internal combustion engine.

Dirt and water collect in the sump (4) and can be


drained by unscrewing the drain plug (3) 23 turns.

Do not fully unscrew the drain plug (3).


Empty the tank at least once a year before the
harvest season.

If the only fuel available is poorly cleaned,


water and dirt deposits must be drained
weekly if necessary.

Catch the drained fuel and dispose of it in


accordance with environmental requirements.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.37


Maintenance Fuel tank

Draining water from the fuel prefilter


1 Open drain cock (3) as follows: Push down drain
cock slightly without forcing and turn.
Keep drain cock (3) opened until pure fuel comes
2 out.

Cleaning the fuel pre-filter, changing


the filter cartridge
3 Close tank shutoff valve (1).
35605 Place drip tray for fuel.
Open bleeder plug (2).
Slightly push drain cock (3) without force and turn,
4 2 drain fuel.
Unscrew the four screws (4) and remove together
5 with cover (5) and spring cassette. Dispose of the
seal.

6 7 Pull out filter cartridge (6) and dispose of.


Clean filter housing (7) and container (8).
Insert new filter cartridge (6).
8
3
35602
Change the sealings (9) as necessary.

Attach spring cassette and cover (5) with new seal


and tighten the screws (4).
4 2
Close drain cock (3).
Close bleeder plug (2).
Bleed fuel system as described hereafter.
9 6

3
A-005

17.38 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Bleeding the fuel system
1
Open tank shutoff valve (1).
Open bleeder plug (2).
2
3 Actuate bleed pump (3) until fuel comes out at the
bleeder plug (2).
Close bleeder plug (2).
Actuate vent pump (3) until fuel flows hereable
without air into the tank.
Start the engine.
35605

Note: If the engine does not start up despite


repeated attempts:
2 - Vent the system again by means of the vent
pump.
- Possibly loosen the pressure control valve (4)
and actuate vent pump (3) until fuel emerges
from the pressure control valve. Retighten
pressure control valve and start the engine.

Check system for leakage after start-up of the


engine.

35602

30 084_0

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.39


Maintenance
Notes

17.40 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Brake system Maintenance
Brake system

Safety instructions for brakes

Have all necessary maintenance/repairs and


adjustments performed immediately by an
authorised specialist workshop.

Do not attempt to make any modifications to the


running gear and brakes yourself. Any unauthorised
modifications lead automatically to cancellation of
the license, type approval and insurance cover.

Note and follow the relevant safety regulations for


all maintenance, servicing and adjustments. Switch
off the engine, disconnect the battery and the
ignition key.

Make absolutely sure that no other person can


operate the combine harvester while work is in
progress on the machine (lock the cab and remove
the battery).

Before crawling under the combine harvester, place


a support under the intake passage.

Take care when handling brake fluid: toxic and risk


of burns.

Do not dump or bury brake fluid in landfill.

Refit all dismantled components.

Observe the accident prevention regulations.

Operate the footbrake and the parking brake


from time to time when driving on non-public
roads. This permits you to the check the
function of the brakes and also cleans the
brake components.

Dispose of brake fluid properly, in accordance


with environmental regulations.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.41


Maintenance Brake system

Service brake
This combine harvester is equipped with hydraulically
operated disc brakes.
The brakes are self-adjusting.
To bleed the brakes, follow the instructions below.

Checking the footbrake:


Hoses and pipes for leaks.
Brake pads for wear.
Brake discs for wear and score marks.
Every 100 operating hours, check the brake fluid level
in the brake fluid container (1), and top up if
necessary to the mark.

1 Use only brake fluid which complies with the


requirements of DOT 4, DOT 3 or SAE J 1703. The
capacity of the reservoir is 0.30 litres.

Change the brake fluid every two years.

Have the brake fluid changed in a specialised


workshop.

34929 Bleeding the brakes


The hydraulically operated service brake must be
carefully bled if:
braking efficiency starts to fade,
2 the brakes become too "soft",
the system is refilled.

Procedure for bleeding the brake system


Connect the transparent hose (approx. 1.3 m long) to
the bleed valve (2).
2 Place the free end of the hose in a container filled
with brake fluid and placed at roughly the same height
32093 as the bleed valve.
Turn the bleed valve about 1/4 turn.
Slowly and evenly apply pressure to the brake pedal
until it reaches its end-stop. Reclose the bleed valves
shortly before the pedal reaches its end stop. Then
allow the pedal to return slowly and fully to its original
position. Repeat this procedure until pure brake fluid
is discharged without air bubbles.
Close the bleed valves with the pedal down.
Tightening torque with
M6 = 2.54 Nm.

Top up the brake-fluid reservoir (1) in good time.

17.42 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Brake system Maintenance
Auxiliary and parking brake (handbrake)
The auxiliary and parking brake (handbrake) operates
entirely independently of the service brake.

The braking effect of the brake lever (1) must be


operative within the first third of the actuating travel.

The auxiliary and parking brake (handbrake) is


adjustable at the Bowden cable.
1
33978 For smoother running and improved reliability,
relubricate the plastic bearing bushes with acid-free
and resin-free grease.

Remove any residual encrusted and dried grease and


grime.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.43


Maintenance Gearbox

Gearbox
See lubrication plan and maintenance schedule for oil
grades and filling levels.
1
Manual gearbox

Checking the oil level


The oil inspection screw (1) is located on top of the
manual gearbox.

35485
Check the oil using the dipstick attached to the screw.

Changing oil
The gearbox must be warmed up to operating
temperature to change the oil.

Unscrew the oil drain plug (2).


After draining the oil, screw the oil drain plug (2) back
into place.
Pour fresh oil into (1), up to the marking on the oil
dipstick.

2
35486 For the oil change intervals please refer to the
lubrication plan, but in all cases the oil must be
changed at least after the harvest season in the
course of the winter storage preparations.
3
Side gears

Checking the oil level


Check the oil level at the screw plug (3). Bleed the side
gears using the venting valve (5). Keep the valve clean
at all times.

4 33802 Oil change


The gearbox must be warmed up to operating
temperature to change the oil.

Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).


5 After draining the oil, screw the oil drain plug (4) back
into place.
Pour fresh oil into (5), up to the bottom edge of the
threaded hole at (3).
Screw in the oil inspection screw (3).

For the oil change intervals please refer to the


lubrication plan, but in all cases the oil must be
changed at least after the harvest season in the
33820
course of the winter storage preparations.

17.44 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Gearbox Maintenance
Final drive Balance
1 The gear case is vented through the venting valve (1).

2 Oil level checking


Place the machine in neutral position (the front gear
cover must be perpendicular 90 to the ground).
Oil level shall be checked at the control screw (2).

Oil change
3 Remove control screw (2).
35626 Remove oil drain plug (3), drain oil.
Reinstall oil drain plug (3).
Replenish new oil through the opening of the control
screw (2) until oil level has reached the opening.
Screw in control screw (2).
Check oil drain plug (3) and control screw (2) for
leakage.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.45


Maintenance
Notes

17.46 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Gearshift
2 1
1 CAUTION!

Disengage the threshing mechanism and the


cutting table, switch off the engine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill, engage a gear and
2 1 apply the handbrake.
Place chocks under the front wheels. Remove the
ignition key and disconnect the cable from the
negative pole of the battery.

35487

2
The correct operation and connection of the
components must be checked at regular
intervals.

For smoother running and improved operating


safety, the plastic bearing bushes (1) and the angle
joints (2) of the gearshift mechanism must be
charged or relubricated with acid-free, resin-free
grease.
1 Remove any residual encrusted and dried grease
and grime.
The shafts and joints must move easily and
35488 smoothly.

In an emergency: engage gear manually and


immediately drive to the specialist workshop.

35489

35490

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.47


Maintenance Gearbox

Threshing drum reduction gear (optional)

Observe the safety instructions. Switch off


the engine and remove the ignition key.

Drive with reduction gear


Threshing drum speed = 210625 rpm
The driver (1) and bushing (2) at the side wall are held
together by bolt (3).

31549

Drive without reduction gear


Threshing drum speed = 4201250 rpm
The driver (1) and V-belt pulley (4) are held together by
1 bolt (3).

4
3

31550

Checking the oil level


2
Symbol: D = Direction of rotation
F = Direction of travel
D
5
Turn the gear so that the screw (5) is at the bottom,
and check the oil level.
F
Oil change

To drain the oil, turn the gear so that the screw (5) is at
the bottom.
31551
Oil quality: MIL-L-2105 A (API-GL 5),
SAE 90.
Capacity: approx. 1 litre.
Oil-change intervals: see the table of lubricants and
quantities

D
Repairs and replacement of defective parts of
the threshing drum reduction gear must only
F be carried out by a competent specialist
dealer, because when using new parts static
5 balancing of the gearbox is required.

31551-2

17.48 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Drives Maintenance
Maintenance Drives

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13 12 11 10 9 34939-2

14 15 8 7 16 6

19 18 17 34940-1

Drive shafts and reduction gears


1 Straw chopper shaft 11 Winnowing fan shaft
2 Straw walker shaft 12 Winnowing fan variator
3 Fan shaft (5680/90 only) 13 Straw chopper countershaft
4 Power take-off shaft 14 Cutting table drive shaft
5 Grain tank clutch countershaft 15 Upper crop elevator shaft
6 Straw walker countershaft 16 Turbo separator shaft
7 Threshing drum variator/reversing drum shaft 17 Returns elevator shaft
8 Grain tank discharge auger 18 Grain auger
9 Threshing drum shaft 19 Sieve box reduction gear
10 Threshing drum countershaft

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.49


Maintenance Drives

1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
8
3

12

18 17 16 15 14 13
34939-2

Drive belts and chains, overview


1 V-belt, alternator drive 11 V-belt, threshing drum variator
2 V-belt, coolant pump and fuel pump drive 12 V-belt, threshing drum gear threshing drum
3 V-belt, intake fan drive 13 V-belt, winnowing fan variator fan shaft
4 V-belt, fan drive (5680/90) 14 V-belt, winnowing fan variator
5 V-belt, compressor-type cooling system drive 15 V-belt, straw walker drive
6 V-belt, rotary cooling-air filter drive 16 Compound belt, straw chopper coupling
7 Compound belt, grain tank clutch 17 V-belt, chaff spreader
8 Compound belt, threshing section clutch 18 Compound belt, straw chopper drive
9 Chain, elevator head grain tank filling auger
10 V-belt, grain tank discharge

17.50 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Drives Maintenance

19 20 21 22

27 26 25 24 23

34940-1

19 Drive chain, grain tank discharge tube 23 V-belt, sieve box drive
20 V-belt, turbo separator drive 24 Drive chain, grain auger
21 V-belt, reversing drum 25 V-belt, reversing drum synchronous drive*
Straw walker countershaft
26 Compound belt, cutting table clutch
22 V-belt, Straw walker countershaft
27 V-belt, cutting table drive
returns elevator shaft

Check the speed of the straw walker shaft and sieve box when idling with the threshing section engaged.

Speed table

Shaft Type 5650/60 Type 5680/90


rpm rpm

Straw walker shaft


Normal 2055 2055
55
Rice 210 66
2132

Sieve box 3015 3015

* optional

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.51


Maintenance Drives

General instructions

V-belts

Since new V-belts stretch, their tension must


checked more frequently during the first few
operating hours.
V-belts with fixed idler pulley are correctly tensioned
if they can still be pressed inwards slightly. If the
belts are too slack they are subject to increased
wear. Belts which are tightened too much place an
excessive load on the bearings.

Never pull V-belts over a pulley with excessive force


or with a tool.

We recommend that you clean dirty V-belts with


glycerine/spirit solution in the ratio 1:10 (or similar
solution). Do not use petrol, benzene, turpentine
etc.

Avoid mechanical damage to the V-belt. During


winter storage, make sure that the belt pulleys do
not rust

Chains

The drive chains must be cleaned regularly


with transmission oil. After the harvest
season, remove the drive chains and clean
them with diesel fuel. Then dip them in
warm chain grease and refit them.

Chain spring links must always be fitted with


their closed end facing the direction of chain
travel, in order to prevent them coming
loose.
32073

17.52 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Drives Maintenance
Variator drives

Remove dust and dirt deposits between the


control pulley discs.

The variable speed drives (pick-up reel and


threshing drum speed variators) must be set
to all their control positions after lubricating in
order to make sure that the lubricating film is
distributed evenly over the disc faces.

Adjusting the length of the tension springs

There are two versions of the tension springs.

The compression springs are initially


tensioned. Caution when disassembling -
1 A Risk of injury.

Adjusting the spring length, Version A:

1. Loosen the nut (2).

2. Set length L as indicated on the adjusting plate with


the nut (1).
L 2
3. Tighten nut (2) to lock nut (1).

90008
Adjusting the spring length, Version B:

3 4 5 B
1. Loosen the nut (6).

2. Set length L as indicated by the length (5) on the


adjusting plate (4) with the nut (3).

3. Tighten nut (6).

L 6
33816

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.53


Maintenance Tension springs

1 2 3

6 5 4

34939-1

Checking the tension springs


Caption Tension spring Length Comment
1 Idler pulley, cooler drive L
2 Idler pulley, grain tank discharge drive L
3 Idler pulley, threshing drum drive L
4 Idler pulley, fan drive L
5 Idler pulley, straw walker drive L
6 Idler pulley, straw chopper drive L

L = length according to adjusting plate

17.54 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Tension springs Maintenance

L
L
L

35455 35367 34944


1 2 3

L L
L
35353 34945 34942
4 5 6

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.55


Maintenance Tension springs

7 8

11 10 9
34940-1

Checking the tension springs


Caption Tension spring Length Comment
7 Idler pulley, turbo separator drive L
8 Idler pulley, straw walker countershaft L
9 Idler pulley, grain auger drive chain L
10 Idler pulley, sieve box reduction gear drive L
11 Idler pulley, cutting table drive L

L = length according to adjusting plate

17.56 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Tension springs Maintenance

L
L

L
35036 35035 30969
7 8 9

L
35355 33815
10 11

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.57


Maintenance V-belt clutches

V-belt clutches
General instructions

Easy actuation of the clutches is dependent on regular


lubrication of all bearings, joints and guides.

Lubricate the clutches regularly with a small


amount of grease or oil. Use only grease
which is free of acid and resins (plastic
sleeves).

IMPORTANT!

If necessary the belt guides can be adjusted.


Readjustments to the engine and coupling may
only be made by a customer service workshop.

Basic adjustment of belt clutches

Adjust the belt guides so that

They are at a uniform distance of 810 mm from the


pulley when the clutch is engaged.

The V-belt is lifted from the pulley when the clutch is


disengaged.

The V-belt does not rub on the straight guides when


the clutch is engaged.

IMPORTANT!
32072
Repairs, assembly and conversion work require
appropriate skill, specialised knowledge,
experience, tools and installations.
Ask a specialised workshop to perform this work.

If the belt is too short or long it can be


drawn into the turning pulley even when
disengaged, thereby setting the drive in
motion.

17.58 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


V-belt clutches Maintenance
Checking the lengths of the servomotor
springs for the belt clutch
The servomotors are controlled in accordance with the
current flowing through them. The servomotor is
disconnected as soon as a certain current (switching
threshold) flows through it. Since the force applied by a
servomotor to engage is proportional to the current
flowing through it, the corresponding V-belt will still be
tensioned correctly when engaging, even if it has
become longer with age.

The lengths of the tension springs only needs to


be inspected in the event of clutch problems.
Preparatory measures

Set the engine speed adjusting lever or switch to the


idling position.
Switch on the main work switch.
Swing the grain tank discharge pipe out until pilot light
2 lights up on the central information panel.
Set the straw guide plate to straw chopper mode; the
green indicator lamp for the straw chopper in the
instrument panel comes on.
Switch on the threshing section, cutting table and
grain tank discharge, one after another.
Switch off the engine.
Set the starter switch to position "0", remove the
ignition key and keep it in a safe place. Ensure that
no-one attempts to start the engine.
Switch off the battery main switch and secure it
against inadvertent reactivation.

Do not switch the ignition on again, because the


drives will be automatically disengaged.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.59


Maintenance
Checking the servomotor spring lengths

A The specified spring lengths are approximate


guideline values.
Changes to the settings may only be
carried out by a customer service
workshop.

Specified lengths with the clutch engaged

35357
Stroke Compression
Servomotor* spring length
mm mm
C
A Straw chopper clutch 60 110
B Grain tank clutch 60 135
C Threshing section clutch 72 140
D Cutting table clutch 60 145
B
* AC Stroke adjustable by means of the
threaded rods at the end of the
servomotors.
D Stroke adjustable by means of the
35356
adjusting nut on the spring set.

D
35358

17.60 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Notes

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.61


Maintenance Threshing section clutch

Threshing section clutch


1 Adjusting the belt clutches

2 Adjust the belt clutches so that

when engaged, a uniform clearance of 810 mm is


ensured between the V-belt pulley (9) and the belt
guide (11).

when disengaged, the V-belt (1) is lifted off the drive


pulley (2).
35359

when engaged, the V-belt does not rub against the


straight guides (3) and (5).
3
The guides can be adjusted at the fixings (4, 6, 7, 8
4 and 10).

Carry out a function test.

5
35360

35361

7 3

10

5
9 11

8
35362

17.62 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Straw chopper clutch, Grain tank clutch Maintenance
Straw chopper clutch
1 2 3
Adjusting the belt guides

Adjust the belt guides so that


4
when engaged, a uniform clearance of 810 mm is
ensured between the belt guide (8) and the V-belt
pulley (7), and the belt does not rub against the
5 straight guides (4) and (10).

when disengaged, the V-belt (3) is lifted off the drive


35363
pulley (2), and the V-belt forms a roughly straight line
between the outlet at (1) and the inlet at (11).

4 11 The guides can be adjusted at the fixings (5, 6 and 9).


10 Carry out a function test.
6

7 Grain tank clutch

9 Adjusting the belt guides

8 Adjust the belt guides so that


33979
when engaged, a uniform clearance of 810 mm is
ensured between the belt guide (15) and the V-belt
12 2 19 pulley (17), and the belt does not rub against the
straight guides (13) and (19).

13 18 when disengaged, the V-belt (12) is lifted off the drive


pulley (2).
14 The guides can be adjusted at the fixings (14, 16 and 18).
17
15
Carry out a function test.

16

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.63


Maintenance Cutting table clutch

Cutting table clutch


2
1 Adjusting the belt guides
8
6 Adjust the belt guides so that

when engaged, a uniform clearance of 8 10 mm is


3 7 ensured between the belt guide (9) and the V-belt
pulley (3).
4
when engaged, the V-belt does not rub against the
straight guide (4) and the guide bolt (6).
35364

when disengaged, the guide bolt (6) and belt guide (4)
3 lift the V-belt off the drive pulley (2).

The guides (4) and (9) can be adjusted at the fixings


(5, 7 and 8).

Carry out a function test.


9 4

Functional test

5 33846 Start the functional test at the lowest


idling speed of the engine.

A second person will be needed to observe the drives.

WARNING: Never leave the driver's stand


while the combine engine is still running.
The second person must remain a safe
distance from the machine within the
field of view and observation of the
driver.

Engage the clutch with the engine running at its


lowest idling speed. Check for any unusual actions
and noises.
Accelerate the engine to full speed. Check for any
unusual actions and noises. Check that the V-belts do
not catch the belt guides.
Return the engine to its lowest idling speed,
disengage the clutch and check that the drive comes
to a standstill.
Switch off the engine.
Tighten all screws and check all connections for
correct seating.

17.64 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Tension struts Maintenance
Tension struts

5 6 7 The tension struts are located in the straw hood


underneath the straw walkers.

KPAB version
To tighten:
Loosen the lock-nuts (2), and adjust the tension struts
(1) at (3).
Tighten the relevant tension strut so that the returns
pan and straw walker are positioned centrally in
35480 relation to the straw hood.
Tighten the second tension strut only slightly.
Retighten the lock-nuts.

4 HEULING version
To tighten:
Loosen the lock-nuts (5), and adjust the tension struts
(6) at (4).
Tighten the relevant tension strut so that the returns
pan and straw walker are positioned centrally in
relation to the straw hood.
Tighten the second tension strut only slightly.
35499 Retighten the lock-nuts.

5
6

35500

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.65


Maintenance Reduction gear

Straw walker drive

With the fixed idler pulley (2), you can compensate for
1 length differences if the V-belt (1) is stretched with use or
when a new belt is installed.

Tension the belt as follows:


2 Tension the belt with idler pulley (3).
Adjust the length of the compression spring (4) at
idler pulley (3) as indicated on the adjusting plate.
Align the idler pulley (2) with spacer washers, so that
the V-belt (1) runs freely.
35357

4
3

34945

Intake fan belt drive


5
To tension the V-belt (6), loosen the nut (5) and press the
fan housing (7) down. Then retighten the nut.

7
35366

17.66 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Reduction gear Maintenance
Cleaning fan drive
The speed of the bottom draught fan is adjusted by
means of an electrically operated variator.

The adjustment of drive elements and the replacement


of V-belts will be easier if the following
recommendations are observed.

The correct V-belt tension is obtained as follows: set


swing arm to central position. The diameter of both
V-belts must be identical. Stop the engine, release
screw A and tension the V-belts using nut B. Retighten
30980
screw A and locknut B.

The adjusting range of the variator pulley can be varied


as follows:

Run servo-motor M fully in and out to check that


the outer diameter of both V-belts is the same in
every position.

Any divergence can be compensated by


adjusting the servo-motor with hex. nuts D.

Check that in both end positions there is still


available a minimum clearance S of approx.
30981 2 mm between the pulley halves with minimum
spacing.

If this clearance should not be available, readjust


the servo-motor as required.

Retighten the locknuts.


Adjust the idler pulley as indicated on the
adjusting plate.

Fig. 30980: Maximum fan speed


Fig. 30981: Minimum fan speed

21476

M A

35368

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.67


Maintenance Drives

Returns elevator drive

Adjusting the speed


3 1
The combine harvester is equipped with two returns
elevators that are evenly fed by the returns auger.
2
The speed of the returns elevator can be adjusted by
shifting the drive belt to (1).
Large pulley = 910 rpm
Small pulley = 1100 rpm
Adapt the position of the idler pulley (3) to the belt
4
90009 path by moving the spacers (2).

6 5 Adjusting the V-belt

The V-belt must be kept constantly well-


tensioned.
35

The belt tension must be readjusted when using


a new, worn or expanded belt. Do not treat the
belt with oil or any other substances that can
damage the belt.

8 To tension the V-belt:


Unscrew screw (4) and adjust the position of the
35501
idling pulley (3) until the belt is correctly tensioned.
Then retighten the screw.

Overtensioned belts lead to excessively rapid


wear of the belts and bearings.
The correctly tensioned belt must not slip and
must go inwards about 3050 mm when
pressed
Friction insert kit
Instead of the friction insert (8) mounted at the safety
flap (5), the baffle plate (7) supplied in the toolbox can be
mounted. Also refer to the specifications in the threshing
chart.

Note the position of the pressure tab (6) for


the safety flap (5). The short leg of the tab
must press against the flap (5).
Adjust the length of the pressure spring to 35 mm.

8
7
5
32999

17.68 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Drives Maintenance
Notices

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.69


Maintenance Drives

Adjusting the crank rod of the sieve-box


drive
The sieve box must swing uniformly in the longitudinal
5 direction and must not be tilted in relation to the
frame.

If the sieve box knocks, first check that the sieves are
X securely mounted.

Adjustment of dimension X of the rod (5) must


be carried out only by a specialised workshop.
33983

Grain elevator drive

Slipping clutch

U The elevator auger to the grain elevator is driven via the


slipping clutch (1).

The plate springs are set to a block size of U=28 mm,


measured from the point where the plate springs touch
the chain sprocket to the pressure washer.

1 When adjusted as described above, the clutch can


20830 transmit a torque of 350 Nm.

Checking the tension of the elevator chain

The grain elevator has two inspection and service flaps


(2) and (3).

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition


key.

After opening these flaps, the tension of the chain can be


checked and the chain can be inspected for dirt and, if
necessary, cleaned.
3 4
31656 Never put your hands or any tools through
these openings when the engine is
running.

The tension of the elevator chain must be


checked at regular intervals.

Do not tension the chain too tightly: it should still be


2 possible to move it laterally on the chain sprocket (4).
If the chain is not tensioned tightly enough, the plates
will hit the size of the elevator shaft.
Tensioning the chain too tightly will result in increased
wear on the chains and sprockets and also cause
breakage of the grain in the elevator pan.
35370

17.70 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Drives Maintenance
Tensioning the chains

4 To adjust the elevator chain tension, loosen the


locknuts and adjust the two tensioning screws (4)
on the elevator head.

5
Always tighten the two screws uniformly.
Do not tension the elevator chain too tightly: it must still
6 be possible to move the chain laterally on the lower
sprocket.
If the chain is too tight, an excessive load is placed on
the shaft of the auger. This can result in increased
31658 bearing wear or even breakage of the shaft.

After adjustment of the elevator chain, it may be


necessary to tension the drive chain (5) again by
adjusting the idler pulley (6).

This chain is correctly tensioned if it sags by about 23


mm at the centre point.

Grain-tank discharge drive

Tensioning the chain

Check the tension of the chain (2) and, if necessary,


1 adjust it with the aid of the tensioning pulley (1).

This chain is correctly tensioned if it can be depressed by


about 23 mm.

2
35371

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.71


Maintenance Drives

Threshing drum drive

1 The servomotor (1) for adjusting the speed of the


2 threshing drum is mounted on the bearing plate (2). The
speed is adjusted by means of a chain and sprocket (3).

4 Changing the variator belt


3 Follow the safety instructions: switch off the
engine and remove the ignition key.
5
35362 Set the variable speed drive (variator) to maximum
speed in order to open the driven pulley (5).
Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
Screw in the two hexagon head screws (6) (M16x140)
in order to keep the driven pulley (5) open by the
5 6 maximum distance (These screws are included in the
on-board toolkit).
Open pulley (4) by turning sprocket (3) by hand.
Unscrew the plate (2) with the servomotor in order to
7 slacken and remove the chain.
6 Remove the screw (7) and swing the struts to the side.
Then remove the belt.
Thoroughly clean the space between the control
pulley discs.
Install the new belt.
35372
Reassemble the drive in reverse order.
Remove the two hexagon-head screws from the
pulley (5).
With the engine running at minimum idling speed,
engage the threshing section and check that the belt
is running correctly.

17.72 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Maintenance
Feed passage
Adjusting the diagonal struts
The two diagonal struts (1) on the write and left sides
of the feed passage permit the feed passage to be
adjusted parallel to the ground.
The combine must be parked on a horizontal surface
for this adjustment.
The cutting table, if coupled, must be parallel with the
1 ground.
Tighten the locknuts after adjusting the struts.
2 The tension of the struts must be checked on delivery,
after 50 operating hours and thereafter every
33801
200 operating hours.
Correct the tension if necessary.
Loosen the fixing (2) on the right-hand side of
the crop elevator.
Adjust the tension at (1).
Tighten the fixing (2).

Slipping clutch
3
The friction clutch (3) serves as overload protection for
the conveyor chain drive.

33831

Replacing the clutch linings


We recommend changing the linings in pairs.

The illustration shows the construction of the "intake


6 auger" slipping clutch; the clutch of the pick-up reel is of
5 similar construction.
4 The chamfer of the friction lining (6) must not rest on
the centring edge of the clutch hub (4).
The chamfer of the friction lining (5) must not rest
against the centring edge of the clutch hub.

Refit the guards after completing


21491
maintenance.

After changing the linings, run in the slipping clutch by


causing it to slip as specified, and adjust it to the
specified value (see "Maintenance and Adjustment")

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.73


Maintenance Drives

Adjusting the slipping clutch


After changing the clutch linings, place the slipping clutch
on a test bench.
3
5 Tighten the nuts (6), so that the clutch slips at
approximately 100 Nm.
4
Allow the clutch to slip ten times for 5 seconds at a
6 speed of approx. 200 rpm. Allow it to cool between
each 5 seconds of slipping.
Tighten the nuts (6) alternately until the clutch slips at
450 Nm.
21491

After testing or adjusting the clutch, refit the


protective cover.

17.74 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Air filter-driver's cab Maintenance
Cleaning the air filter in the driver's cab

Fresh air filters (1)

Fresh air is drawn in on both sides of the cab through


two filters. The filters are accessible after unscrewing the
two knurled screws and opening the filter housing.

When exposed to high quantities of dust, the filter


cartridges must be cleaned daily, and the dust
must be forced out either by tapping the filter or by
1 blowing with compressed air (max. 3 bar) from the
30514 clean side (seal side). The compressed air nozzle
must be held at least 150 mm away from the filter.

Replace the filter cartridges with new cartridges at


the latest every two years of operation.
When fitting, make sure that the perforated plate is
inserted face down in the filters.

Recirculating air filter

Tocovercleangrillethe(2)recirculating air filter, dismantle the


by unscrewing the two screws.
2
When cleaning with compressed air, the
35375
maximum permissible pressure is limited to
only 3 bar.

Clean the filter as described above for the fresh air


filters. Longer cleaning intervals are permissible for this
filter, because fresh air is not directly aspired through
these filters.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.75


Maintenance Chaff spreader

Chaff spreader (KPAB version)


Lubricate in accordance with the lubrication plan.
Carry out a daily visual inspection. If there are any
leaks, remedy the causes and top up with oil.

35458

Checking the oil level


Check the oil level in the gearboxes (3) every
2 3 100 operating hours.
If no inspection windows are provided, remove the
cladding panel (1)
Swivel the spreader so that the gears are horizontal.

35505

Remove screw (2) and check the oil level.


If necessary, top up with gearbox oil.
Oil grade; T55 SAE 80W/90
2 3

35506

17.76 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Chaff spreader Maintenance
Notice

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.77


Maintenance Compressor-type cab cooling system

Compressor-type cab cooling system

Safety instructions

Coolants are harmful to health. Therefore


you must never open the coolant pipes and
must avoid all contact with liquid
refrigerants.
If any refrigerant is splashed into the eyes
call a doctor immediately.

All work on the compressor-type cooling


system must be performed by a
specialised workshop or by appropriately
trained, authorised and qualified
personnel, and all safety regulations must
be observed.

Do not carry out any welding work on any


part of the refrigerant circuit or in its
immediate vicinity. Danger of poisoning by
toxic fumes.

The maximum ambient temperature for the


refrigerant is 80 C.

The compressor-type cooling system used is


refrigerant R134a, which contains no CFCs
and therefore does not harm the environment.

17.78 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Compressor-type cab cooling system Maintenance
Safety circuit
1 2
In normal operation, no indicator lamps are lit.
The automatic system cut-off due to low pressure is
generally triggered as a result of refrigerant loss. In this
case, the fan switch (1) is in position "0", and the system
can no longer be switched on by this switch.
Faults are indicated by the warning lamp (3).

isTherunning
cooling system only operates when the fan (1)
(at least speed 1). The cooling system
3 4 must also be switched on (4) (cooling power
30511 adjustment indirect temperature control at (2).

For perfect operation of the compressor-type


cooling system, both the cab door and hinged
window must be closed.

Coolant inspection
Open the right-hand cover panel to gain access to the
refrigerant container of the compressor-type cooling
system.
Change the fluid container when the drier is saturated
with moisture: saturation is indicated by the change in
colour from blue to mauve of the ball in the inspection
window (5).

There are two balls visible in the sight glass.


These indicate the status of the system:
5 indicator for filling (white ball floats)
indicator for moisture (blue ball).

Toevacuated
change the container, the system must be
and refilled by a specialised workshop.

The dryer must be replaced by a specialised


workshop only.
CAUTION danger of toxication!

90016 The refrigerant must be disposed of by a


specialised workshop.

When the system is correctly filled, the white ball in the


inspection window floats when the refrigerant compressor
is running.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.79


Maintenance Compressor-type cab cooling system

The condenser

3 The condenser (4) is located in the cooling system


housing. To clean it, swing the rotary cooling-air filter (3)
outwards.

The engine must not be started while the


rotary cooling-air filter is swung out,
4 because the V-belt of the filter drive could
be damaged.

35510
Take care not to damage or bend the vanes.

7 Compressor

The compressor (7) is driven by V-belt directly from the


engine drive shaft.

Check the belt tension regularly, approx. every


100 operating hours. The belt tension can be
6 5 adjusted with the setscrew (5) and clamping
screws (6). To check the belt tension, press the
middle of the belt inwards and check that it goes in
about 1520 mm.
30509

Never clean the compressor system with hot


steam.

17.80 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Compressor-type cab cooling system Maintenance
Evaporator

Ifwhether
the cooling power fades, you should also check
the evaporator (2) is clogged by dust.

The evaporator is located behind the front, retractable


part of the cab roof. To clean the evaporator:
Loosen the three knurled nuts (1) and hinge down
1 roof.
Remove the tapping screws of the cover (2) and
remove cover.
30515 Carefully remove dust from the evaporator fins
with a dusting brush or blow out with compressed
air (max. 3 bar),

3 Do not aim the air blast obliquely against


the fins.

2 Faulty indicator and warning lamps and the interior


light can be replaced from this position.

neu1

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.81


Maintenance Compressor-type cab cooling system

1 2 2 3 4 5

X135 X136
K5
K4 6
K3
K1

16 15 14 13 8

12
17

5 11 10

18

5.2
21

20 5.1 19 6
5670-90H

17.82 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Compressor-type cab cooling system Maintenance
Overview function elements in cabin roof

1 Relay for cooling compressor and blower


2 Blower
3 Wiper motor
4 Connector X135, X136 for projectors
5 Coolant hoses
5.1 Pressure hose
5.2 Flexible suction tube
6 Hoses for heating
7 Heating valve with servo motor
Observe proper mounting position: In header line, in direction of flow!

8 Connector X115, X134, X182


9 Interior lighting
10 Temperature sensor circulating air
11 Circulating air filter
12 Control panel air condition, heating
13 Temperature sensor
14 Heat exchanger heating
15 Evaporator air condition system
16 Expansion valve
17 Fresh air filter left and right
18 Master cylinder service brake
19 Disconnect for coolant- and heating hoses
20 Refrigerator section
21 Cabin floor

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17.83


Maintenance Compressor-type cab cooling system

Further instructions on the operation of compressor-


type cooling systems

The compressor-type cooling system must/should be


operated at least once a month for a brief period (NB
especially during the cold season) in order to
prevent the danger that the condenser shaft seal
might dry out and allow refrigerant to leak.
To ensure that the heater, ventilation and compressor-
type cooling system can function perfectly, the air inlet
(with air filters on both left and right on the outside of
the cab roof) must be clean and free of blockage.
At high outside temperatures and high atmospheric
humidity, condensation water can drip from the
evaporator and is then channelled down the side pillar
of the cab. This condensation is normal and does not
indicate a leak.
To prevent the windows misting over the fan must
always operate at low speed.

Economical operation of compressor-type cooling


systems

In cooling mode, the compressor of the cab cooling


system consumes engine power and therefore affects the
fuel consumption of the combine harvester. To keep the
operating time ("ON" time) as short as possible, the
following instructions should be observed:

When the combine is parked, if the inside of the cab


has been considerably heated by the sun, the
windows and doors should be opened to allow the hot
air to escape (with the aid of the fan).
Do not switch the compressor-type cooling system on
while driving if the windows and/or cab doors are
open.
If the desired interior temperature can be attained
without switching on the compressor-type cooling
system, fresh-air mode should be selected.

Whenever there is a malfunction or


problem with the compressor-type cooling
system, switch it off and immediately have
it serviced.

17.84 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Index

Chapter 18

Index

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 18.1


Index
Changing the return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.7
A Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8
Checks required before daily use . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
Adjustment tables for different crops . . . . . . . . . .14.5
Checks required before start-up . . . . . . . . . .10.1, 10.4
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.49
Cleaning the conveyor augers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.45
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.27, 17.38
Cleaning the returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.45
Automatic cutting angle control, operation . . . . . . .9.4
Cleaning the threshing drum and concave . . . . .13.14
Automatic reel (speed) control . . . . . . . . . . .7.7, 12.20
Clutches, functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.78
Automatic reel (speed) control,
Combine harvester, parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.26
Commander Control 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8, 7.1
Automatic reel (speed) control, setting . . . . . . . . .7.11
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.22
Commander Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12, 11.9
B Compartment, lockable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
Compressor-type cooling system . . . . . . . .2.24, 17.96
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1 compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.98
adjusting the Balance system on the combine condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.98
harvester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2 evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.99
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3 Compressor-type cooling systems,
operating the automatic cutting angle control . .9.4 further instructions on operation . . . . . . . . . . . .17.102
response time for the automatic cutting Concave clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5
angle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6 Concave clearances, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12
Ballasting the steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.13 Concave, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.14
Basic adjustment of belt clutches . . . . . . . . . . . .17.72 Concave, rapid opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5, 7.13
Basic adjustments on the threshing section . . . . .14.1 Construction and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
Basic setting of the concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.8 Construction of the combine harvester . . . . . . . . . .4.3
Basic setting of the separator concave . . . . . . . .13.11 Construction of the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
Basic setting of the sieves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.32 Construction of the screening and
Battery master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35, 16.6 winnowing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20, 2.21, 16.6 Construction of the threshing section . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
connecting, disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.7 Control console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11
Belt clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.72 Control and safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.94
Beverage holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Control lines
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.55 connecting to cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.9
Brake system, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.56 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.11
Brake system, operation and instructions . . . . . .11.10 Control panel, air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13
Control panel, lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13
Control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.4
C Conveyor augers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.45
Coolant inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.97
Cab air filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.89 Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6, 11.7
Cabin roof, function elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.101 Cooler cover, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
Calibrating the concave clearances . . . . . . . . . . .7.21 Coolers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.42
Calibrating the sieve adjustment . . . . . . . .7.17, 13.33 Cooling fins, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.28
Calibrating the spreader plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.20 Cooling system, draining/filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.44
Calibrating the straw guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.19 Cooling system, safe maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .2.24
Calibration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 Cover plate, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.40
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16 Crop dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7, 12.23
CE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 Crop elevator (feed passage) . . .2.37, 4.7, 13.2, 17.87
Central instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4 Crop elevator support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
Central lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.19 Crop elevator, diagonal struts, adjustment . . . . .17.87
Chaff spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10, 13.20, 17.9091 Cutting angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.18
Chain tension, checking, adjusting Cutting table clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.78
elevator head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.85 Cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
feed chain, crop elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8
grain elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.43, 17.84 construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4
intake auger, cutting table, drive chain . . . . .12.30 disengaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.19
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.64 dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.11
Changing and adjusting the sieves . . . . .13.27, 13.30 engaging/disengaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3, 12.19

18.2 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Index
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.6 cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.32
replacing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.33 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.8
Cutting table, important notes for operation . . . .12.25 oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.24, 17.36
Cutting table, mounting optional attachments . . .12.22 oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.25, 17.37
Cylinder head temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6, 11.7 oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.30, 17.38
Cylinder head temperature, thermostat . . . . . . . .17.30 oil temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .17.31, 17.38
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4
running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4
D starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3, 11.5, 11.8
speed, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.6
De-awner plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.13 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.8
Defroster nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.25
Diffusor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.23 Error messages and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.22
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.16 Excess width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37, 11.13
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.9
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.8
Door handle, exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22 F
Door handle, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22
Drive shaft, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8 Factory adjustment of the combine harvester . . . .14.2
Drive shafts and reduction gears . . . . . . . . . . . .17.63 Fan drive, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.81
Drive, grain elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.84 Fan slope compensating control . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
Drive, grain tank discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.85 Fan speed, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5
Drive, winnowing fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.81 Fan speed, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.25
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19 Feed chain, tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2
Driving and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1 Feed passage (see Crop elevator)
Driving downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
Driving hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.7 Fire hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5
bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.2, 15.7 Foot-operated controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21
faults remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12 Foreword, introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
Driving on public roads, transport . . . . . .2.6, 2.8, 11.3 Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16, 17.89
Driving operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8 Fresh air nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17
Dry air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.92 Friction insert, returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44
Dust plates, adjusting, model range . . . . . . . . . .13.16 Front attachment, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
Front attachments, additional equipment . . .2.142.16
Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.26, 17.37
E Fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.52
Fuel pump and fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.93
Ear lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.22 Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.8
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20, 16.1 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.51
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . .2.11 Fuel system, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.53
Emergency adjustment, sieves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.34 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.51
Emergency steering properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.11 Fuels and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19, 17.4
Emptying the stone trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.15 Fuse layout in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . .16.10
EMR (electronic engine management) . . . . . . . .17.34 Fuses, microrelays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.8
EMR-D (electronic cutting table control) . . . . . . . . .8.1
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
electronic cutting table control (EMR-D) . . . . . .8.1 G
error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.18
error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.17 Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12
fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.58
mounting and dismounting front attachments .8.13 Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.61
operating principle and functions of EMR-D . . .8.3 General maintenance instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .17.66
operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5 Grain elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.61
operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7 Grain loss monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7 Grain tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17, 4.10, 13.35
pin layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.20 Grain tank clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.77
quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.23 Grain tank cover, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31, 13.36
Engaging the threshing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4 Grain tank delivery auger,
Engine setting the speed warning limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 18.3


Index
Grain tank discharge drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.85 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.34
Grain tank discharge pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10, 13.40
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7
swinging inboard/outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3 L
Grain tank extension, retracting/extending . . . . .13.38
Grain tank full indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.35 Language selection/view angle setting . . . . . . . . . .7.9
Grain tank light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.37 Lifting cylinder, cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5
Grain tank, emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.41 Lifting the combine harvester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Grain tank, emptying fully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.42 Lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15
Ground drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.9 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12 Line filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.9
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12 Line filter, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12
Guard plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37 Line leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19
Load-switching unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.15
Lube oil release list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.8
H Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.16

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21, 17.57


Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16, 17.92 M
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.95
Hinged window/emergency exit . . . . . . . . . .2.36, 6.22 Maintenance and care of engine BF6L 914 C . . .17.22
Hydraulic oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6 Maintenance and care of engine
Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.6 BF6L 1013 FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.34
Hydraulic pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3 Maintenance and inspection schedule . . . . . . . . .17.6
Hydraulic system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.5
Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.1 Maintenance intervals, cutting table . . . . . . . . . .12.26
bleeding the driving hydraulics . . . . . . .15.2, 15.8 Maintenance intervals, transport trolley . . . . . . . .12.32
bleeding the steering hydraulics . . . . . . . . .15.14 Maintenance platform, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18, 17.1
filter replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.8 Maintenance, drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.81
function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.14 Maintenance/settings, cutting table . . . . . . . . . . .12.26
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.2 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.76
Hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3 Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11

I N
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18 Noise, driving hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.12
Injection pump, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.36
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
Intake and exhaust manifolds . . . . . . . . .17.41, 17.58
O
Intake auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7, 12.5 Oil change, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.24, 17.36
Intake auger, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.29 Oil level, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.24, 17.36
Intake fan drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.98 Oil pressure gauge, engine . . . . . . . . . . .17.30, 17.38
Intake roller, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2 Oil temperature gauge, engine . . . . . . . . .17.31, 17.38
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Oil temperature, hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.9
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31
Operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1
J Operating controls, cab headlining . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3
Operating controls, compressor-type
Jockey wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.14 cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.14
Operating controls, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3
Operating controls, sieve adjustment . . . . . . . . . .6.13
K Operating costs, saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Operating fluids and filling capacities . . . . . . . . . .17.4
Knife blades and fingers, replacing . . . . . . . . . . .12.34 Operation, cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.19
Knife drive belt, tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.28 Overload protection, returns elevator . . . . . . . . .13.45
Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5

18.4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


Index
electrical attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.3
P front attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.2
Parking the combine harvester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.2
Passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19
threshing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
Personnel, selection and qualification . . . . . . . . . . .2.7
Safety lining panel, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
Pick-up reel (see Reel)
Safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
Pipe cooler, hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.41
Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Platform on driver's stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
Sampling flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.35
Protective clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Screening and winnowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9, 13.23
Protective guards and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8
Pump adjustment difficult or blocked . . . . . . . . .15.12
Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.56
Service brake, steering brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21
R Servomotor spring length, drive belt clutches,
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.73
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11 Set-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5
Raising and lowering the cutting table . . . . . . . .12.19 Shut-off solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.23, 17.35
Rapid opening, threshing concave/ Side flap of cutting table, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
separator concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13, 13.6 Side gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.58
Rasp bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.24 Sieve box crank-rod, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.84
Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36, 6.23 Sieve extensions, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.34
Recirculating air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15, 17.89 Sieves
Reel adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.20 basic setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.32
Reel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 changing and setting . . . . . . . . . . . .13.27, 13.30
Reel lifting cylinder, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.27 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.28, 13.31
Reel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.20 emergency adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.34
Reel speed, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.28, 13.32
Reel tines, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.27 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.27, 13.30
Reel tines, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.35 Slipping clutch linings, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.34
Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7 Slipping clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.87
Relay layout in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . .16.13 Slipping clutch, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.88
Return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.8 Slipping clutches, setting after a long period
Returns elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9, 17.82 out of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.30
speed setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44 Slipping clutches, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.35
speed warning limit, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10 Solenoid valves, access flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
friction insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.44 Solenoid valves, emergency operation . . . . . . . . .15.4
safety flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.82 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19, 2.22
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.49 Speed monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5
overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.45 Speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3
Reversing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.3 Speed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.65
Reversing drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8 Speed warning limits, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10
Reversing drum, equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.13 Spreader plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10, 13.21
Reversing the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.21 Spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10, 13.20, 17.9091
Reversing with rape cutter attachment . . . . . . . .12.21 Spreader, safety clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
Road traffic regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3 Starting aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Rotary cooling-air filter cowl, locking . . . . . . . . . . .2.33 Steering axle, ballasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.14
Rotary cooling-air filter cowling, locking . . . .2.33, 2.34 Steering brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.10
Steering hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3
trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.14
S Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.14
Safety circuit, compressor-type cooling system . .17.97 Steps on the grain tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 Steps, swivelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.55 Stone trap
compressor-type cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .17.96 emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.15
cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.15
driving and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.14

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 05.2005 18.5


Index
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21 Tyres, wheels and tyre fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
Straw chopper clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.19, 17.77
Straw chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.18
Straw chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10 V
Straw guide rake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
Straw walker drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.80 Variable steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.13
Straw walker shaft, speed warning limit, setting . .7.10 Variator drives, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.67
Straw walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.17 V-belts and drive chains, overview . . . . . . . . . . .17.64
Straw walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Symbol conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
System overview, electrical system . . . . . . . . . . .16.4
W
System start and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8 Walkable areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31, 13.36
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2
T Waste disposal, environmental protection . . . . . . .2.25
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.3
Tailings elevator (see returns elevator) Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Wheel nuts, tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . .11.11, 17.5
Tension spring length, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.67 Winnowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9, 13.23
Tension springs, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.68 Working hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3
Tension struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.79 Working operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
TERIS/TCS terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7
Threshing drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.86
Threshing drum speed, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7
Z
Threshing drum speed, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 Zero point adjustment, driving hydraulics . . . . . .15.12
Threshing drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
Threshing drum, reduction gear . . . . . . . . .13.6, 17.62
Threshing section clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.76
Threshing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.1, 13.4
construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
engaging/disengaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.1
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.47
Threshing tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.5
Tightening torque, wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . .11.11, 17.5
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17, 11.16
Track, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.13
Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.11
Transport and transport trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.14
Transport over long distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.16
Transport protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4
Transport trolley brake, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . .12.31
Transport trolley contact surfaces, adjusting . . . .12.16
Transport trolley
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.14
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.16
version with brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.31
Transporting the cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.16
Troubleshooting
cutting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.36
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.95
hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.14
threshing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.46
Tubular and plate sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24
Tubular cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.31
Turbo separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8, 13.10
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.12

18.6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5670-90 Lubrication schedule
Instructions and rules for handling lubricants and service fluids

The specified quality of the lubricants represents the minimum requirement. No lesser quality may be used.

If you use other lubricant grades, the approval and consent of your dealer, SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR or the
manufacturer of the machine or attachment must be obtained.

In the case of open lubricating points, lubrication with both grease and oil is permitted.

Inspect the pipes and connections of the lubrication system each day.

When using a central lubrication system, this system must always be filled with a sufficient quantity of
lubricants. The lubrication points and their supply lines must be checked daily. In addition, all lube
nipples not connected to the central system must be manually lubricated in accordance with the
Lubrication Plan.

At open lubricating points (e.g. joints, plastic bearing shells, chains etc.), biodegradable lubricants may be used
in addition to the specified lubricants, provided that they conform to the same specification.

Wherever possible, please use acid-free and resin-free lubricants.

Economical use of lubricants and service fluids reduces environmental pollution and at the same time
helps save costs.
In particular in the case of open lubrication points, you can very easily determine whether the relevant
point needs to be relubricated at the specified intervals or whether sufficient lubricant remains in place.

Observe environmental regulations.


Detailed instructions on the lubrication and maintenance requirements are provided in the
operating instructions of the relevant equipment.

Dispose of oils, fuels, brake fluids, batteries and filters in accordance with regulations and environmental
conditions. Never dump waste in or on the soil, in the drainage system or in waterways. Oils, fuels and brake
fluid must only be stored in specified containers.
Environmentally polluting and toxic substances and components must be removed via the appropriate waste
disposal channel (recycling).

Explanation: Oil Grease Oils and greases:

Gear oil: MILL2105 A


10 hours 10h
(APIGL5) SAE 90
10h
Hydraulic oil: Hydraulic oil DIN 51524
HLP 46
50 hours 50h
Lubricating grease: SAE EP multipurpose grease
50h
NLG 2
Lubricating oil: Lubricating oil DIN 51501
400 hours 400h LAN 100
400h

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 3


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

1 Reel spiders 50
Reel bearing 2 10
2 Side cutter, rape harvester 10
3 Cutter guide and knife 10
4 Knife gear 1 50*
Knife head 1 10*
5 Reel drive 50
6 Intake auger, tine guides 400
7 Intake auger, tine bearings 400
8 Chain drive, intake auger 10
9 Reel variator 2 50
10 PTO shaft, cutting table drive
Joints 4 10
Longitudinal splines on sliding section 50
11 Wide-angle articulated shaft 4/8** 10
3/8** 50

* 1 stroke of the manual grease gun


** Depending on version

1 5 9

2 3 4 6 7 8 10

11 34940-1

4 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

10h

50h

10h
10h

32166 32175 32171

1 2 3

50h

50h
10h

400h

32172 33803 32169

4 5 6

10h

50h

50h

400h
32170 32173 32168

7 8 9

50h 10h 10h 50h

50h

50h

35384 50h 32791

10 11

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 5


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

20 Tilting frame sliding surfaces* 3 10


21 Lubrication distributor Balance 1 10 (10 strokes
with manual grease gun)
22 Reduction gear bearing, cutting table drive, right 1 50
23 Bearing for hinged step 1 400

23

22

20

34940-1
21

* only for Balance

6 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

10h

50h

10h

33426 32872 35482

20 21 22

400h

32792

23

Lubrication divider
Balance (21)

1+2 Journal bearing


3+4 Journal bearing
5+6 Hydraulic cylinder rear
7+8 Hydraulic cylinder front

35618

For more information about


lubrication divider blocks refer to
section "lubrication divider right
side (pos. 84)

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 7


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

30 Tilting frame, left 2 10


31 Idler pulley for cutting table drive 1 50
32 Drive shaft, left 2 10
33 Cutting table clutch 1 50
34 Operating lever, discharge pipe 1 50
35 Drive chain, discharge pipe - 50
36 Idler pulley, turbo separator drive 1 50
Idler pulley, straw walker countershaft drive 1 50
37 Synchronised drive (optional) 1 50

37

33 34 35 36

31

30 32

8 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

10h

50h

10h
33804
35434 35435

30 31 32

50h

50h

50h

35432 90041 90005

33 34 35

50h
50h 35433 35483

36 37

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 9


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs


40 Idler pulley, sieve box reduction gear 1 50
Sieve box reduction gear 1 50
41 Crank rod and swivel lever, left 3 50
Grain auger chain 50
42 Lubrication distributor, left 1 10 (10 strokes
with manual grease gun)
43 Axle journal, steering axle, left 1 10
44 Hub, left 400
45 Straw chopper bearing, left 1 10*/50*

* Depending on the version, a sticker stating the relevant interval must be displayed.

40 41 42 43 46

44 34940-1

10 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

50h
50h
50h

50h

50h

10h
35437 35369 90053
40 41 42

400h

10h

10h
35436 33792 33763

43 44 45

Lubrication divider left side


(42)
Installation Diagram

1 Bent pipe discharge pipe


2 Slewing rim bent tube
3 Slewing rim bent tube
4 Angular gear grain tank discharge
5 Turbo separator
6 Impeller
7 Threshing drum
8 Shaft of sieve pitman arm
9 Bearing feed passage For more information about lubrication
divider blocks refer to section "lubrication
11 Bearing feed passage shaft divider right side(pos. 84)

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 11


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

50 Straw chopper bearing, right 1 10*/50*


51 Idler pulley, KPAB chaff spreader 1 50
52 Bearing, KPAB chaff spreader 2 50
53 Shaft, HEULING chaff spreader, left and right 2 50
54 Self-aligning bearing, steering axle 1 50
Trailer coupling 1 50
55 Automatic trailer coupling 1 50
2 400
56 Axle journal, steering axle, right 1 10
58 Hub, right 400
59 Idler pulley, straw chopper drive 1 50

* Depending on the version, a sticker stating the relevant interval must be displayed.

50 51 52 55 56 58

53 54 57 34393-2

12 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

10h
35439 50h 35491 50h 35492

50 51 52

400h

50h
50h
400h

35454 35440 50h 32795

53 54 55

50h 50h
400h
10h

35441 33792 35443

56 57 58

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 13


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

60 Idler pulley, straw walker drive 1 50


61 Straw walker countershaft 2 10
62 Idler pulley, straw chopper clutch 1 50
63 Grain tank clutch 2 50
64 Threshing mechanism clutch 1 50
65 Swivel lever, right 2 50
66 Crankshaft, right 1 50
Bearing, sieve crank 1 50
67 Fan variator 2 10

63 64

65

60 61 62 66 67

34939-2

14 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

10h
50h

33945 35445 35444

60 61 62

50h

50h 50h
50h

35361 33775 35446

63 64 65

10h

50h

35447 35495

66 67

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 15


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

70 Idler drum, belt, grain tank emptying 1 50


71 Drive chain, grain elevator 400
Bearing, grain tank delivery auger drive 1 50
72 Idler pulley, threshing section 1 50
73 Speed adjustment, threshing drum variator 3 50
74 Adjusting motor, threshing drum variator 1 50
Chain, threshing drum variator adjustment 400
75 Threshing drum reduction gear 2 50
76 Drive shaft, right 2 10
77 Reversing device, crown wheel 400
Tilting frame, right* 2 50

73

70 71 74

75 72 76 77

34939-2

* only for Balance

16 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

50h

50h

35450 400h 33807

70 71 72

50h

50h

400h

50h

50h 35496 35497

73 74 75

50h 50h
10h

400h

35452 33761

76 77

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 17


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

80 Bearing, reduction gear, cutting table drive, right 1 50


81 Brake pedal shaft 2 50
82 Tensioning pulley mount 1 50
Fan bearing 2 50
83 Cardan joints grain tank filling auger 2 50

82 83

81

80

34939-2

18 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

50h

50h

50h
35498 35453

80 81 82

50h

50h

90101

83

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 19


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Number Interval/Hrs

84 Lubrication divider right side 1 10


(8 strokes with grease gun)

84

34939-2

20 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

Lubrication divider
right side (84)

10h

1. Bearing feed passage


35618 2. Bearing feed passage shaft
3. Elevator head
80 4. Threshing drum
5. Impeller
6. Turbo separator
7. Engine bearing
8. Shaft of sieve pitman arm

Installation diagrams of lubrication Instructions for trouble shooting


divider blocks ATTENTION!
In the installation diagrams, the allocation and It is not admissible to obturate
assignment of the points of lubrication to the individual lines from the divider block to
corresponding divider block is shown. the point of lubrication (e.g. a ruptured
hose line) as thereby the remaining

If lines are replaced, they must be


connected according to the installation
points of lubrication of the
corresponding divider block will be also
diagram as the amount of grease for each blocked.
point of lubrication is metered individually
by the corresponding divider block valve! - If the divider block cannot be lubricated, identify
the clogging point of lubrication and clear.
- ICall on a specialised workshop if necessary.

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 21


Lubrication schedule 5650-90

Figure Lubrication point Check level Oil change


Interval/Hrs Interval/Hrs

90 Side gears, left and right 20 then every 500 50 then every 500*
91 Shift gearbox 100 50 then every 500*
92 Shift gearbox, drain plug
93 Angle gearbox, bottom of grain 100 50 then every 2000
94 Hydraulic oil tank Daily 50 then every 1000*
95 Threshing-drum reduction (optional) 100 50 then every 500*

* At least once per year

22 307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006


5650-90 Lubrication schedule

E K

E/K

A
A
33802 35485 35486

90 91 92

K
E/K
E/K

90006 31551

93 94 95

A = Oil drain plug


E = Oil filler cap
K = Oil dipstick

307.7326.3.6 englisch (en) 02.2006 23


307. 7326. 3. 6
04/2006

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen